Seats and Restraint Systems ........................... 1-1 Front Seats ............................................... 1-2 Rear Seats ............................................... 1-6 Safety Belts .............................................. 1-8 Child Restraints ....................................... 1-28 Air Bag Systems ...................................... 1-49 Restraint System Check ............................ 1-58 Features and Controls ..................................... 2-1 Keys ........................................................ 2-3 Doors and Locks ....................................... 2-8 Windows ................................................. 2-14 Theft-Deterrent Systems ............................ 2-16 Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ........... 2-18 Mirrors .................................................... 2-34 OnStar ® System ...................................... 2-37 HomeLink ® Transmitter ............................. 2-39 Storage Areas ......................................... 2-42 Sunroof .................................................. 2-50 Vehicle Personalization ............................. 2-50 Instrument Panel ............................................. 3-1 Instrument Panel Overview .......................... 3-4 Climate Controls ...................................... 3-20 Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators ......... 3-32 Driver Information Center (DIC) .................. 3-48 Audio System(s) ....................................... 3-61 Driving Your Vehicle ....................................... 4-1 Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle ..... 4-2 Towing ................................................... 4-44 Service and Appearance Care .......................... 5-1 Service ..................................................... 5-3 Fuel ......................................................... 5-4 Checking Things Under the Hood ............... 5-10 Rear Axle ............................................... 5-46 Four-Wheel Drive ..................................... 5-46 Front Axle ............................................... 5-47 Bulb Replacement .................................... 5-48 Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ......... 5-49 Tires ...................................................... 5-52 Appearance Care ..................................... 5-83 Vehicle Identification ................................. 5-91 Electrical System ...................................... 5-92 Capacities and Specifications ................... 5-104 Maintenance Schedule ..................................... 6-1 Maintenance Schedule ................................ 6-2 Customer Assistance and Information .............. 7-1 Customer Assistance and Information ........... 7-2 Reporting Safety Defects ........................... 7-10 Index ................................................................ 1 2004 Chevrolet TrailBlazer Owner Manual M
Transcript
Seats and Restraint Systems ........................... 1-1Front Seats ............................................... 1-2Rear Seats ............................................... 1-6Safety Belts .............................................. 1-8Child Restraints ....................................... 1-28Air Bag Systems ...................................... 1-49Restraint System Check ............................ 1-58
Features and Controls ..................................... 2-1Keys ........................................................ 2-3Doors and Locks ....................................... 2-8Windows ................................................. 2-14Theft-Deterrent Systems ............................ 2-16Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ........... 2-18Mirrors .................................................... 2-34OnStar® System ...................................... 2-37HomeLink® Transmitter ............................. 2-39Storage Areas ......................................... 2-42Sunroof .................................................. 2-50Vehicle Personalization ............................. 2-50
Instrument Panel ............................................. 3-1Instrument Panel Overview .......................... 3-4Climate Controls ...................................... 3-20Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators ......... 3-32Driver Information Center (DIC) .................. 3-48Audio System(s) ....................................... 3-61
Driving Your Vehicle ....................................... 4-1Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle ..... 4-2Towing ................................................... 4-44
Service and Appearance Care .......................... 5-1Service ..................................................... 5-3Fuel ......................................................... 5-4Checking Things Under the Hood ............... 5-10Rear Axle ............................................... 5-46Four-Wheel Drive ..................................... 5-46Front Axle ............................................... 5-47Bulb Replacement .................................... 5-48Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ......... 5-49Tires ...................................................... 5-52Appearance Care ..................................... 5-83Vehicle Identification ................................. 5-91Electrical System ...................................... 5-92Capacities and Specifications ................... 5-104
Customer Assistance and Information .............. 7-1Customer Assistance and Information ........... 7-2Reporting Safety Defects ........................... 7-10
Index ................................................................ 1
2004 Chevrolet TrailBlazer Owner Manual M
GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem,CHEVROLET, the CHEVROLET Emblem and the nameTRAILBLAZER/TRAILBLAZER EXT are registeredtrademarks of General Motors Corporation.
This manual includes the latest information at the time itwas printed. We reserve the right to make changesafter that time without further notice. For vehicles firstsold in Canada, substitute the name “General Motors ofCanada Limited” for Chevrolet Motor Division wheneverit appears in this manual.
Please keep this manual in your vehicle, so it will bethere if you ever need it when you’re on the road. If yousell the vehicle, please leave this manual in it so thenew owner can use it.
Canadian OwnersYou can obtain a French copy of this manual from yourdealer or from:
Helm, IncorporatedP.O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207
How to Use This ManualMany people read their owner’s manual from beginningto end when they first receive their new vehicle. Ifyou do this, it will help you learn about the features andcontrols for your vehicle. In this manual, you will findthat pictures and words work together to explain things.
IndexA good place to look for what you need is the Index inback of the manual. It is an alphabetical list of whatis in the manual, and the page number where you willfind it.
ii
Safety Warnings and SymbolsYou will find a number of safety cautions in this book.We use a box and the word CAUTION to tell you aboutthings that could hurt you if you were to ignore thewarning.
{CAUTION:
These mean there is something that could hurtyou or other people.
In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is.Then we tell you what to do to help avoid or reduce thehazard. Please read these cautions. If you don’t, youor others could be hurt.
You will also find a circlewith a slash through it inthis book. This safetysymbol means “Don’t,”“Don’t do this” or “Don’t letthis happen.”
iii
Vehicle Damage WarningsAlso, in this book you will find these notices:
Notice: These mean there is something that coulddamage your vehicle.
A notice will tell you about something that can damageyour vehicle. Many times, this damage would not becovered by your warranty, and it could be costly. Butthe notice will tell you what to do to help avoidthe damage.
When you read other manuals, you might seeCAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colors or indifferent words.
You’ll also see warning labels on your vehicle. They usethe same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.
Vehicle SymbolsYour vehicle has components and labels that usesymbols instead of text. Symbols, used on your vehicle,are shown along with the text describing the operationor information relating to a specific component, control,message, gage or indicator.
If you need help figuring out a specific name of acomponent, gage or indicator, reference the followingtopics:
• Seats and Restraint Systems in Section 1
• Features and Controls in Section 2
• Instrument Panel Overview in Section 3
• Climate Controls in Section 3
• Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators in Section 3
• Audio System(s) in Section 3
• Engine Compartment Overview in Section 5
iv
These are some examples of symbols you may find on your vehicle:
Safety Belts .....................................................1-8Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone .................1-8Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ......1-13How to Wear Safety Belts Properly .................1-14Driver Position ..............................................1-14Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ..................1-20Right Front Passenger Position .......................1-21Rear Seat Passengers ..................................1-21Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for
Children and Small Adults ..........................1-24Safety Belt Extender .....................................1-28
Child Restraints .............................................1-28Older Children ..............................................1-28Infants and Young Children ............................1-31Child Restraint Systems .................................1-34
Where to Put the Restraint .............................1-37Top Strap ....................................................1-38Top Strap Anchor Location .............................1-39Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) ...........................1-40Securing a Child Restraint Designed for
the LATCH System ....................................1-42Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear
Outside Seat Position ................................1-43Securing a Child Restraint in the Center
Seat Position ............................................1-46Securing a Child Restraint in the Right
Front Seat Position ....................................1-46Air Bag Systems ............................................1-49
Where Are the Air Bags? ...............................1-52When Should an Air Bag Inflate? ....................1-54What Makes an Air Bag Inflate? .....................1-55How Does an Air Bag Restrain? .....................1-56What Will You See After an Air
Bag Inflates? ............................................1-56Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle .........1-58
Restraint System Check ..................................1-58Checking Your Restraint Systems ...................1-58Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash ............................................1-59
Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems
1-1
Front Seats
Manual Seats
{CAUTION:
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try toadjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicleis moving. The sudden movement could startleand confuse you, or make you push a pedalwhen you don’t want to. Adjust the driver’sseat only when the vehicle is not moving.
Pull up on the lever located under the front of themanual seat to unlock it. Slide the seat to where you wantit and release the lever. Then try to move the seat withyour body to make sure the seat is locked into place.
Power Seats
If you have this feature,the power seat controlsare located on theoutboard side of the frontseat cushions. Thehorizontal control adjuststhe seat cushion andthe vertical control adjuststhe seatback.
• Move the front of the seat control up or down toadjust the front portion of the cushion.
• Move the rear of the seat control up or down toadjust the rear portion of the cushion.
• Lift up or push down on the center of the seatcontrol to move the entire seat up or down.
• To move the seat forward or rearward, slide theseat control forward or rearward.
• To recline the seatback, press the vertical controlrearward. To raise the seatback, press the verticalcontrol forward.
1-2
Manual LumbarYour vehicle may have this feature. This control islocated on the outboard side of the seat.
Turn the knob counterclockwise to increase lumbarsupport and clockwise to decrease lumbar support.
Power LumbarYour vehicle may have this feature. The driver’s andpassenger’s seatback lumbar support can be adjustedby moving a single control located on the outboardside of the seat cushions. To increase or decreasesupport, hold the control forward or rearward.
Keep in mind that as your seating position changes, asit may during long trips, so should the position ofyour lumbar support. Adjust the seat as needed.
Heated Seats
Your vehicle may haveheated front seats. Thebuttons used to control thisfeature are located onthe front door armrests.The engine must berunning for the heated seatfeature to work.
To heat the entire seat, press the horizontal button withthe heated seat symbol. Press the button repeatedlyto cycle through the temperature settings of high,medium, low and off. The indicator lights will glow todesignate the level of heat selected: three for high, twofor medium and one for low. The low setting warmsthe seatback and cushion until the seat temperature isnear body temperature. The medium and highsettings heat the seatback and seat cushion to a slightlyhigher temperature. You will be able to feel heat inabout two minutes.
1-3
To heat only the seatback, press the button with thewords BACK ONLY. An indicator light on the switch willglow to designate that only the seatback is beingheated. Additional presses will cycle through the heatlevels for the seatback only. Press the horizontal buttonagain to heat the whole seat.
The feature will shut off automatically when the ignitionis turned off.
Reclining SeatbacksIf your vehicle has a manual recliner, lift the leverlocated on the outboard side of the seat and push theseatback rearward to recline the seatback. To return theseatback to the normal position, lift the lever withoutpushing rearward on the seatback and the seatback willmove forward.
If your vehicle has power seat controls, the verticalpower seat control described earlier allows the seatbackto recline.
But don’t have a seatback reclined if your vehicle ismoving.
1-4
{CAUTION:
Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicleis in motion can be dangerous. Even if youbuckle up, your safety belts can’t do their jobwhen you’re reclined like this.
The shoulder belt can’t do its job. In a crash,you could go into it, receiving neck or otherinjuries.
The lap belt can’t do its job either. In a crashthe belt could go up over your abdomen. Thebelt forces would be there, not at your pelvicbones. This could cause serious internalinjuries.
For proper protection when the vehicle is inmotion, have the seatback upright. Then sitwell back in the seat and wear your safety beltproperly.
Head Restraints
Adjust your head restraint so that the top of the restraintis closest to the top of your head. This positionreduces the chance of a neck injury in a crash.
The head restraints lock into place when raised. Torelease the head restraint and lower it, press thetab located on the top of the seatback.
1-5
Rear Seats
Rear Seat OperationYour vehicle may have a folding rear seat which letsyou fold the seatbacks down for more cargo space.
Pull up on the loop located where the seat cushionmeets the seatback to fold the seat cushion up and outof the way. This will allow the seatback to fold flatand increase the cargo area.
The rear seatback leversare located on theoutboard side of the rearseatbacks.
Pull the seatback toward you as you lift up on the lever.The head restraint will automatically fold out of theway when the seatback is folded down.
To raise the seatbacks, lift up the seatbacks and pushon them until they lock into the upright position.Push and pull on the seatbacks to make sure that theyare latched securely. Then fold the bottom seatcushion back into place.
1-6
To return the head restraint to the upright position,reach behind the seat and pull the restraint up until itlocks into place. Push and pull on the head restraint tomake sure that it is latched securely.
Rear Seats (TrailBlazer EXT)The second row seat is a 65/35 split seat which may befolded and tumbled. Use this feature for gainingaccess to the third row seats.
To fold and tumble the second row seat(s), do thefollowing:
1. Push the head restraints fully down.
2. Fold the seatback flat on the seat by pulling up onthe front part of the fold and tumble lever. The leveris located on the outboard side of the seat(indicated as 1 on the handle side cover).
3. Release the rear set of seat hooks from the floorpins by pulling up on the rear part of the lever(indicated as 2 on the handle side cover). Thisenables the seat to be tumbled forward.
1-7
Returning the Seats to an Upright PositionTo return the seat(s) to the upright position, do thefollowing:
1. Pull the bottom of the seat release lever towardsthe front of the vehicle to release the seat. Thelever is located at the bottom of the seat cushion onthe outboard side of each second row seat.
2. Return the seat to the floor pins by rotating the seatdown to reengage the seat hooks.
3. Try to raise the seat to check that it is locked down.4. Pull the seat back up to return it to the upright
position.
Entry/Exit to/from the Third Row SeatTo enter the third row seat, you must fold and tumblethe second row seat following the instructions givenpreviously.If you are exiting the third row with no assistance, dothe following.
1. Pull the handle on the center of the second rowseatback down to release and fold the seatback.
2. Reach around to the side of the second row seatand pull the back of the seat lever up to tumblethe entire seat.
Be sure to return the seat to the upright position whenyou are finished. Never use the third row as a seatingposition while the second row is folded and tumbled.
Folding the Third Row Seats1. Pull up on the handle located on the bottom of the
seat cushion to release the seat cushion.
2. Lift up the seat, and then pull it forward.
3. Fold the seatback forward until it is flat.
4. Unhook the elastic loop on the back of the seatback.
5. Fold the panel located on the back of the seatbackto make a flat surface.
Returning the Seat(s) to an UprightPositionTo return the seat to its original position, reverse thesteps listed previously in folding the third row seats.
Safety Belts
Safety Belts: They Are for EveryoneThis part of the manual tells you how to use safetybelts properly. It also tells you some things you shouldnot do with safety belts.
1-8
{CAUTION:
Don’t let anyone ride where he or she can’twear a safety belt properly. If you are in acrash and you’re not wearing a safety belt,your injuries can be much worse. You can hitthings inside the vehicle or be ejected from it.You can be seriously injured or killed. In thesame crash, you might not be, if you arebuckled up. Always fasten your safety belt,and check that your passengers’ belts arefastened properly too.
{CAUTION:
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargoarea, inside or outside of a vehicle. In acollision, people riding in these areas are morelikely to be seriously injured or killed. Donotallow people to ride in any area of yourvehicle that is not equipped with seats andsafety belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicleis in a seat and using a safety belt properly.
Your vehicle has a lightthat comes on as areminder to buckle up. SeeSafety Belt ReminderLight on page 3-35.
In most states and in all Canadian provinces, the lawsays to wear safety belts. Here’s why: They work.
You never know if you’ll be in a crash. If you do have acrash, you don’t know if it will be a bad one.
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be soserious that even buckled up, a person wouldn’t survive.But most crashes are in between. In many of them,people who buckle up can survive and sometimes walkaway. Without belts they could have been badly hurtor killed.
After more than 30 years of safety belts in vehicles, thefacts are clear. In most crashes buckling up doesmatter... a lot!
1-9
Why Safety Belts WorkWhen you ride in or on anything, you go as fast asit goes.
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it’s just a seaton wheels.
Put someone on it.
1-10
Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The riderdoesn’t stop.
The person keeps going until stopped by something. Ina real vehicle, it could be the windshield...
1-11
or the instrument panel... or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance,and your strongest bones take the forces. That’s whysafety belts make such good sense.
1-12
Questions and Answers AboutSafety Belts
Q: Won’t I be trapped in the vehicle after anaccident if I’m wearing a safety belt?
A: You could be – whether you’re wearing a safetybelt or not. But you can unbuckle a safety belt,even if you’re upside down. And your chanceof being conscious during and after an accident,so you can unbuckle and get out, is much greater ifyou are belted.
Q: If my vehicle has air bags, why should I have towear safety belts?
A: Air bags are in many vehicles today and will be inmost of them in the future. But they aresupplemental systems only; so they work withsafety belts – not instead of them. Every air bagsystem ever offered for sale has required theuse of safety belts. Even if you’re in a vehicle thathas air bags, you still have to buckle up to getthe most protection. That’s true not only in frontalcollisions, but especially in side and othercollisions.
Q: If I’m a good driver, and I never drive far fromhome, why should I wear safety belts?
A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you’re in anaccident – even one that isn’t your fault – you andyour passengers can be hurt. Being a gooddriver doesn’t protect you from things beyond yourcontrol, such as bad drivers.
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km) ofhome. And the greatest number of serious injuriesand deaths occur at speeds of less than40 mph (65 km/h).
Safety belts are for everyone.
1-13
How to Wear Safety Belts ProperlyThis part is only for people of adult size.
Be aware that there are special things to know aboutsafety belts and children. And there are differentrules for smaller children and babies. If a child will beriding in your vehicle, see Older Children on page 1-28or Infants and Young Children on page 1-31. Followthose rules for everyone’s protection.
First, you’ll want to know which restraint systems yourvehicle has.
We’ll start with the driver position.
Driver PositionThis part describes the driver’s restraint system.
Lap-Shoulder BeltThe driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here’s how to wear itproperly.
1. Close and lock the door.
2. Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight. To seehow, see “Seats” in the Index.
3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.Don’t let it get twisted.
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.If the belt isn’t long enough, see Safety BeltExtender on page 1-28.Make sure the release button on the buckle ispositioned so you would be able to unbuckle thesafety belt quickly if you ever had to.
1-14
5. To make the lap part tight, pull up on theshoulder belt.
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug onthe hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, thisapplies force to the strong pelvic bones. And you’d beless likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it,the belt would apply force at your abdomen. Thiscould cause serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulderbelt should go over the shoulder and across thechest. These parts of the body are best able to take beltrestraining forces.
The safety belt locks if there’s a sudden stop or crash,or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor.
1-15
Q: What’s wrong with this?
A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It won’t give nearlyas much protection this way.
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder beltis too loose. In a crash, you would moveforward too much, which could increase injury.The shoulder belt should fit against your body.
1-16
Q: What’s wrong with this?
A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt isbuckled in the wrong place like this. In a crash,the belt would go up over your abdomen. Thebelt forces would be there, not at the pelvicbones. This could cause serious internalinjuries. Always buckle your belt into thebuckle nearest you.
1-17
Q: What’s wrong with this?
A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It shouldbe worn over the shoulder at all times.
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if you wear theshoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, yourbody would move too far forward, which wouldincrease the chance of head and neck injury.Also, the belt would apply too much force tothe ribs, which aren’t as strong as shoulderbones. You could also severely injure internalorgans like your liver or spleen.
1-18
Q: What’s wrong with this?
A: The belt is twisted across the body.
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt.In a crash, you wouldn’t have the full width ofthe belt to spread impact forces. If a belt istwisted, make it straight so it can workproperly, or ask your dealer to fix it.
1-19
To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.The belt should go back out of the way.
Before you close the door, be sure the belt is out of theway. If you slam the door on it, you can damageboth the belt and your vehicle.
Safety Belt Use During PregnancySafety belts work for everyone, including pregnantwomen. Like all occupants, they are more likely to beseriously injured if they don’t wear safety belts.
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, andthe lap portion should be worn as low as possible,below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.
1-20
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect themother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it’s morelikely that the fetus won’t be hurt in a crash. Forpregnant women, as for anyone, the key to makingsafety belts effective is wearing them properly.
Right Front Passenger PositionTo learn how to wear the right front passenger’s safetybelt properly, see Driver Position on page 1-14.
The right front passenger’s safety belt works the sameway as the driver’s safety belt – except for one thing.If you ever pull the shoulder portion of the belt out all theway, you will engage the child restraint locking feature.If this happens, just let the belt go back all the wayand start again.
Rear Seat PassengersIt is very important for rear seat passengers to buckleup! Accident statistics show that unbelted people inthe rear seat are hurt more often in crashes than thosewho are wearing safety belts.
Rear passengers who are not safety belted can bethrown out of the vehicle in a crash. And they can strikeothers in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.
Rear Seat Passenger Positions
1-21
Lap-Shoulder BeltAll rear seating positions have lap-shoulder belts. Hereis how to wear one properly.
1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.Do not let it get twisted.
2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
When the shoulder belt is pulled out all the way, itwill lock. If it does, let it go back all the wayand start again. If the belt is not long enough, seeSafety Belt Extender on page 1-28.Make sure the release button on the buckle ispositioned so you would be able to unbuckle thesafety belt quickly if you ever had to.
3. To make the lap part tight, pull up on theshoulder part.
1-22
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug onthe hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash thisapplies force to the strong pelvic bones. And you wouldbe less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slidunder it, the belt would apply force at your abdomen.This could cause serious or even fatal injuries. Theshoulder belt should go over the shoulder and acrossthe chest. These parts of the body are best able to takebelt restraining forces.
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder beltis too loose. In a crash, you would moveforward too much, which could increase injury.The shoulder belt should fit against your body.
1-23
To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides forChildren and Small AdultsRear shoulder belt comfort guides provide added safetybelt comfort for older children who have outgrownbooster seats and for small adults. When attached to ashoulder belt, the comfort guide better positions thebelt away from the neck and head.
There is one guide for each of the rear outsidepassenger positions. Here is how to attach the comfortguide to the shoulder belt.
1-24
Style 11. Slide the guide off of its storage clip located
between the interior body and the seatback.
2. Slide the guide under and past the belt. The elasticcord must be under the belt. Then, place the guideover the belt and insert the two edges of thebelt into the slots of the guide.
3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat.The elastic cord must be under the belt and theguide on top.
1-25
4. Buckle, position and release the safety belt asdescribed in Rear Seat Passengers on page 1-21.Make sure that the shoulder belt crosses theshoulder.
To remove and store the comfort guides, squeeze thebelt edges together so that you can take them out of theguides. Slide the guide back on its storage clip locatedbetween the interior body and the seatback.
Style 21. An elastic cord with a hook end is located in a
pocket on the side of the seatback. Remove theguide from its pocket.
2. Align the sliding comfort guide, located on theshoulder belt, with the hook. Attach the hook tothe loop on the sliding comfort guide.
1-26
3. Adjust the cord length so that the belt is betweenthe shoulder and neck.
3.1. Squeeze and hold the ends of the lock (A)on the elastic cord.
3.2. Pull the loop to shorten the guide or pull thecord to lengthen the guide.
3.3. Release the lock.
4. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat.The elastic cord must be under the belt and theguide on top.
5. Buckle, position and release the safety belt asdescribed in Rear Seat Passengers on page 1-21.Make sure that the shoulder belt crosses theshoulder.
To remove and store the comfort guides, remove thehook from the loop. Slide the guide back into its storagepocket located on the side of the seatback.
1-27
Safety Belt ExtenderIf the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you, youshould use it.
But if a safety belt isn’t long enough to fasten, yourdealer will order you an extender. It’s free. When you goin to order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, sothe extender will be long enough for you. The extenderwill be just for you, and just for the seat in yourvehicle that you choose. Don’t let someone else use it,and use it only for the seat it is made to fit. To wearit, just attach it to the regular safety belt.
Child Restraints
Older Children
Older children who have outgrown booster seats shouldwear the vehicle’s safety belts.
1-28
Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?
A: If possible, an older child should wear alap-shoulder belt and get the additional restraint ashoulder belt can provide. The shoulder beltshould not cross the face or neck. The lap beltshould fit snugly below the hips, just touching thetop of the thighs. It should never be worn overthe abdomen, which could cause severe or evenfatal internal injuries in a crash.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if theyare restrained in the rear seat.
In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strikeother people who are buckled up, or can be thrownout of the vehicle. Older children need to use safetybelts properly.
{CAUTION:
Never do this.Here two children are wearing the same belt.The belt can’t properly spread the impactforces. In a crash, the two children can becrushed together and seriously injured. A beltmust be used by only one person at a time.
1-29
Q: What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulder belt,but the child is so small that the shoulder beltis very close to the child’s face or neck?
A: If the child is sitting in a seat next to a window,move the child toward the center of the vehicle. Ifthe child is sitting in the center rear seatpassenger position, move the child toward thesafety belt buckle. In either case, be sure that theshoulder belt still is on the child’s shoulder, sothat in a crash the child’s upper body would havethe restraint the belts provide.
If the child is sitting in a rear seat outside position,see Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for Childrenand Small Adults on page 1-24.
1-30
{CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here a child is sitting in a seat that has alap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part isbehind the child. If the child wears the belt inthis way, in a crash the child might slide underthe belt. The belt’s force would then be appliedright on the child’s abdomen. That could causeserious or fatal injuries.
Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the beltshould be worn low and snug on the hips, just touchingthe child’s thighs. This applies belt force to the child’spelvic bones in a crash.
Infants and Young ChildrenEveryone in a vehicle needs protection! This includesinfants and all other children. Neither the distancetraveled nor the age and size of the traveler changesthe need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact,the law in every state in the United States and inevery Canadian province says children up to some agemust be restrained while in a vehicle.
Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles,they should have the protection provided by appropriaterestraints. Young children should not use the vehicle’sadult safety belts alone, unless there is no other choice.Instead, they need to use a child restraint.
1-31
{CAUTION:
People should never hold a baby in their armswhile riding in a vehicle. A baby doesn’t weighmuch -- until a crash. During a crash a baby willbecome so heavy it is not possible to hold it.
CAUTION: (Continued)
CAUTION: (Continued)
For example, in a crash at only 25 mph(40 km/h), a 12-lb. (5.5 kg) baby will suddenlybecome a 240-lb. (110 kg) force on a person’sarms. A baby should be secured in anappropriate restraint.
1-32
{CAUTION:
Children who are up against, or very close to,any air bag when it inflates can be seriouslyinjured or killed. Air bags plus lap-shoulderbelts offer outstanding protection for adults andolder children, but not for young children andinfants. Neither the vehicle’s safety belt systemnor its air bag system is designed for them.Young children and infants need the protectionthat a child restraint system can provide.
Q: What are the different types of add-on childrestraints?
A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased bythe vehicle’s owner, are available in four basictypes. Selection of a particular restraint should takeinto consideration not only the child’s weight,height, and age but also whether or not therestraint will be compatible with the motor vehiclein which it will be used.
For most basic types of child restraints, there aremany different models available. When purchasing achild restraint, be sure it is designed to be usedin a motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will have alabel saying that it meets federal motor vehiclesafety standards.
The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that comewith the restraint state the weight and heightlimitations for a particular child restraint. In addition,there are many kinds of restraints available forchildren with special needs.
{CAUTION:
Newborn infants need complete support,including support for the head and neck. This isnecessary because a newborn infant’s neck isweak and its head weighs so much comparedwith the rest of its body. In a crash, an infant in arear-facing seat settles into the restraint, so thecrash forces can be distributed across thestrongest part of an infant’s body, the back andshoulders. Infants always should be secured inappropriate infant restraints.
1-33
{CAUTION:
The body structure of a young child is quiteunlike that of an adult or older child, for whomthe safety belts are designed. A young child’ship bones are still so small that the vehicle’sregular safety belt may not remain low on thehip bones, as it should. Instead, it may settleup around the child’s abdomen. In a crash, thebelt would apply force on a body area that’sunprotected by any bony structure. This alonecould cause serious or fatal injuries. Youngchildren always should be secured inappropriate child restraints.
Child Restraint Systems
An infant car bed (A), a special bed made for use in amotor vehicle, is an infant restraint system designedto restrain or position a child on a continuous flatsurface. Make sure that the infant’s head rests towardthe center of the vehicle.
1-34
A rear-facing infant seat (B) provides restraint with theseating surface against the back of the infant. Theharness system holds the infant in place and, in a crash,acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint.
A forward-facing child seat (C-E) provides restraint forthe child’s body with the harness and also sometimeswith surfaces such as T-shaped or shelf-like shields.
1-35
A booster seat (F-G) is a child restraint designed toimprove the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system. Somebooster seats have a shoulder belt positioner, andsome high-back booster seats have a five-point harness.A booster seat can also help a child to see out thewindow.
Q: How do child restraints work?
A: A child restraint system is any device designed foruse in a motor vehicle to restrain, seat, or positionchildren. A built-in child restraint system is apermanent part of the motor vehicle. An add-onchild restraint system is a portable one, whichis purchased by the vehicle’s owner.
For many years, add-on child restraints have usedthe adult belt system in the vehicle. To helpreduce the chance of injury, the child also has to besecured within the restraint. The vehicle’s beltsystem secures the add-on child restraint in thevehicle, and the add-on child restraint’s harnesssystem holds the child in place within the restraint.
One system, the three-point harness, has straps thatcome down over each of the infant’s shoulders andbuckle together at the crotch. The five-point harnesssystem has two shoulder straps, two hip straps and acrotch strap. A shield may take the place of hipstraps. A T-shaped shield has shoulder straps thatare attached to a flat pad which rests low against thechild’s body. A shelf- or armrest-type shield hasstraps that are attached to a wide, shelf-like shieldthat swings up or to the side.
1-36
When choosing a child restraint, be sure the childrestraint is designed to be used in a vehicle. If it is, itwill have a label saying that it meets federal motorvehicle safety standards.
Then follow the instructions for the restraint. You mayfind these instructions on the restraint itself or in abooklet, or both. These restraints use the belt system orthe LATCH system in your vehicle, but the child alsohas to be secured within the restraint to help reduce thechance of personal injury. When securing an add-onchild restraint, refer to the instructions that come with therestraint which may be on the restraint itself or in abooklet, or both, and to this manual. The child restraintinstructions are important, so if they are not available,obtain a replacement copy from the manufacturer.
Where to Put the RestraintAccident statistics show that children are safer if theyare restrained in the rear rather than the front seat. We,therefore, recommend that child restraints be securedin a rear outside seat position including an infantriding in a rear-facing infant seat, a child riding in aforward-facing child seat and an older child riding in abooster seat. Never put a rear-facing child restraintin the front passenger seat.
Here is why:
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can beseriously injured or killed if the right frontpassenger’s air bag inflates. This is becausethe back of the rear-facing child restraintwould be very close to the inflating air bag.Always secure a rear-facing child restraint in arear seat outside position.
If you secure a forward-facing child restraint inthe right front seat, always move the frontpassenger seat as far back as it will go. It isbetter to secure the child restraint in a rearseat outside position.
Wherever you install it, be sure to secure the childrestraint properly.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint canmove around in a collision or sudden stop and injurepeople in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secureany child restraint in your vehicle – even when no childis in it.
1-37
Top StrapSome child restraints have a top strap, or “top tether.” Itcan help restrain the child restraint during a collision.For it to work, a top strap must be properly anchored tothe vehicle. Some top strap-equipped child restraintsare designed for use with or without the top strap beinganchored. Others require the top strap always to beanchored. Be sure to read and follow the instructions foryour child restraint. If yours requires that the top strapbe anchored, do not use the restraint unless it isanchored properly.
If the child restraint does not have a top strap, one canbe obtained, in kit form, for many child restraints.Ask the child restraint manufacturer whether or not a kitis available.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing childrestraints have a top strap, and that the strap beanchored. In the United States, some child restraintsalso have a top strap. If your child restraint has atop strap, it should be anchored.
1-38
{CAUTION:
Each top tether bracket is designed to anchoronly one child restraint. Attaching more thanone child restraint to a single bracket couldcause the anchor to come loose or even breakduring a crash. A child or others could beinjured if this happens. To help prevent injuryto people and damage to your vehicle, attachonly one child restraint per bracket.
Anchor the top strap to one of the following anchorpoints. Be sure to use an anchor point located on thesame side of the vehicle as the seating positionwhere the child restraint will be placed.
Raise the head restraint and route the top strap underit. See Head Restraints on page 1-5.
Once you have the top strap anchored, you will beready to secure the child restraint itself. Tighten the topstrap when and as the child restraint manufacturer’sinstructions say.
Top Strap Anchor Location
Anchor brackets for the rear seat positions are locatedon the floor in the cargo area of your vehicle(TrailBlazer only). Do not use the rear tie-down bracketsnear the liftgate for top strap tethers.
TrailBlazer
1-39
An anchor bracket for a top strap is located at thebottom rear of the seat cushion for each seating positionin the second row (TrailBlazer EXT only). Don’t use achild restraint with a top strap in the right frontpassenger’s position or in the third row, because there’sno place to anchor the top strap.
Lower Anchorages and Top Tethersfor Children (LATCH System)
Your vehicle has the LATCH system. You’ll findanchors (A) in the rear outside seat positions.
TrailBlazer EXT
1-40
This system, designed to make installation of childrestraints easier, does not use the vehicle’s safety belts.Instead, it uses vehicle anchors (A,B) and childrestraint attachments to secure the restraints. Somerestraints also use another vehicle anchor to secure atop tether strap (C).
In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle, youneed a child restraint designed for that system.
1-41
To assist you in locatingthe lower anchors for thischild restraint system,each seating position withthe LATCH system hasa label on the seatback ateach lower anchorposition.
The labels are located near the base of the rear outsideseat positions.
{CAUTION:
If a LATCH-type child restraint is not attachedto its anchorage points, the restraint will notbe able to protect the child correctly. In acrash, the child could be seriously injured orkilled. Make sure that a LATCH-type childrestraint is properly installed using theanchorage points, or use the vehicle’s safetybelts to secure the restraint, following theinstructions that came with that restraint, andalso the instructions in this manual.
Securing a Child Restraint Designedfor the LATCH System
1. Find the LATCH anchorages for the seatingposition you want to use, where the bottom of theseatback meets the back of the seat cushion.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
3. Attach and tighten the LATCH attachments on thechild restraint to the LATCH anchorages in thevehicle. The child restraint instructions will showyou how.
4. If the child restraint is forward-facing, attach andtighten the top tether to the top tether anchorage.The child restraint instructions will show youhow. Also see Top Strap on page 1-38.
5. Push and pull the child restraint in differentdirections to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, simply unhook the toptether from the top tether anchorage and thendisconnect the LATCH attachments from the LATCHanchorages.
1-42
Securing a Child Restraint in a RearOutside Seat Position
If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCHsystem, see Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers forChildren (LATCH System) on page 1-40. See Top Strapon page 1-38 if the child restraint has one.
There are no top strap anchors at the third row seatingpositions. Do not secure a child seat in these positionsif a national or local law requires that the top strapbe anchored, or if the instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top strap must be anchored.
If your child restraint does not have the LATCHsystem, you will be using the lap-shoulder belt to securethe child restraint in this position. Be sure to followthe instructions that came with the child restraint. Securethe child in the child restraint when and as theinstructions say.
1. Put the restraint on the seat.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulderportions of the vehicle’s safety belt through oraround the restraint. The child restraint instructionswill show you how.
1-43
3. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button ispositioned so you would be able to unbuckle thesafety belt quickly if you ever had to.
4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out ofthe retractor to set the lock.
1-44
5. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten thelap portion of the belt and feed the shoulderbelt back into the retractor. If you are using aforward-facing child restraint, you may find it helpfulto use your knee to push down on the childrestraint as you tighten the belt.
6. Push and pull the child restraint in differentdirections to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’ssafety belt and let it go back all the way. The safetybelt will move freely again and be ready to work for anadult or larger child passenger.
1-45
Securing a Child Restraint in theCenter Seat Position
Many child restraints are too wide to be correctlysecured in the center rear seat, although some of themwill fit there. If the center seat position is too narrowfor your child restraint, secure it in a rear outside seatposition.
If you secure a child restraint in the center seat position,follow the instructions in Securing a Child Restraint ina Rear Outside Seat Position on page 1-43.
Securing a Child Restraint in theRight Front Seat Position
1-46
If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCHsystem, see Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers forChildren (LATCH System) on page 1-40. See Top Strapon page 1-38 if the child restraint has one.
Your vehicle has a right front passenger air bag.Never put a rear facing child restraint in this seat.Here is why:
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can beseriously injured or killed if the right frontpassenger’s air bag inflates. This is becausethe back of the rear-facing child restraintwould be very close to the inflating air bag.Always secure a rear-facing child restraint in arear seat.
A rear seat is a safer place to secure a forward-facingchild restraint. If you need to secure a forward-facingchild restraint in the right front seat, you will be using thelap-shoulder belt to secure the child restraint in thisposition. Be sure to follow the instructions that came withthe child restraint. Secure the child in the child restraintwhen and as the instructions say.
1. Because your vehicle has a right front passenger’sair bag, always move the seat as far back as it willgo before securing a forward-facing child restraint.See “Seats” in the Index.
2. Put the restraint on the seat.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulderportions of the vehicle’s safety belt through oraround the restraint. The child restraint instructionswill show you how.
1-47
4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button ispositioned so you would be able to unbuckle thesafety belt quickly if you ever had to.
5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out ofthe retractor to set the lock.
1-48
6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten thelap portion of the belt and feed the shoulderbelt back into the retractor. You may find it helpfulto use your knee to push down on the childrestraint as you tighten the belt.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in differentdirections to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’ssafety belt and let it go back all the way. The safetybelt will move freely again and be ready to work for anadult or larger child passenger.
Air Bag SystemsThis part explains the frontal and side impact air bagsystems.
Your vehicle has air bags – a frontal air bag for thedriver and another frontal air bag for the right frontpassenger. Your vehicle may also have side impact airbags. Side impact air bags are available for thedriver and right front passenger.
If your vehicle has a side impact air bag for the driverand/or the right front passenger, the words AIR BAG willappear on the air bag covering on the side of theseatback closest to the door.
1-49
Frontal air bags are designed to help reduce the risk ofinjury from the force of an inflating frontal air bag.But these air bags must inflate very quickly to do theirjob and comply with federal regulations.
Here are the most important things to know about theair bag systems:
{CAUTION:
You can be severely injured or killed in a crashif you aren’t wearing your safety belt – even ifyou have air bags. Wearing your safety beltduring a crash helps reduce your chance ofhitting things inside the vehicle or beingejected from it. Air bags are designed to workwith safety belts but don’t replace them.
Frontal air bags for the driver and right frontpassenger are designed to deploy only inmoderate to severe frontal and near frontalcrashes. They aren’t designed to inflate at all inrollover, rear or low-speed frontal crashes, or inmany side crashes. And, for some unrestrainedoccupants, frontal air bags may provide lessprotection in frontal crashes than more forcefulair bags have provided in the past.
CAUTION: (Continued)
1-50
CAUTION: (Continued)
The side impact air bags for the driver andright front passenger are designed to inflateonly in moderate to severe crashes wheresomething hits the side of your vehicle. Theyaren’t designed to inflate in frontal, in rolloveror in rear crashes.
Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safetybelt properly – whether or not there’s an airbag for that person.
{CAUTION:
Both frontal and side impact air bags inflatewith great force, faster than the blink of aneye. If you’re too close to an inflating air bag,as you would be if you were leaning forward, itcould seriously injure you. Safety belts helpkeep you in position for air bag inflation before
CAUTION: (Continued)
CAUTION: (Continued)
and during a crash. Always wear your safetybelt, even with frontal air bags. The drivershould sit as far back as possible while stillmaintaining control of the vehicle. Frontoccupants should not lean on or sleep againstthe door.
{CAUTION:
Anyone who is up against, or very close to,any air bag when it inflates can be seriouslyinjured or killed. Air bags plus lap-shoulderbelts offer the best protection for adults, butnot for young children and infants. Neither thevehicle’s safety belt system nor its air bagsystem is designed for them. Young childrenand infants need the protection that a childrestraint system can provide. Always securechildren properly in your vehicle. To read how,see the part of this manual called “OlderChildren” or “Infants and Young Children.”
1-51
There is an air bagreadiness light on theinstrument panel cluster,which shows the airbag symbol.
The system checks the air bag electrical system formalfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electricalproblem. See Air Bag Readiness Light on page 3-35for more information.
Where Are the Air Bags?
The driver’s frontal air bag is in the middle of thesteering wheel.
1-52
The right front passenger’s frontal air bag is in theinstrument panel on the passenger’s side.
If your vehicle has a driver’s side impact air bag it islocated in the side of the driver’s seatback closest tothe door.
1-53
If your vehicle has a right front passenger’s side impactair bag it is located in the side of the passenger’sseatback closest to the door.
{CAUTION:
If something is between an occupant and anair bag, the bag might not inflate properly or itmight force the object into that person causingsevere injury or even death. The path of aninflating air bag must be kept clear. Don’t putanything between an occupant and an air bag,and don’t attach or put anything on thesteering wheel hub or on or near any other airbag covering. Don’t let seat covers block theinflation path of a side impact air bag.
When Should an Air Bag Inflate?The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontal air bagsare designed to inflate in moderate to severe frontalor near-frontal crashes. But they are designed to inflateonly if the impact speed is above the system’sdesigned “threshold level.”
1-54
In addition, your vehicle has “dual stage” frontal airbags, which adjust the amount of restraint according tocrash severity. For moderate frontal impacts, these airbags inflate at a level less than full deployment. For moresevere frontal impacts, full deployment occurs. If the frontof your vehicle goes straight into a wall that doesn’t moveor deform, the threshold level for the reduced deploymentis about 12 to 16 mph (19 to 26 km/h), and the thresholdlevel for a full deployment is about 16 to 25 mph (26 to40 km/h). The threshold level can vary, however, withspecific vehicle design, so that it can be somewhat aboveor below this range.
If your vehicle strikes something that will move ordeform, such as a parked car, the threshold level will behigher. The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontalair bags are not designed to inflate in rollovers, rearimpacts, or in many side impacts because inflationwould not help the occupant.
Your vehicle may or may not have a side impact airbag. See Air Bag Systems in the Index. Side impact airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to severeside crashes. A side impact air bag will inflate ifthe crash severity is above the system’s designed“threshold level.” The threshold level can vary withspecific vehicle design. Side impact air bags arenot designed to inflate in frontal or near-frontal impacts,rollovers or rear impacts, because inflation would nothelp the occupant. A side impact air bag will only deployon the side of the vehicle that is struck.
In any particular crash, no one can say whether an airbag should have inflated simply because of the damageto a vehicle or because of what the repair costs were.For frontal air bags, inflation is determined by the angleof the impact and how quickly the vehicle slows downin frontal and near-frontal impacts. For side impactair bags, inflation is determined by the locationand severity of the impact.
The air bag system is designed to work properly undera wide range of conditions, including off-road usage.Observe safe driving speeds, especially on roughterrain. As always, wear your safety belt. See Off-RoadDriving with Your Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicle onpage 4-15 for tips on off-road driving.
What Makes an Air Bag Inflate?In an impact of sufficient severity, the air bag sensingsystem detects that the vehicle is in a crash. Forboth frontal and side impact air bags, the sensingsystem triggers a release of gas from the inflator, whichinflates the air bag. The inflator, the air bag andrelated hardware are all part of the air bag modules.Frontal air bag modules are located inside the steeringwheel and instrument panel. For vehicles with sideimpact air bags, the air bag modules are located in theseatback closest to the driver’s and/or right frontpassenger’s door.
1-55
How Does an Air Bag Restrain?In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions,even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel orthe instrument panel. In moderate to severe sidecollisions, even belted occupants can contact the insideof the vehicle. The air bag supplements the protectionprovided by safety belts. Air bags distribute the force ofthe impact more evenly over the occupant’s upperbody, stopping the occupant more gradually. But thefrontal air bags would not help you in many typesof collisions, including rollovers, rear impacts, and manyside impacts, primarily because an occupant’s motionis not toward the air bag. Side impact air bags would nothelp you in many types of collisions, including frontalor near frontal collisions, rollovers, and rear impacts,primarily because an occupant’s motion is not towardthose air bags. Air bags should never be regardedas anything more than a supplement to safety belts, andthen only in moderate to severe frontal or near-frontalcollisions for the driver’s and right front passenger’sfrontal air bags, and only in moderate to severeside collisions for vehicles with a driver’s and right frontpassenger’s side impact air bag.
What Will You See After an Air BagInflates?After the air bag inflates, it quickly deflates, so quicklythat some people may not even realize the air baginflated. Some components of the air bag module will behot for a short time. These components include thesteering wheel hub for the driver’s frontal air bag and theinstrument panel for the right front passenger’s frontal airbag. For vehicles with side impact air bags, the side ofthe seatback closest to the driver’s and/or right frontpassenger’s door will be hot. The parts of the bag thatcome into contact with you may be warm, but not too hotto touch. There will be some smoke and dust coming fromthe vents in the deflated air bags. Air bag inflation doesn’tprevent the driver from seeing or being able to steer thevehicle, nor does it stop people from leaving the vehicle.
{CAUTION:
When an air bag inflates, there is dust in theair. This dust could cause breathing problemsfor people with a history of asthma or otherbreathing trouble. To avoid this, everyone in
CAUTION: (Continued)
1-56
CAUTION: (Continued)
the vehicle should get out as soon as it is safeto do so. If you have breathing problems butcan’t get out of the vehicle after an air baginflates, then get fresh air by opening awindow or a door. If you experience breathingproblems following an air bag deployment, youshould seek medical attention.
Your vehicle has a feature that will automatically unlockthe doors and turn the interior lamps on when the airbags inflate (if battery power is available). You can lockthe doors again and turn the interior lamps off byusing the door lock and interior lamp controls.In many crashes severe enough to inflate an air bag,windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.Additional windshield breakage may also occur from theright front passenger air bag.• Air bags are designed to inflate only once. After an
air bag inflates, you’ll need some new parts for yourair bag system. If you don’t get them, the air bagsystem won’t be there to help protect you in anothercrash. A new system will include air bag modulesand possibly other parts. The service manual for yourvehicle covers the need to replace other parts.
• Your vehicle is equipped with electronic frontalsensors, which help the sensing system distinguishbetween a moderate frontal impact and a moresevere frontal impact. Your vehicle is also equippedwith a crash sensing and diagnostic module, whichrecords information about the frontal air bag system.The module records information about the readinessof the system, when the system commands air baginflation and driver’s safety belt usage at deployment.The module also records speed, engine rpm, brakeand throttle data.
• Let only qualified technicians work on your air bagsystems. Improper service can mean that an air bagsystem won’t work properly. See your dealer forservice.
Notice: If you damage the covering for the driver’sor the right front passenger’s air bag, or the airbag covering on the driver’s and right frontpassenger’s seatback, the bag may not workproperly. You may have to replace the air bagmodule in the steering wheel, both the air bagmodule and the instrument panel for the right frontpassenger’s air bag, or both the air bag moduleand seatback for the driver’s and right frontpassenger’s side impact air bag. Do not open orbreak the air bag coverings.
1-57
Servicing Your Air Bag-EquippedVehicleAir bags affect how your vehicle should be serviced.There are parts of the air bag systems in several placesaround your vehicle. Your dealer and the servicemanual have information about servicing your vehicleand the air bag systems. To purchase a service manual,see Service Publications Ordering Information onpage 7-11.
{CAUTION:
For up to 10 minutes after the ignition key isturned of and the battery is disconnected, anair bag can still inflate during improperservice. You can be injured if you are close toan air bag when it inflates. Avoid yellowconnectors. They are probably part of the airbag system. Be sure to follow proper serviceprocedures, and make sure the personperforming work for you is qualified to do so.
The air bag systems do not need regular maintenance.
Restraint System Check
Checking Your Restraint SystemsNow and then, make sure the safety belt reminder lightand all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractorsand anchorages are working properly. Look for any otherloose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you seeanything that might keep a safety belt system from doingits job, have it repaired.
Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in acrash. They can rip apart under impact forces. If a beltis torn or frayed, get a new one right away.
Also look for any opened or broken air bag covers, andhave them repaired or replaced. (The air bag systemdoes not need regular maintenance.)
1-58
Replacing Restraint System PartsAfter a Crash
{CAUTION:
A crash can damage the restraint systems inyour vehicle. A damaged restraint system maynot properly protect the person using it,resulting in serious injury or even death in acrash. To help make sure your restraintsystems are working properly after a crash,have them inspected and any necessaryreplacements made as soon as possible.
If you’ve had a crash, do you need new belts or LATCHsystem parts?
After a very minor collision, nothing may be necessary.But if the belts were stretched, as they would be ifworn during a more severe crash, then you need newparts.
If the LATCH system was being used during a moresevere crash, you may need new LATCH system parts.
If belts are cut or damaged, replace them. Collisiondamage also may mean you will need to have LATCHsystem, safety belt or seat parts repaired or replaced.New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the beltor LATCH system wasn’t being used at the time ofthe collision.
If an air bag inflates, you’ll need to replace air bagsystem parts. See the part on the air bag system earlierin this section.
1-59
✍ NOTES
1-60
Keys ...............................................................2-3Remote Keyless Entry System .........................2-5Remote Keyless Entry System Operation ...........2-6
Doors and Locks .............................................2-8Door Locks ....................................................2-8Power Door Locks ..........................................2-9Delayed Locking .............................................2-9Programmable Automatic
Door Locks ...............................................2-10Rear Door Security Locks ..............................2-12Lockout Protection ........................................2-12Leaving Your Vehicle ....................................2-12Liftgate/Liftglass ............................................2-13
Windows ........................................................2-14Power Windows ............................................2-15Sun Visors ...................................................2-15
Theft-Deterrent Systems ..................................2-16Content Theft-Deterrent .................................2-16Passlock® ....................................................2-17
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ................2-18New Vehicle Break-In ....................................2-18Ignition Positions ..........................................2-18
Starting Your Engine .....................................2-20Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal ................2-21Engine Coolant Heater ..................................2-21Automatic Transmission Operation ...................2-22Four-Wheel Drive ..........................................2-24Parking Brake ..............................................2-28Shifting Into Park (P) .....................................2-29Shifting Out of Park (P) .................................2-31Parking Over Things That Burn .......................2-31Engine Exhaust ............................................2-32Running Your Engine While You Are Parked ....2-32
Mirrors ...........................................................2-34Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror with
OnStar® and Compass ...............................2-34Outside Manual Mirrors ..................................2-36Outside Power Mirrors ...................................2-36Outside Convex Mirror ...................................2-36Outside Heated Mirrors ..................................2-37Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror with
Curb View Assist .......................................2-37OnStar ® System .............................................2-37HomeLink ® Transmitter ...................................2-39
Programming the HomeLink® Transmitter .........2-39
Section 2 Features and Controls
2-1
Storage Areas ................................................2-42Glove Box ...................................................2-42Overhead Console ........................................2-43Front Storage Area .......................................2-44Luggage Carrier ...........................................2-44Rear Storage Area ........................................2-45Rear Floor Storage Lid ..................................2-47
Table ..........................................................2-48Convenience Net ..........................................2-48Cargo Cover ................................................2-48
Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignitionkey is dangerous for many reasons. Theycould operate the power windows or othercontrols or even make the vehicle move. Thechildren or others could be badly injured oreven killed. Do not leave the keys in a vehiclewith children.
2-3
This vehicle has onedouble-sided key for theignition and door lock.It will fit with either side up.
When a new vehicle is delivered, the dealer providesthe owner with a pair of identical keys and a keycode number.
The key code number tells your dealer or a qualifiedlocksmith how to make extra keys. Keep this number ina safe place. If you lose your keys, you’ll be able tohave new ones made easily using this number.Your selling dealer should also have this number.
Notice: If you ever lock your keys in your vehicle,you may have to damage the vehicle to get in.Be sure you have spare keys.
If you ever do get locked out of your vehicle, call theGM Roadside Assistance Center. See RoadsideAssistance Program on page 7-6.
If your vehicle is equipped with the OnStar® system withan active subscription and you lock your keys insidethe vehicle, OnStar® may be able to send a command tounlock your vehicle. See OnStar® System on page 2-37for more information.
2-4
Remote Keyless Entry SystemIf equipped, the keyless entry system operates on aradio frequency subject to Federal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,including interference that may cause undesiredoperation of the device.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,including interference that may cause undesiredoperation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other thanan authorized service facility could void authorization touse this equipment.
At times you may notice a decrease in range. This isnormal for any remote keyless entry system. If thetransmitter does not work or if you have to stand closerto your vehicle for the transmitter to work, try this:
• Check the distance. You may be too far from yourvehicle. You may need to stand closer duringrainy or snowy weather.
• Check the location. Other vehicles or objects maybe blocking the signal. Take a few steps to theleft or right, hold the transmitter higher, andtry again.
• Check to determine if battery replacement isnecessary. See “Battery Replacement” underRemote Keyless Entry System Operation onpage 2-6.
• If you are still having trouble, see your dealer or aqualified technician for service.
2-5
Remote Keyless Entry SystemOperationIf your vehicle has this feature, you can lock and unlockyour doors from about 3 feet (1 m) up to 30 feet(9 m) away using the remote keyless entry transmittersupplied with your vehicle.
K (Unlock): Press unlockfor the driver’s door tounlock automatically, theparking lamps to flashand the interior lights to goon. Press the unlockbutton a second time withinthree seconds to unlockall the doors.
You can program different feedback settings through theDriver Information Center (DIC). For more informationsee Driver Information Center (DIC) on page 3-48.
Q (Lock): Press lock to lock all the doors. Press lockagain within three seconds and the horn will chirp.
L(Panic): Press the horn symbol to make the hornsound. The headlamps and taillamps will flash for up to30 seconds. This can be turned off by pressing thehorn button again, by waiting for 30 seconds, orby starting the vehicle.
Matching Transmitter(s) to YourVehicleEach remote keyless entry transmitter is coded toprevent another transmitter from unlocking your vehicle.If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement canbe purchased through your dealer. Remember to bringany remaining transmitters with you when you go toyour dealer. When the dealer matches the replacementtransmitter to your vehicle, any remaining transmittersmust also be matched. Once your dealer has coded thenew transmitter, the lost transmitter will not unlockyour vehicle. Each vehicle can have a maximum of fourtransmitters matched to it.
2-6
Battery ReplacementUnder normal use, the battery in your remote keylessentry transmitter should last about two years.
You can tell the battery is weak if the transmitter won’twork at the normal range in any location. If you haveto get close to your vehicle before the transmitter works,it’s probably time to change the battery.
The Driver Information Center (DIC) will display aRFA # BATTERY LOW message when the transmitterbattery is low.
Notice: When replacing the battery, use care not totouch any of the circuitry. Static from your bodytransferred to these surfaces may damage thetransmitter.
To replace the battery in the remote keyless entrytransmitter do the following:
1. Insert a thin coin in the slot between the covers ofthe transmitter housing. Gently pry the transmitterapart.
2. Remove and replace the battery with a three-voltCR2032 or equivalent battery, positive (+)side down.
3. Align the covers and snap them together.
4. Check the operation of the transmitter.
2-7
Doors and Locks
Door Locks
{CAUTION:
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.• Passengers — especially children — can
easily open the doors and fall out of amoving vehicle. When a door is locked, thehandle will not open it. You increase thechance of being thrown out of the vehiclein a crash if the doors are not locked. So,wear safety belts properly and lock thedoors whenever you drive.
• Young children who get into unlockedvehicles may be unable to get out. A childcan be overcome by extreme heat and cansuffer permanent injuries or even deathfrom heat stroke. Always lock your vehiclewhenever you leave it.
• Outsiders can easily enter through anunlocked door when you slow down orstop your vehicle. Locking your doors canhelp prevent this from happening.
There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle.You can use the remote keyless entry transmitter.
You can use your key to unlock your door from theoutside.
You can lock or unlock the door from the inside bysliding the manual lever forward or rearward. When thedoor is unlocked, you can see a red area on the lever.
The manual lever on each door works only thatdoor’s lock.
2-8
Power Door Locks
The power door lockswitches are located onthe driver’s and frontpassenger’s armrests.
Remove the ignition key and press the lock symbol tolock all of the doors at once. To unlock the doors, pressthe other side of the switch.
Delayed LockingThis feature delays the locking of the doors and theliftgate when using the power lock or the remote keylessentry system.
The first time you attempt to lock the doors with thedriver’s door open, three chimes will signal that delayedlocking is being used. This can be performed by using thepower lock switch or the remote keyless entry transmitter.All doors and the liftgate can be reopened for up to fiveseconds from the time the last door is closed.
Five seconds after the last door is closed, all the doorswill lock. You can lock the doors immediately byusing the power door lock switch or by pressing the lockbutton on the optional remote keyless entry transmittera second time.
If the key is inserted in the ignition, this feature will notlock the doors. The lockout prevention feature willoperate instead.
You can enable or disable the delayed locking feature.If the feature is disabled, the doors will lock immediatelywhen a power door lock switch or remote keylessentry transmitter lock button is pressed.
Programming Delayed LockingWhen your vehicle was shipped from the factory, thedelayed locking feature was programmed on, orenabled. The mode may have been changed since itleft the factory. To turn the delayed locking feature on oroff, do the following:
1. Press and hold the power door lock switch on thedriver’s door in the lock position.
2. Press the remote keyless entry transmitter unlockbutton twice.
If the delayed locking feature was on, it will now be off.If the feature was off, it will now be on.
2-9
Programmable AutomaticDoor LocksYour vehicle is equipped with an automatic lock/unlockfeature which enables you to program your vehicle’spower door locks. You can program this feature throughthe Driver Information Center (DIC), or by the followingmethod.
Programmable Locking FeatureThe following is the list of available programmingoptions:
Mode 1: All doors lock when the transmission is shiftedinto gear.
Mode 2: All doors lock when the vehicle speed isgreater than 8 mph (13 km/h).
Mode 3: No automatic door locking.
The automatic door locks were pre-programmed at thefactory to lock all the doors when the transmissionis shifted into gear. The following instructions detail howto program your door locks differently than the factorysetting. Choose one of the three programmingoptions listed above before entering the program mode.
To enter the program mode, do the following:
1. Begin with the ignition off. Then pull the turnsignal/multifunction lever toward you and holdit there while you perform the next step.
2. Turn the key to RUN and LOCK twice. Then, withthe key in LOCK, release the turn signal/multifunctionlever. Once you do this, you will hear the lock switchlock and unlock, the horn will chirp twice, and a30 second program timer will begin.
3. You are now ready to program the automatic doorlocks. Select one of the three programming optionslisted above, and press the lock side of the powerdoor lock switch to cycle through the lock options.You will have 30 seconds to begin programming. Ifyou exceed the 30 second limit, the locks willautomatically lock and unlock and the horn will chirptwice to indicate that you have left the programmode. If this occurs, repeat the procedure beginningwith Step 1 to re-enter the programming mode.
You can exit the program mode any time by turning theignition to RUN. The locks will automatically lock andunlock and the horn will chirp twice to indicate that youare leaving the program mode. If the lock/unlock switchesare not pressed while in the programming mode, thecurrent auto lock/unlock setting will not be modified.
See your dealer for more information.
2-10
Programmable Unlocking FeatureThe following is the list of available programmingoptions:
Mode 1: Driver’s door unlocks when the transmission isshifted into PARK (P).
Mode 2: All doors unlock when the transmission isshifted into PARK (P).
Mode 3: All doors unlock when the key is removedfrom the ignition.
Mode 4: No automatic door unlock.
The automatic door locks were pre-programmed at thefactory to unlock the driver’s door once the transmissionis shifted to PARK (P). The following instructions detailhow to program your door locks differently than thefactory setting. Choose one of the four programmingoptions listed above before entering the program mode.
To enter the program mode you need to do thefollowing:
1. Begin with the ignition off. Then pull the turnsignal/multifunction lever toward you and holdit there while you perform the next step.
2. Turn the key to RUN and LOCK twice. Then, withthe key in LOCK, release the turn signal/multifunctionlever. Once you do this, you will hear the lock switchlock and unlock, the horn will chirp twice, and a30 second program timer will begin.
3. You are now ready to program the automatic doorlocks. Select one of the four programming optionslisted above, and press the unlock side of the powerdoor lock switch to cycle through the unlockingoptions. You will have 30 seconds to beginprogramming. If you exceed the 30 second limit, thelocks will automatically lock and unlock and the hornwill chirp twice to indicate that you have leftthe program mode. If this occurs, repeat theprocedure beginning with Step 1 to re-enter theprogramming mode.
You can exit the program mode any time by turning theignition to RUN. The locks will automatically lock andunlock and the horn will chirp twice to indicate that youare leaving the program mode. If the lock/unlock switchesare not pressed while in the programming mode, thecurrent auto lock/unlock setting will not be modified.
See your dealer for more information.
2-11
Rear Door Security LocksYour vehicle may have this feature. You can lock therear doors so they can’t be opened from the insideby passengers. To use one of these locks do thefollowing:
1. Open one of the rear doors. You will find a securitylock lever located on the inside edge of eachrear door.
2. Move the lever down toengage the safety lock.Move the lever up todisengage thesafety lock.
3. Close the door.
The rear doors of your vehicle cannot be opened fromthe inside while this feature is in use. If you want to openthe rear door while the security lock is on, unlock thedoor and open the door from the outside.
Lockout ProtectionThis feature stops the power door locks from lockingwhen the key is in the ignition and a door is opento protect you from locking your key in the vehicle.
If the power lock switch is pressed when a door is openand the key is in the ignition, all the doors will lockand then the driver’s door will unlock.
Leaving Your VehicleIf you are leaving the vehicle, take your key, open yourdoor and set the lock from inside. Then get out andclose the door.
2-12
Liftgate/Liftglass
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to drive with the liftgate orliftglass open because carbon monoxide (CO)gas can come into your vehicle. You can notsee or smell CO. It can causeunconsciousness and even death. If you mustdrive with the liftgate open or if electricalwiring or other cable connections must passthrough the seal between the body and theliftgate or liftglass:
• Make sure all other windows are shut.• Turn the fan on your heating or cooling
system to its highest speed and select thecontrol setting that will force outside airinto your vehicle. See Climate ControlSystem in the Index.
• If you have air outlets on or under theinstrument panel, open them all the way.See Engine Exhaust on page 2-32.
Liftgate ReleaseTo unlock the liftgate, you may use the power doorlocks or the keyless entry system described earlier.
On some vehicles the liftglass will also unlock when theliftgate is unlocked. Press the pushbutton on theliftglass to open it.
To open the entire liftgate, lift the handle located in thecenter of the liftgate. If you open the liftgate, theliftgate module will lock the liftglass after a one to twosecond delay.
Emergency Release for OpeningLiftgate
1. Remove the trim plug to expose the access hole inthe trim panel. The access hole is located on theinside of the liftgate.
2. Use a tool to reach through the access hole in thetrim panel.
3. Pry the left release lever up to the unlock position.Pry the right release lever up to unlatch the liftgate.
4. Reattach the trim plug.
2-13
Windows
{CAUTION:
Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in avehicle with the windows closed is dangerous.They can be overcome by the extreme heatand suffer permanent injuries or even deathfrom heat stroke. Never leave a child, ahelpless adult, or a pet alone in a vehicle,especially with the windows closed in warm orhot weather.
2-14
Power Windows
The controls for the power windows are located on thearmrest on each of the side doors. With power windows,the switches operate the windows when the ignition is inRUN, ACCESSORY or when Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) is active. The driver’s door has a switch foreach of the passenger’s windows as well.
Press the top or bottom of the switch to raise or lowerthe window. If you hold the switch down for three toseven seconds after the window has been completelylowered or raised, the window will not operate for about15 seconds.
Express–Down WindowThe driver’s and front passenger’s window switcheshave an express-down feature that allows you to lowerthe window without holding the switch down. Pressdown briefly on the bottom of the driver’s window switchlabeled AUTO to activate the express-down feature.Lightly tap the switch to open the window slightly. Theexpress-down feature can be interrupted at any timeby pressing the top of the switch.
Window LockoutYour vehicle has a lockout feature to preventpassengers from operating the power windows. Thelockout switch is located in front of the window switches.A light in the lockout switch will come on to show thatthe switch has been activated. Press the lockout switchagain to return to normal operation.
Sun VisorsTo block out glare, you can pull the visor down. Youcan also slide the visor along the rod from side-to-sideto cover the driver or passenger front window.
Visor Vanity MirrorPull the sun visor down to expose the vanity mirror.
Lighted Visor Vanity MirrorYour vehicle may have this feature. Pull the sun visordown and lift the mirror cover to turn on the lamps. Thelamps will turn off when the cover is closed.
2-15
Theft-Deterrent SystemsVehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.Although your vehicle has a number of theft-deterrentfeatures, we know that nothing we put on it can make itimpossible to steal. However, there are ways youcan help.
Content Theft-DeterrentYour vehicle may be equipped with a contenttheft-deterrent alarm system.
Here’s how to operate the system:
1. Open the door.2. Lock the door with the power door lock switch or
the remote keyless entry transmitter. The securitylight should flash.
3. Close all doors. The security light should turn offafter approximately 30 seconds. The alarm is notarmed until the security light turns off.
If a locked door is opened without the key or the remotekeyless entry transmitter, the alarm will go off. Theheadlamps and parking lamps will flash for two minutes,and the horn will sound for 30 seconds, then will turnoff to save the battery power.
Remember, the theft-deterrent system won’t activate ifyou lock the doors with a key or use the manualdoor lock. It activates only if you use a power door lockswitch with the door open, or with the remote keylessentry transmitter. You should also remember thatyou can start your vehicle with the correct ignition key ifthe alarm has been set off.
Here’s how to avoid setting off the alarm by accident:
• If you don’t want to activate the theft-deterrentsystem, the vehicle should be locked with the doorkey after the doors are closed.
• Always unlock a door with a key, or use the remotekeyless entry transmitter. Unlocking a door anyother way will set off the alarm.
If you set off the alarm by accident, unlock any door withthe key. You can also turn off the alarm by pressingunlock on the remote keyless entry transmitter. The alarmwon’t stop if you try to unlock a door any other way.
United States Canada
2-16
Testing the AlarmThe alarm can be tested by following these steps:
1. From inside the vehicle, lower the driver’s windowand open the driver’s door.
2. Activate the system by locking the doors with thepower door lock switch while the door is open, orwith the remote keyless entry transmitter.
3. Get out of the vehicle, close the door and wait forthe security light to go out.
4. Then reach in through the window, unlock the doorwith the manual door lock and open the door. Thisshould set off the alarm.
When the alarm is set the power door unlock switch isnot operational.
If the alarm does not sound when it should but theheadlamps flash, check to see if the horn works. Thehorn fuse may be blown. To replace the fuse, see Fusesand Circuit Breakers on page 5-93.
If the alarm does not sound or the headlamps do notflash, the vehicle should be serviced by your dealer.
Passlock ®
Your vehicle is equipped with thePasslock® theft-deterrent system.Passlock® is a passive theft-deterrent system thatenables fuel if the ignition lock cylinder is turned with avalid key. If a correct key is not used or the ignitionlock cylinder is tampered with, the fuel system isdisabled and the vehicle will not start.During normal operation, the security light will turn offapproximately five seconds after the key is turnedto RUN.If the engine stalls and the security light flashes, waitabout 10 minutes until the light stops flashing beforetrying to restart the engine. Remember to releasethe key from START as soon as the engine starts.If the engine does not start after three tries, the vehicleneeds service.If the engine is running and the security light comes on,you will be able to restart the engine if you turn theengine off. However, your Passlock® system isnot working properly and must be serviced by yourdealer. Your vehicle is not protected by Passlock® at thistime. You may also want to check the fuse. SeeFuses and Circuit Breakers on page 5-93. See yourdealer for service.In an emergency, call the GM Roadside AssistanceCenter. See Roadside Assistance Program on page 7-6.
2-17
Starting and Operating YourVehicle
New Vehicle Break-InNotice: Your vehicle does not need an elaborate“break-in.” But it will perform better in the long runif you follow these guidelines:
• Keep your speed at 55 mph (88 km/h) or less forthe first 500 miles (805 km).
• Do not drive at any one speed — fast orslow — for the first 500 miles (805 km). Do notmake full-throttle starts.
• Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles(322 km) or so. During this time your newbrake linings are not yet broken in. Hard stopswith new linings can mean premature wearand earlier replacement. Follow this breaking-inguideline every time you get new brakelinings.
• Do not tow a trailer during break-in. See Towinga Trailer on page 4-53 for more information.
Ignition Positions
Use the key to turn the ignition switch to four differentpositions.
A (LOCK): This position locks the ignition andtransmission. It’s a theft-deterrent feature. You will onlybe able to remove the key when the ignition is turnedto LOCK.
2-18
Notice: If your key seems stuck in LOCK and youcan not turn it, be sure you are using the correctkey; if so, is it all the way in? Turn the key only withyour hand. Using a tool to force it could break thekey or the ignition switch. If none of these works,then your vehicle needs service.
B (ACCESSORY): This position lets you use things likethe radio and the windshield wipers when the engineis off.
Notice: Lengthy operation of features such as theradio in the accessory ignition position maydrain the battery and prevent your vehicle fromstarting. Do not operate your vehicle in theaccessory ignition position for a long periodof time.
C (RUN): This is the position for driving.
D (START): This position starts the engine.
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)Your vehicle is equipped with a Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) feature which will allow certain features ofyour vehicle to continue to work up to 20 minutesafter the ignition key is turned to LOCK.
Your radio, power windows, sunroof (option) andoverhead console will work when the ignition key is inRUN or ACCESSORY. Once the key is turned fromRUN to LOCK, these features will continue to work forup to 20 minutes or until a door is opened.
2-19
Starting Your EngineMove your shift lever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).Your engine won’t start in any other position–that’s asafety feature. To restart when you’re already moving,use NEUTRAL (N) only.
Notice: Do not try to shift to PARK (P) if yourvehicle is moving. If you do, you could damage thetransmission. Shift to PARK (P) only when yourvehicle is stopped.
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn theignition key to START. When the engine starts,let go of the key. The idle speed will go down asyour engine gets warm.Holding your key in START for longer than15 seconds at a time will cause your battery to bedrained much sooner. And the excessive heatcan damage your starter motor. Wait about15 seconds between each try to help avoid drainingyour battery or damaging your starter.
2. If it doesn’t start within 10 seconds, push theaccelerator pedal all the way to the floor, while youhold the ignition key in START. When the enginestarts, let go of the key and let up on the acceleratorpedal. Wait about 15 seconds between each try.
When starting your engine in very cold weather (below0°F or −18°C), do this:
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn theignition key to START and hold it there up to15 seconds. When the engine starts, let go ofthe key.
2. If your engine still won’t start (or starts but thenstops), it could be flooded with too much gasoline.Try pushing your accelerator pedal all the way to thefloor and holding it there as you hold the key inSTART for about three seconds. When the enginestarts, let go of the key and accelerator. If thevehicle starts briefly but then stops again, do thesame thing, but this time keep the pedal downfor five or six seconds. This clears the extragasoline from the engine.
Notice: Your engine is designed to work with theelectronics in your vehicle. If you add electricalparts or accessories, you could change the way theengine operates. Before adding electrical equipment,check with your dealer. If you do not, your enginemight not perform properly.
2-20
Adjustable Throttle and Brake PedalIf your vehicle has this feature, you can change theposition of the throttle and brake pedals. This feature isdesigned for shorter drivers, since the pedals cannotmove farther away from the standard position, but canmove closer for better pedal reach. This feature canbe programmed to work with the memory function(if equipped) on your vehicle. See Memory Seat onpage 2-50.
The vehicle must be in PARK (P) for this feature tooperate.
The toggle switch used toadjust the pedals islocated on the steeringcolumn.
Press the switch towards you to move the pedalscloser. Press the switch away from you to move thepedals away from you.
Engine Coolant HeaterYour vehicle may have this feature. In very coldweather, 0°F (-18°C) or colder, the engine coolantheater can help. You’ll get easier starting and better fueleconomy during engine warm-up. Usually, the coolantheater should be plugged in a minimum of fourhours prior to starting your vehicle. At temperaturesabove 32°F (0°C), use of the coolant heater is notrequired.
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord. Thecord is located on the driver’s side of the enginecompartment, behind the battery.
2-21
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-Volt AC outlet.
{CAUTION:
Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outletcould cause an electrical shock. Also, thewrong kind of extension cord could overheatand cause a fire. You could be seriouslyinjured. Plug the cord into a properly groundedthree-prong 110-volt AC outlet. If the cord willnot reach, use a heavy-duty three-prongextension cord rated for at least 15 amps.
4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug andstore the cord as it was before to keep it awayfrom moving engine parts. If you don’t, it could bedamaged.
How long should you keep the coolant heater pluggedin? The answer depends on the outside temperature, thekind of oil you have, and some other things. Insteadof trying to list everything here, we ask that you contactyour dealer in the area where you’ll be parking yourvehicle. The dealer can give you the best advice for thatparticular area.
Automatic Transmission OperationThere are several different positions for your gearshift lever.
PARK (P): This position locks the rear wheels. It’s thebest position to use when you start the enginebecause your vehicle can’t move easily.
{CAUTION:
It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if theshift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with theparking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
Do not leave your vehicle when the engine isrunning unless you have to. If you have left theengine running, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could be injured. Tobe sure your vehicle will not move, even whenyou are on fairly level ground, always set yourparking brake and move the shift lever toPARK (P). See Shifting Into Park (P) onpage 2-29. If you are pulling a trailer, seeTowing a Trailer on page 4-53.
2-22
{CAUTION:
If you have four-wheel drive, your vehicle willbe free to roll — even if your shift lever is inPARK (P) — if your transfer case is inNEUTRAL. So, be sure the transfer case is in adrive gear — not in NEUTRAL. See Four-WheelDrive on page 2-24. See Shifting Into Park (P)on page 2-29.
Ensure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P) before startingthe engine. Your vehicle has an automatic transmissionshift lock control system. You have to fully apply theregular brakes before you can shift from PARK (P) whenthe ignition key is in RUN. If you cannot shift out ofPARK (P), ease pressure on the shift lever, press thebutton on the shift lever and push the shift lever allthe way into PARK (P) as you maintain brakeapplication. Move the shift lever into the gear you wish.See Shifting Out of Park (P) on page 2-31.
REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.
Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicleis moving forward could damage the transmission.The repairs would not be covered by your warranty.Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle isstopped.
To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of snow,ice or sand without damaging your transmission,see If You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow onpage 4-42.
NEUTRAL (N): In this position, the engine doesn’tconnect with the wheels. To restart when you’re alreadymoving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.
{CAUTION:
Shifting into a drive gear while your engine isrunning at high speed is dangerous. Unlessyour foot is firmly on the brake pedal, yourvehicle could move very rapidly. You couldlose control and hit people or objects. Do notshift into a drive gear while your engine isrunning at high speed.
2-23
Notice: Shifting out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N)with the engine racing may damage thetransmission. The repairs would not be covered byyour warranty. Be sure the engine is not racingwhen shifting your vehicle.
DRIVE (D): This position is for normal driving. If youneed more power for passing, and you’re:
• Going less than about 35 mph (55 km/h), push theaccelerator pedal about halfway down.
• Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more, push theaccelerator all the way down.
You’ll shift down to the next gear and have more power.
DRIVE (D) can be used when towing a trailer, carryinga heavy load, driving on steep hills or for off-road driving.You may want to shift the transmission to THIRD (3)or, if necessary, a lower gear selection if thetransmission shifts too often.
THIRD (3): This position is also used for normal driving.However, it offers more power and lower fuel economythan DRIVE (D).
SECOND (2): This position gives you more power butlower fuel economy than THIRD (3). You can useSECOND (2) on hills. It can help control your speed asyou go down steep mountain roads, but then youwould also want to use the brakes off and on.
You can also use SECOND (2) for starting the vehiclefrom a stop on slippery road surfaces.
FIRST (1): This position gives you even more powerbut lower fuel economy than SECOND (2). You can useit on very steep hills, or in deep snow or mud. If theselector lever is put in FIRST (1) while the vehicleis moving forward, the transmission won’t shift into firstgear until the vehicle is going slowly enough.
Notice: Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle inone place on a hill using only the acceleratorpedal may damage the transmission. If you arestuck, do not spin the tires. When stopping on a hill,use the brakes to hold the vehicle in place.
Four-Wheel DriveIf your vehicle has four-wheel drive, you can send yourengine’s driving power to all four wheels for extratraction. To get the most satisfaction out of four-wheeldrive, you must be familiar with its operation. Readthe part that follows before using four-wheel drive. Youshould use two-wheel drive high (2HI) for mostnormal driving conditions.
Notice: Driving on pavement in four-wheel drive foran extended period of time may cause prematurewear on your vehicle’s powertrain. Do not drivein four-wheel drive on pavement for extendedperiods of time.
2-24
Automatic Transfer Case
If your vehicle is equippedwith four-wheel drive, thetransfer case knob islocated to the right of thesteering wheel on theinstrument panel. Use thisknob to shift into andout of four-wheel drive.
2HI (Two-Wheel High): This setting is for driving inmost street and highway situations. Your front axle is notengaged in two-wheel drive. It also provides the bestfuel economy.
A4WD (Automatic Four-Wheel Drive): This setting isideal for use when road conditions are variable.When driving your vehicle in A4WD, the front axle isengaged, but the vehicle’s power is sent to therear wheels. When the vehicle senses a loss of traction,the system will automatically engage four-wheeldrive. Driving in this mode results in slightly lower fueleconomy than 2HI.
4HI (Four-Wheel High): Use 4HI when you need extratraction, such as on snowy or icy roads or in mostoff-road situations. This setting also engages your frontaxle to help drive your vehicle.
4LO (Four-Wheel Low): This setting also engagesyour front axle and delivers extra torque. It sendsmaximum power to all four wheels. You might choose4LO if you are driving off-road in deep sand, deep mud,and climbing or descending steep hills.
{CAUTION:
Shifting the transfer case to NEUTRAL cancause your vehicle to roll even if thetransmission is in PARK (P). You or someoneelse could be seriously injured. Be sure to setthe parking brake before placing the transfercase in NEUTRAL. See Parking Brake onpage 2-28.
NEUTRAL: Shift the vehicle’s transfer case toNEUTRAL only when towing your vehicle. SeeRecreational Vehicle Towing on page 4-44 for moreinformation.
2-25
An indicator light in the knob will show you whichposition the transfer case is in. The indicator lights willcome on briefly when you turn on the ignition andone will stay on. If the lights do not come on, you shouldtake your vehicle to your dealer for service. Anindicator light will flash while shifting the transfer case. Itwill remain illuminated when the shift is complete. Iffor some reason the transfer case cannot make arequested shift, it will return to the last chosen setting.
If the service four-wheel drive light on the instrumentpanel cluster stays on, you should take your vehicle toyour dealer for service. See Service Four-WheelDrive Warning Light on page 3-46 for further information.
Shifting into 4HI or A4WDTurn the knob to 4HI or A4WD. This can be done at anyspeed unless you are shifting out of 4LO. The indicatorlight will flash while shifting. It will remain illuminatedwhen the shift is complete.
Shifting into 2HITurn the knob to 2HI. This can be done at any speedunless you are shifting out of 4LO.
Shifting into 4LOTo shift to 4LO, the vehicle’s engine must be runningand the vehicle must be stopped or moving lessthan 2 mph (3.2 km/h) with the transmission inNEUTRAL (N). The preferred method for shifting into4LO is to have your vehicle moving 1 or 2 mph (1.6 to3.2 km/h). Turn the knob to 4LO. You must wait forthe 4LO indicator light to stop flashing and remainilluminated before shifting your transmission into gear.
If you turn the knob to 4LO when your vehicle is in gearand/or moving, the 4LO indicator light will flash for30 seconds and not complete the shift unless yourvehicle is moving less than 2 mph (3.2 km/h) and thetransmission is in NEUTRAL (N). After 30 seconds, thetransfer case will return to the setting last chosen.
Shifting Out of 4LOTo shift from 4LO to 4HI, A4WD or 2HI your vehiclemust be stopped or moving less than 2 mph (3.2 km/h)with the transmission in NEUTRAL (N) and theengine running. The preferred method for shifting out of4LO is to have your vehicle moving 1 or 2 mph (1.6to 3.2 km/h). Turn the knob to 4HI, A4WD or 2HI. Youmust wait for the 4HI, A4WD or 2HI indicator light to stopflashing and remain illuminated before shifting yourtransmission into gear.
2-26
If the knob is turned to 4HI, A4WD or 2HI when yourvehicle is in gear and/or moving, the 4HI, A4WD or 2HIindicator light will flash for 30 seconds. It will notcomplete the shift unless your vehicle is moving lessthan 2 mph (3.2 km/h) with the transmission inNEUTRAL (N).
Shifting into NEUTRALBefore shifting the transfer case to NEUTRAL, firstmake sure the vehicle is parked so that it will not roll.
1. Set the parking brake.
2. Start the vehicle.
3. Put the transmission in NEUTRAL (N).
4. Shift the transfer case to 2HI.
5. Turn the transfer case knob all of the way past 4LOand hold it there for a minimum of 10 seconds. Theneutral indicator light will come on.
6. Shift the transmission to REVERSE (R) for onesecond, then shift the transmission to DRIVE (D)for one second.
7. Place the transmission shift lever in PARK (P).
8. Turn the ignition to LOCK.
9. Release the parking brake prior to towing.
Shifting Out of NEUTRALTo shift the transfer case out of NEUTRAL, do thefollowing:
1. Set the parking brake and apply the regular brakepedal.
2. Start the vehicle with the transmission in PARK (P).
3. Turn the transfer case knob to the desired shiftposition (2HI, 4HI or A4WD).
4. Put the transmission in NEUTRAL (N).
5. Release the parking brake.
6. After the transfer case has shifted out of NEUTRAL,the indicator light will go out. Shift the transmissionlever to the desired position.
A re-engagement sound is normal when shifting out ofNEUTRAL.
2-27
Parking BrakeTo set the parking brake, hold the regular brake pedaldown with your foot and pull up on the parking brakelever located on the center console. If the ignition is on,the brake system warning light will come on.
To release the parking brake, hold the regular brakepedal down. Pull the parking brake lever up until you canpress in the button at the end of the lever. Hold thebutton in as you move the parking brake lever all theway down.
Notice: Driving with the parking brake on canoverheat the brake system and cause prematurewear or damage to brake system parts. Verify thatthe parking brake is fully released and the brakewarning light is off before driving.
If you are towing a trailer and you must park on a hill,see Towing a Trailer on page 4-53. That sectionshows what to do first to keep the trailer from moving.
2-28
Shifting Into Park (P)
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle ifthe shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with theparking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll. Ifyou have left the engine running, the vehiclecan move suddenly. You or others could beinjured. To be sure your vehicle will not move,even when you are on fairly level ground, usethe steps that follow. With four-wheel drive,your vehicle will be free to roll — even if yourshift lever is in PARK (P) — if your transfer caseis in NEUTRAL. So, be sure the transfer case isin a drive gear — not in NEUTRAL. SeeFour-Wheel Drive on page 2-24. Always put theshift lever fully in PARK (P) with the parkingbrake firmly set. If you are pulling a trailer, seeTowing a Trailer on page 4-53.
To shift into PARK (P), do the following:
1. Hold the brake pedal down with your foot and setthe parking brake.
2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P).2.1. Press the button in on the side of the lever.2.2. Push the lever all the way toward the
front of the vehicle.
3. Turn the ignition key to LOCK.
4. Remove the key and take it with you. You knowyour vehicle is in PARK (P) if the key can beremoved from the ignition.
2-29
Leaving Your Vehicle With theEngine Running
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to leave your vehiclewith the engine running. Your vehicle couldmove suddenly if the shift lever is not fully inPARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set.
If you have four-wheel drive, your vehiclewill be free to roll – even if your lever is inPARK (P) – if your transfer case is inNEUTRAL. So be sure the transfer case is in adrive gear – not NEUTRAL. See “Four-WheelDrive (Automatic Transfer Case)” in the Index.
CAUTION: (Continued)
CAUTION: (Continued)
And, if you leave the vehicle with the enginerunning, it could overheat and even catch fire.You or others could be injured. Don’t leaveyour vehicle with the engine running unlessyou have to.
If you have to leave your vehicle with the enginerunning, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P) and yourparking brake is firmly set before you leave it. Afteryou’ve moved the shift lever into PARK (P), holdthe regular brake pedal down. Then, see if you canmove the shift lever away from PARK (P) without firstpressing the button on the console shift lever. If you can,it means that the shift lever wasn’t fully locked intoPARK (P).
2-30
Torque LockIf you are parking on a hill and you don’t shift yourtransmission into PARK (P) properly, the weight of thevehicle may put too much force on the parking pawlin the transmission. You may find it difficult to pull theshift lever out of PARK (P). This is called “torquelock.” To prevent torque lock, set the parking brake andthen shift into PARK (P) properly before you leavethe driver’s seat. To find out how, see Shifting IntoPark (P) on page 2-29.
When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out ofPARK (P) before you release the parking brake.
If torque lock does occur, you may need to have anothervehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of thepressure from the parking pawl in the transmission, soyou can pull the shift lever out of PARK (P).
Shifting Out of Park (P)Your vehicle has an automatic transmission shift lockcontrol system. You have to fully apply the regularbrakes before you can shift from PARK (P) when theignition is in RUN. See Automatic TransmissionOperation on page 2-22.
Parking Over Things That Burn
{CAUTION:
Things that can burn could touch hot exhaustparts under your vehicle and ignite. Do notpark over papers, leaves, dry grass or otherthings that can burn.
2-31
Engine Exhaust
{CAUTION:
Engine exhaust can kill. It contains the gascarbon monoxide (CO), which you can not seeor smell. It can cause unconsciousness anddeath.You might have exhaust coming in if:
• Your exhaust system sounds strange ordifferent.
• Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.• Your vehicle was damaged in a collision.• Your vehicle was damaged when driving
over high points on the road or over roaddebris.
• Repairs were not done correctly.• Your vehicle or exhaust system had been
modified improperly.If you ever suspect exhaust is coming intoyour vehicle:
• Drive it only with all the windows down toblow out any CO; and
• Have your vehicle fixed immediately.
Running Your Engine While YouAre ParkedIt is better not to park with the engine running. But ifyou ever have to, here are some things to know.
{CAUTION:
Idling the engine with the climate controlsystem off could allow dangerous exhaust intoyour vehicle. See the earlier Caution underEngine Exhaust on page 2-32.
Also, idling in a closed-in place can let deadlycarbon monoxide (CO) into your vehicle even ifthe climate control fan is at the highest setting.One place this can happen is a garage.Exhaust — with CO — can come in easily.NEVER park in a garage with the enginerunning.
Another closed-in place can be a blizzard. SeeWinter Driving on page 4-37.
2-32
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicleif the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) withthe parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle canroll. Do not leave your vehicle when the engineis running unless you have to. If you have leftthe engine running, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could be injured. Tobe sure your vehicle will not move, even whenyou are on fairly level ground, always set yourparking brake and move the shift lever toPARK (P).
{CAUTION:
If you have four-wheel drive, your vehicle willbe free to roll — even if your shift lever is inPARK (P) — if your transfer case is inNEUTRAL. So be sure the transfer case is in adrive gear — not in NEUTRAL. See Four-WheelDrive on page 2-24.
Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle will notmove. See Shifting Into Park (P) on page 2-29.
If you are pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer onpage 4-53.
2-33
Mirrors
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirrorwith OnStar ® and Compass
Your vehicle may have an automatic-dimming rearviewmirror with a compass and the OnStar® system.
There are three additional buttons for the OnStar®
system. See your dealer for more information on thesystem and how to subscribe to OnStar®. See OnStar®
System on page 2-37 for more information about theservices OnStar® provides.
Mirror OperationWhen turned on, this mirror automatically dims to theproper level to minimize glare from any headlampsbehind you after dark.
O(On/Off): This is the on/off button for the automaticdimming feature and compass. Press the far left button,located below the the mirror face, for up to threeseconds to turn the feature on and off. A light on themirror will be lit while the feature is turned on.
Compass OperationPress the on/off button once to turn the compass onor off.
There is a compass display in the window in the upperright corner of the mirror face. The compass displaysa maximum of two characters. For example, “NE”is displayed for north-east.
2-34
Compass CalibrationPress and hold the on/off button down for nine secondsto activate the compass calibration mode. CAL willbe displayed in the compass window on the mirror.
The compass can be calibrated by driving the vehicle incircles at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less until the displayreads a direction.
Compass VarianceCompass variance is the difference between earth’smagnetic north and true geographic north. The mirror isset to zone eight upon leaving the factory. It will benecessary to adjust the compass to compensatefor compass variance if you live outside zone eight.Under certain circumstances, such as during along distance cross-country trip, it will be necessary toadjust for compass variance. If not adjusted toaccount for compass variance, your compass could givefalse readings.
To adjust for compass variance, do the following:
1. Find your current location and variance zonenumber on the map.
2. Press and hold the on/off button for six seconds.Release the button when ZONE is displayed. Thenumber shown is the current zone number.
3. Scroll through the zone numbers that appear in thecompass/temperature window on the mirror bypressing the on/off button. Once you find your zonenumber, release the button. After about fourseconds, the mirror will return to the compassdisplay, and the new zone number will be set.
2-35
Outside Manual MirrorsAdjust your outside mirrors so you can see a little of theside of your vehicle.
Fold the mirrors in before entering a car wash. To dothis, pull the mirrors in toward the vehicle. Push themirrors back out when finished.
Outside Power MirrorsYour vehicle may have this feature.
The control is located onthe driver’s door.
1. Turn the knob toward the mirror you desire toadjust.
2. Move the knob in the direction you want the mirrorto go.
3. Adjust the mirror in all four directions.
4. After you are satisfied with the position of themirror, turn the knob to the center position or turn itto the other mirror to adjust that mirror.
If you reach the mirror’s end of the travel position in anydirection, the mirror will enter a ratcheting mode. Thisaction is harmless. It is a warning that the mirror can gono further. To stop this action, back the mirror up bymoving the knob in the opposite direction.
When the knob is turned to the center position, themirrors can not be moved with the control knob.
Outside Convex MirrorA convex mirror’s surface is curved so you can seemore from the driver’s seat.
{CAUTION:
A convex mirror can make things (like othervehicles) look farther away than they really are.If you cut too sharply into the right or left lane,you could hit a vehicle. Check your insidemirror or glance over your shoulder beforechanging lanes.
2-36
Outside Heated MirrorsYour vehicle may have this feature.When you operate the rear window defogger, a defoggeralso warms the heated driver’s and passenger’soutside rearview mirrors to help clear them of ice, snowand condensation.
Outside Automatic Dimming Mirrorwith Curb View AssistIf your vehicle has this feature, the driver’s and/orpassenger’s outside mirror will adjust to a preset tiltposition while the vehicle is in REVERSE (R) gear. Curbview assist may be useful when you are parallelparking. The mirror(s) will return to normal positionwhen the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (R) gear.Automatic mirror movement in either direction will followa short delay.To change the tilt position, adjust the mirror while thevehicle is in REVERSE (R) gear with the engine running,the parking brake engaged and the brake pedalpressed. The new position will be saved into memoryonce the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (R).
You may be able to enable/disable this feature throughthe Driver Information Center (DIC). See “Mirror CurbView Assist” under DIC Operation and Displays onpage 3-49.
OnStar ® System
Your vehicle may have this feature. OnStar® usesglobal positioning system (GPS) satellite technology,wireless communications, and state of the art callcenters to provide you with a wide range of safety,security, information and convenience services.A complete OnStar® user’s guide and the terms andconditions of the OnStar® Subscription ServiceAgreement are included in your OnStar®-equippedvehicle’s glove box literature. For more information, visitwww.onstar.com, contact OnStar® at 1-888-4-ONSTAR(1-888-466-7827), or press the blue OnStar® button tospeak to an OnStar® advisor 24 hours a day, 7 daysa week.A completed Subscription Service Agreement is requiredprior to delivery of OnStar® services and prepaidcalling minutes are also required for OnStar® PersonalCalling and OnStar® Virtual Advisor use. Terms andconditions of the Subscription Service Agreement can befound at www.onstar.com.
2-37
OnStar ® ServicesOne of the following plans is normally included for aspecific duration with each vehicle equipped withOnStar®. You can upgrade or extend your OnStar®
service plan to meet your needs.
Safe and Sound Plan• Automatic Notification of Air Bag Deployment
• Emergency Services
• Roadside Assistance
• Stolen Vehicle Assistance
• AccidentAssist
• Remote Door Unlock
• Remote Diagnostics
• Online Concierge
Directions and Connections Plan• All Safe and Sound Plan services
• Route Support
• RideAssist
• Information and Convenience Services
Luxury and Leisure Plan• All Directions and Connections Plan services
• Personal Concierge
OnStar ® Personal CallingWith OnStar® Personal Calling, you have a safer way tostay connected while driving. It’s a hands-free wirelessphone that’s integrated into your vehicle. You can placecalls nationwide using voice-activated dialing with nocontracts and no additional roaming charges. To find outmore about OnStar® Personal Calling, refer to theOnStar® owner’s guide in your vehicle’s glove box, orcall OnStar® at 1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827).
OnStar ® Virtual AdvisorWith OnStar® Virtual Advisor you can listen to yourfavorite news, entertainment and information topics,such as traffic and weather reports, stock quotesand sports scores. You listen to your e-mail throughyour vehicle’s speakers, and reply with your hands onthe wheel and your eyes on the road.
2-38
HomeLink ® Transmitter
HomeLink®, a combined universal transmitter andreceiver, provides a way to replace up to threehand−held transmitters used to activate devices such asgate operators, garage door openers, entry doorlocks, security systems and home lighting. AdditionalHomeLink® information can be found on the internet atwww.homelink.com or by calling 1- 800- 355- 3515.
If your vehicle is equipped with the HomeLink®
Transmitter, it complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.Operation is subject to the following two conditions:(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must accept any interference received,including interference that may cause undesiredoperation.
This device complies with RSS- 210 of Industry Canada.Operation is subject to the following two conditions:(1) this device may not cause interference, and(2) this device must accept any interference received,including interference that may cause undesiredoperation of the device.
Changes and modifications to this system by other thanan authorized service facility could void authorizationto use this equipment.
Programming the HomeLink ®
TransmitterDo not use the HomeLink® Transmitter with any garagedoor opener that does not have the “stop and reverse”feature. This includes any garage door opener modelmanufactured before April 1, 1982. If you have a newergarage door opener with rolling codes, please besure to follow steps 6 through 8 to complete theprogramming of your HomeLink® Transmitter.
Read the instructions completely before attempting toprogram the HomeLink® Transmitter. Because ofthe steps involved, it may be helpful to have anotherperson available to assist you in programming thetransmitter.
2-39
Keep the original transmitter for use in other vehicles aswell as for future HomeLink® programming. It is alsorecommended that upon the sale of the vehicle,the programmed HomeLink® buttons should be erasedfor security purposes. Refer to “Erasing HomeLink®
Buttons” or, for assistance, contact HomeLink® on theinternet at: www.homelink.com or by calling1-800-355-3515.
Be sure that people and objects are clear of the garagedoor or gate operator you are programming. Whenprogramming a garage door, it is advised to park outsideof the garage.
It is recommended that a new battery be installed inyour hand-held transmitter for quicker and moreaccurate transmission of the radio frequency.
Your vehicle’s engine should be turned off whileprogramming the transmitter. Follow these steps toprogram up to three channels:
1. Press and hold down the two outside buttons,releasing only when the indicator light begins toflash, after 20 seconds. Do not hold down thebuttons for longer than 30 seconds and do notrepeat this step to program a second and/or thirdtransmitter to the remaining two HomeLink® buttons.
2. Position the end of your hand-held transmitter about1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink®
buttons while keeping the indicator light in view.
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the desiredbutton on HomeLink® and the hand-held transmitterbutton. Do not release the buttons until Step 4has been completed.Some entry gates and garage door openers mayrequire you to substitute Step 3 with the procedurenoted in “Gate Operator and CanadianProgramming” later in this section.
4. The indicator light will flash slowly at first and thenrapidly after HomeLink® successfully receives thefrequency signal from the hand-held transmitter.Release both buttons.
5. Press and hold the newly-trained HomeLink® buttonand observe the indicator light.If the indicator light stays on constantly,programming is complete and your device shouldactivate when the HomeLink® button is pressed andreleased.To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons,begin with Step 2 under “Programming HomeLink®.”Do not repeat Step 1 as this will erase all of theprogrammed channels.If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two secondsand then turns to a constant light, continue withSteps 6 through 8 following to complete theprogramming of a rolling-code equipped device(most commonly, a garage door opener).
2-40
6. Locate in the garage, the garage door openerreceiver (motor-head unit). Locate the “Learn”or “Smart” button. This can usually be found wherethe hanging antenna wire is attached to themotor-head unit.
7. Firmly press and release the “Learn” or “Smart”button. The name and color of the button mayvary by manufacturer.You will have 30 seconds to start Step 8.
8. Return to the vehicle. Firmly press and hold theprogrammed HomeLink® button for two seconds,then release. Repeat the press/hold/releasesequence a second time, and depending on thebrand of the garage door opener (or other rollingcode device), repeat this sequence a third timeto complete the programming.HomeLink® should now activate your rolling-codeequipped device.
To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons,begin with Step 2 of “Programming HomeLink®.” Do notrepeat Step 1.
Gate Operator and CanadianProgrammingCanadian radio-frequency laws require transmittersignals to “time out” or quit after several seconds oftransmission. This may not be long enough forHomeLink® to pick up the signal during programming.Similarly, some U.S. gate operators are manufactured to“time out” in the same manner.
If you live in Canada, or you are having difficultyprogramming a gate operator by using the“Programming HomeLink®” procedures (regardless ofwhere you live), replace Step 3 under “ProgrammingHomeLink®” with the following:
Continue to press and hold the HomeLink® button whileyou press and release every two seconds (cycle)your hand-held transmitter until the frequency signal hasbeen successfully accepted by HomeLink®. Theindicator light will flash slowly at first and then rapidly.Proceed with Step 4 under “Programming HomeLink®”to complete.
Using HomeLink ®
Press and hold the appropriate HomeLink® button for atleast half of a second. The indicator light will comeon while the signal is being transmitted.
2-41
Erasing HomeLink ® ButtonsTo erase programming from the three buttons do thefollowing:
1. Press and hold down the two outside buttons untilthe indicator light begins to flash, after 20 seconds.
2. Release both buttons. Do not hold for longer than30 seconds.
HomeLink® is now in the train (learning) mode and canbe programmed at any time beginning with Step 2under “Programming HomeLink®.”
Individual buttons can not be erased, but they can bereprogrammed. See “Reprogramming a SingleHomeLink® Button” next.
Reprogramming a Single HomeLink ®
ButtonTo program a device to HomeLink® using a HomeLink®
button previously trained, follow these steps:
1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button. Donot release the button.
2. The indicator light will begin to flash after20 seconds. While still holding the HomeLink®
button, proceed with Step 2 under “ProgrammingHomeLink®.”
Resetting DefaultsTo reset HomeLink® to default settings do the following:
1. Hold down the two outside buttons for about20 seconds until the indicator light begins to flash.
2. Continue to hold both buttons until the HomeLink®
indicator light turns off.
3. Release both buttons.
For questions or comments, contact HomeLink® at1-800-355-3515, or on the internet atwww.homelink.com.
Storage Areas
Glove BoxTo open your glove box, pull the handle on the front ofthe glove box and lower the door.
2-42
Overhead Console
Your vehicle may have thisfeature. The overheadconsole may includesunglasses storage, aHomeLink® transmitter, asunroof switch and atravel note recorder.
If your vehicle has a third row seat, the rear quarterglass switches are also located in the overhead console.These switches allow the driver to open and closeeach third row seat window separately.
Sunglasses Storage CompartmentTo open the sunglasses storage compartment in theoverhead console, press the release button. Then pullthe compartment down.
Travel Note Recorder
Your vehicle may have this feature.
O (Record): To record a message, press this buttonand begin speaking. Press the button again to stoprecording. You may also press and hold this button whileyou are speaking and then let it go when you are finished.
w (Play): To play a recorded message, press thisbutton. Pressing the button more than once will returnyou to previously recorded messages. If you pressand hold this button for more than one second, all of therecorded messages will be played back.
c (Stop): To delete messages, press this buttonwhile the message is playing. If you press and hold theplay and record buttons at the same time for a halfof a second, all of the messages will be deleted.
2-43
Front Storage AreaIf your vehicle has this console compartment, squeezethe front lever while lifting the top to open it. Youcan store cassettes and compact discs in the slots infront of the compartment.
Your vehicle’s console will be equipped with cupholderslocated on the front and rear of the storagecompartment.
The console may also contain one or more of thefollowing components:
• Rear Seat Audio Controls
• Rear Seat Accessory Power Outlets
• Rear Climate Control
If your vehicle has the center armrest compartment, liftthe cover to expose the storage area which includesslots for cassettes or compact discs.
Luggage Carrier
{CAUTION:
If you try to carry something on top of yourvehicle that is longer or wider than the luggagecarrier — like paneling, plywood, a mattressand so forth — the wind can catch it as youdrive along. This can cause you to losecontrol. What you are carrying could beviolently torn off, and this could cause you orother drivers to have a collision, and of coursedamage your vehicle. You may be able to carrysomething like this inside. But, never carrysomething longer or wider than the luggagecarrier on top of your vehicle.
A luggage carrier allows you to load things on top ofyour vehicle. The luggage carrier has side rails attachedto the roof, sliding crossrails (if equipped) and placesto use for tying things down. These let you loadsome other things on top of your vehicle, as long asthey are not wider or longer than the luggage carrier.
2-44
To slide the crossrails to where you want them, pull upon the lever on each side of the crossrail. This willrelease the crossrail and allow you to slide it. When thecrossrail is where you want it, press down on thelevers to lock it into place.
Notice: Loading cargo on the luggage carrier thatweighs more than 220 lbs (100 kg) or hangs over therear or sides of the vehicle may damage yourvehicle. Load cargo so that it rests on the slats asfar forward as possible and against the siderails, making sure to fasten it securely.
Don’t exceed the maximum vehicle capacity whenloading your vehicle. For more information on vehiclecapacity and loading, see Loading Your Vehicle onpage 4-47.
To prevent damage or loss of cargo as you’re driving,check now and then to make sure the luggage carrier islocked and cargo is still securely fastened.
When the luggage carrier is not in use, place thecrossrails at the following positions for wind noisereduction. Place one crossrail at the rear most point ofthe vehicle and the other crossrail above the openingof the rear door.
Rear Storage Area
Rear Compartment StoragePanel/Cover
Upper Position
2-45
Your vehicle may have this feature. This shelf positionis used as a cargo shade. Insert the front corners of thepanel into the top guides and slide the panel forward.Press down on the back of the panel to lock it in place.
{CAUTION:
If you were to carry things on the adjustableshelf when it is in the upper (cargo cover)position, then during a sudden vehiclemovement or a crash those things could bethrown around in the vehicle. You or otherscould be injured. When it is in the upperposition, always secure any cargo on the floorbeneath the shelf/cover.
To prevent soiling the carpet, the panel may be installedeither side up. Insert the front corners of the panelinto the lower guides and slide the panel forward. Pressdown on the back of the panel to lock it in place.
Notice: Loading objects that weigh over 200 lbs(90 kg) onto the panel may cause damage. Repairswould not be covered by your warranty. Do notload heavy objects on the panel.
Lower Position
2-46
Plastic grocery bags can be attached to the hooks onthe panel. Insert the front corners of the panel intothe vertical guides behind the seatbacks and slide thepanel down.
Notice: If you use the panel as a barrier for largeobjects in the cargo area while the seatbacksare folded down, the panel may be damaged. Do notuse the panel as a barrier between large objectsin the rear cargo area and the seating area.
Rear Floor Storage Lid
{CAUTION:
If any removable convenience item is notsecured properly, it can move around in acollision or sudden stop. People in the vehiclecould be injured. Be sure to secure any suchitem properly.
Your vehicle has a rear cargo area with a removeablestorage lid.
To remove the rear floor storage lid, do the following:
1. Press the latch release and lift up the latch handle.
2. Raise the lid slightly to unhook it.
3. Pull the lid toward you to release it from the forwardmounting tabs.
To reinstall the rear floor storage lid, reverse theprevious steps. Make sure the lid is secure by applyingslight pressure to the latch until you hear it click.
Vertical Position
2-47
TableYour vehicle may be equipped with a table. Themaximum load for the table is 200 lbs. (90 kg).
To set up the table, do the following:
1. Remove the table from its stowed location in therear of the vehicle.
2. Remove the cover.
3. Open the four legs on the underside of the tablebase. A leg is fully extended when the leg latchsnaps into place.
Use the table base on level ground only.
To take down the table, do the following:
1. Press in the latch to disengage it from each leg.Completely fold each leg under the base.
2. Reinstall the cover.
3. Return the table to its stowed location.
Convenience NetYou may have a convenience net in the rear of yourvehicle to help keep small items in place during sharpturns or quick stops and starts.
The net is not designed to retain these items duringoff-road use. The net is not for larger, heavier items.
To use the convenience net, do the following:
1. Attach the upper loops to the retainers on bothsides of the liftgate opening. The label should bein the upper passenger’s side corner, visiblefrom the rear of the vehicle.
2. Attach the lower hooks to the rear cargo tie downson the floor.
Cargo CoverIf your vehicle has a cargo cover, you can use it tocover items in the cargo area of your vehicle.
To install the cargo cover, do the following:
1. Align the endcap with the pocket in the trim panellocated behind the rear seat.
2. Compress the opposite endcap, align it with thepocket located on the opposite side of the trimpanel and release.
3. Grasp the handle and unroll the cover. Latch theposts into the sockets on the inside of the vehicleto secure it.
2-48
To remove the cargo cover, do the following:
1. Release the cover from the latch posts and carefullyroll it back up.
2. Compress one endcap and remove it from thepocket in the trim panel.
3. Remove the cargo cover from the other endcap sothat you can remove the shade from the vehicle.
{CAUTION:
An improperly stored cargo cover could bethrown about the vehicle during a collision orsudden maneuver. You or others could beinjured. If you remove the cover, always storeit in the proper storage location. When you putit back, always be sure that it is securelyreattached.
Cargo Tie Downs
There may be cargo tiedowns in the rear of yourvehicle that allow youto strap cargo in and keepit from moving.
2-49
SunroofYour vehicle may be equipped with a power slidingsunroof. To open or close your sunroof, the ignition mustbe on or Retained Accessory Power (RAP) must beactive.
Press and release the back of the button in the overheadconsole to open the sunroof. Press the front of thebutton to close the sunroof. Once the sunroof is closed,press the forward side of the button to open thesunroof to the vent position.
The sunroof is also equipped with a sunshade whichyou can pull forward to block sun rays.
Vehicle Personalization
Memory Seat
Your vehicle may have thisfeature. The controls arelocated on the driver’sdoor, and are usedto program and recallmemory settings for thedriver’s seating positions,outside mirror positionsand adjustable pedals(if equipped).
Adjust the driver’s seat, including the seatback reclinerand lumbar, both of the outside mirrors, and theadjustable pedals to the desired position. Then pressand hold button 1 (for driver 1) for three seconds.A double chime will sound to let you know that theposition has been stored.
2-50
A second mirror position, seating position and adjustablepedal position can be programmed by repeating theprocedure with a second driver and pressing button 2 forthree seconds. Each time button 1 or 2 is pressedand released while the vehicle is in PARK (P), a singlechime will sound, and the memory position will berecalled.
If you use the unlock button on the remote keyless entrytransmitter to enter your vehicle, the preset driver’sseat, mirror positions and adjustable pedal position willbe recalled if programmed to do so through theDriver Information Center (DIC). The numbers on theback of the transmitters, 1 or 2, correspond to thenumbers on the memory controls.
The seat positions, mirror positions and adjustablepedal positions can also be recalled by placing the keyin the ignition if programmed to do so through theDriver Information Center (DIC). See DIC Operation andDisplays on page 3-49.
To stop recall movement of the memory feature at anytime, press one of the power seat controls or memorybuttons.
Two personalized exit positions can be set by firstrecalling the driver’s position by pressing 1 or 2, thenpositioning the seat in the desired exit position forthat driver. Press and hold the button with the exitsymbol for three seconds. A double chime will sound tolet you know that the position has been stored. Withthe vehicle in PARK (P), the exit position for that drivercan be recalled by pressing the exit button. Themirrors, power lumbar, recline and adjustable pedalpositions will not be stored or recalled for the exitpositions. If no exit position is stored, the default is allthe way rearward.
Further programming for automatic seat and mirrormovement can be done through the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). You may choose to either select ornot select the following:
• Automatic seat, mirror movement and pedalposition when the vehicle is unlocked with theremote keyless entry
• automatic seat, mirror movement and pedal positionwhen a key is placed in the ignition
• automatic seat movement to the exit position whenthe vehicle is in PARK (P).
2-51
✍ NOTES
2-52
Instrument Panel Overview ...............................3-4Hazard Warning Flashers ................................3-5Other Warning Devices ...................................3-6Horn .............................................................3-6Tilt Wheel .....................................................3-6Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .........................3-7Exterior Lamps .............................................3-14Interior Lamps ..............................................3-17Accessory Power Outlets ...............................3-19Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter ........................3-19
Climate Controls ............................................3-20Dual Climate Control System ..........................3-20Dual Automatic Climate
Control System .........................................3-23Rear Climate Control System .........................3-28Climate Controls Personalization .....................3-31
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators .............3-32Instrument Panel Cluster ................................3-33Speedometer and Odometer ...........................3-34Tachometer .................................................3-34Safety Belt Reminder Light .............................3-35
Air Bag Readiness Light ................................3-35Charging System Light ..................................3-36Voltmeter Gage ............................................3-37Brake System Warning Light ..........................3-38Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light .............3-39Engine Coolant Temperature Gage ..................3-39Malfunction Indicator Lamp .............................3-40Oil Pressure Gage ........................................3-43Change Engine Oil Light ................................3-44Security Light ...............................................3-44Cruise Control Light ......................................3-45Reduced Engine Power Light .........................3-45Service Four-Wheel Drive Warning Light ..........3-46Check Gages Warning Light ...........................3-46Gate Ajar Light .............................................3-47Fuel Gage ...................................................3-47Low Fuel Warning Light .................................3-48
Driver Information Center (DIC) .......................3-48DIC Operation and Displays ...........................3-49DIC Warnings and Messages .........................3-57
Section 3 Instrument Panel
3-1
Audio System(s) .............................................3-61Setting the Time ...........................................3-61Radio with CD ..............................................3-62Radio with Cassette and CD ..........................3-72Radio with Six-Disc CD .................................3-86Navigation/Radio System ...............................3-99Rear Seat Entertainment System ...................3-100Rear Seat Audio (RSA) ................................3-110Radio Personalization ..................................3-111Theft-Deterrent Feature‘ (RDS Radios) ...........3-111Audio Steering Wheel Controls ......................3-111
DVD Distortion ............................................3-112Understanding Radio Reception ....................3-112Care of Your Cassette Tape Player ...............3-113Care of Your CDs and DVDs ........................3-114Care of Your CD and DVD Player .................3-114Cleaning the Video Screen ...........................3-114Fixed Mast Antenna ....................................3-114XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System
(48 Contiguous US States) ........................3-115Chime Level Adjustment ...............................3-115
Section 3 Instrument Panel
3-2
✍ NOTES
3-3
Instrument Panel Overview
3-4
The main components of your instrument panel are thefollowing:A. Exterior Lamp Controls. See Exterior Lamps on
page 3-14.B. Air Outlets. See “Outlet Adjustment” under Dual
Climate Control System on page 3-20.C. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever. See Turn
Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 3-7.D. Instrument Panel Cluster. See Instrument Panel
Cluster on page 3-33.E. Ignition Switch. See Ignition Positions on page 2-18.F. Transfer Case Controls or Traction Control Button.
See “Automatic Transfer Case” under Four-WheelDrive on page 2-24.
G. Rear Window Washer/Wiper. See “Rear WindowWasher/Wiper” under Turn Signal/Multifunction Leveron page 3-7.
H. Audio System. See Audio System(s) on page 3-61.I. Climate Controls. See Dual Climate Control
System on page 3-20.J. Hood Release. See Hood Release on page 5-10.K. Ashtray. See Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter on
page 3-19.L. Shift Lever. See Shifting Into Park (P) on page 2-29.M. Lighter. See Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter on
page 3-19.N. Accessory Power Outlet. See Accessory Power
Outlets on page 3-19.
O. Rear Window Defogger. See “Rear WindowDefogger” under Dual Climate Control System onpage 3-20.
P. Glove Box. See Glove Box on page 2-42.
Hazard Warning Flashers
Your hazard warning flashers let you warn others. Theyalso let police know you have a problem. Your frontand rear turn signal lamps will flash on and off.
3-5
The button for the hazardwarning flashers is locatedon top of the steeringcolumn.
The hazard warning flashers work no matter whatposition your key is in, and even if the key isn’t in.
Press the button all the way down to make your frontand rear turn signal lamps flash on and off. To turnoff the flashers, press the button again until it clicks andthen release it.
When the hazard warning flashers are on, the turnsignals won’t work.
Other Warning DevicesIf you carry reflective triangles, you can set one up atthe side of the road about 300 feet (100 m) behind yourvehicle.
HornTo sound the horn, press the horn symbols on thesteering wheel pad.
Tilt Wheel
You should adjust thesteering wheel before youdrive. The tilt lever islocated to the left of thesteering column, under theturn signal lever.
You can raise it to the highest level to give your legsmore room when you enter and exit the vehicle.
To tilt the wheel, hold the steering wheel and pull thelever toward you. Move the steering wheel to acomfortable level, then release the lever to lock thewheel in place.
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.
3-6
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
The lever on the left side of the steering columnincludes the following:
• G: Turn and Lane Change Signals
• 2: Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
• Flash-to-Pass Feature
• N: Windshield Wipers
• J: Windshield Washer
• I: Cruise Control (If Equipped)
Turn and Lane Change SignalsThe turn signal has two upward (for right) and twodownward (for left) positions. These positions allow youto signal a turn or a lane change.
To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up or down.When the turn is finished, the lever will returnautomatically.
An arrow on the instrumentpanel cluster will flash inthe direction of theturn or lane change.
To signal a lane change, just raise or lower the leveruntil the arrow starts to flash. Hold it there until youcomplete your lane change. The lever will return by itselfwhen you release it. The bottom of the outsiderearview mirrors may also be equipped with lane changeindicators.
As you signal a turn or a lane change, if the arrowsflash more quickly than normal, a signal bulb maybe burned out and other drivers won’t see your turnsignal.
3-7
If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help avoid anaccident. If the arrows don’t go on at all when you signala turn, check the fuse. See Fuses and Circuit Breakerson page 5-93 and check for burned-out bulbs.
If you have a trailer towing option with added wiring forthe trailer lamps, a different turn signal flasher isused. With this flasher installed, the signal indicator willflash even if a turn signal bulb is burned out. Checkthe front and rear turn signal lamps regularly to makesure they are working.
Turn Signal On ChimeIf your turn signal is left on for more than 3/4 of a mile(1.2 km), a chime will sound at each flash of theturn signal. To turn off the chime, move the turn signallever to the off position.
Headlamp High/Low-Beam ChangerTo change the headlamps from low to high beam, pushthe lever toward the instrument panel. To return tolow-beam headlamps, pull the multifunction lever towardyou. Then release it.
When the high beams areon, this indicator light onthe instrument panelcluster will also be on.
Flash-to-PassThis feature lets you use your high-beam headlamps tosignal a driver in front of you that you want to pass.It works even if your headlamps are in the automaticposition.
To use it, pull the turn signal lever toward you, thenrelease it.
If your headlamps are in the automatic position or onlow beam, your high-beam headlamps will turn on.They’ll stay on as long as you hold the lever toward you.The high-beam indicator on the instrument panelcluster will come on. Release the lever to return tonormal operation.
3-8
Windshield Wipers
8 (Mist): For a single wiping cycle, turn the band tomist. Hold it there until the wipers start. Then let go.The wipers will stop after one wipe. If you wantmore wipes, hold the band on mist longer.
9 (Off): To stop the wipers, move the band to off.
N (Windshield Wipers): Turn the band to control thewindshield wipers.
You can set the wiper speed for a long or short delaybetween wipes. This can be very useful in light rainor snow. Turn the band to choose the delay time. Thecloser to the top of the lever, the shorter the delay.
For steady wiping at low speed, turn the band away fromyou to the first solid band past the delay settings. Forhigh-speed wiping, turn the band further, to the secondsolid band past the delay settings. To stop the wipers,move the band to off.
Be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper bladesbefore using them. If they’re frozen to the windshield,carefully loosen or thaw them. If your blades do becomeworn or damaged, get new blades or blade inserts.
Rainsense™ WipersYour vehicle may be equipped withRainsense™ windshield wipers. When active, thesewipers are able to detect moisture on the windshield andautomatically turn on the wipers.
The moisture sensor is located next to the insiderearview mirror and is mounted on the windshield.
To turn on the Rainsense™ feature, the wipers must beset to one of the five delay settings on the multifunctionlever. Each of the five settings adjusts the sensitivityof the rainsensor. For more wipes, select the highersettings; for fewer wipes, select the lower settingslocated closer to off on the multifunction lever.
The rainsensor will automatically control the frequencyof the wipes from off to high speed according to theweather conditions. The wipers can be left in arainsense mode even when it is not raining.
Notice: If you do not turn off the windshield wiperswhen driving through an automatic car wash, youcould damage the wipers. Always turn off thewindshield wipers before entering an automaticcar wash.
3-9
Windshield Washer
L(Windshield Washer): To spray washer fluid on thewindshield, press the windshield washer paddle. Thewipers will clear the window and then either stopor return to your preset speed.
{CAUTION:
In freezing weather, do not use your washeruntil the windshield is warmed. Otherwise thewasher fluid can form ice on the windshield,blocking your vision.
Rear Window Washer/WiperThis control is located tothe right of the steeringwheel on the instrumentpanel.
To turn the rear wiper on, turn the control to either 1, 2,or 3. For delayed wiping, turn the control to 1 or 2.For steady wiping, turn the control to 3. To turn the wiperoff, turn the control to 0.
To wash the rear window, press the washer symbollocated in the center of the control.
The rear window washer uses the same fluid bottle asthe windshield washer. However, the rear windowwasher will run out of fluid before the windshield washer.If you can wash your windshield but not your rearwindow, check the fluid level.
3-10
Headlamp Washer
Your vehicle may beequipped with a headlampwasher system. Thebutton to operate thisfeature is located on theinstrument panel andfunctions separately fromyour other washersystems.
To wash your headlamps, press the headlamp washerbutton briefly and release to activate the system.Two pressurized bursts of washer fluid will then beapplied to the headlamps.
Cruise Control
The cruise controls arelocated on the end of theturn signal/multifunctionlever.
R(On): Move the switch to this position to turn thecruise control system on.
S(Resume/Accelerate): Move the switch to thisposition to resume a set speed or to accelerate.
T(Set): Press this button, located at the end of thelever, to set a speed.
9(Off): This position turns the cruise control systemoff and cancels memory of a set speed.
3-11
With cruise control, you can maintain a speed of about25 mph (40 km/h) or more without keeping your footon the accelerator. This can really help on longtrips. Cruise control does not work at speeds belowabout 25 mph (40 km/h).
If you apply your brakes, the cruise control will shut off.
{CAUTION:
Cruise control can be dangerous where youcan not drive safely at a steady speed. So, donot use your cruise control on winding roadsor in heavy traffic.
Cruise control can be dangerous on slipperyroads. On such roads, fast changes in tiretraction can cause needless wheel spinning,and you could lose control. Do not use cruisecontrol on slippery roads.
{CAUTION:
If you leave your cruise control on when youare not using cruise, you might hit a buttonand go into cruise when you do not want to.You could be startled and even lose control.Keep the cruise control switch off until youwant to use cruise control.
Setting Cruise Control
1. Move the cruise control switch to on.
2. Get up to the speed you want.
3. Press the set button at the end of the lever andrelease it.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal. Theaccelerator pedal will not go down.
3-12
The cruise light on the instrument panel cluster willcome on when the cruise control is engaged.
Resuming a Set SpeedSuppose you set your cruise control at a desired speedand then you apply the brake. This, of course, shutsoff the cruise control. But you don’t need to reset it.
Once you’re going about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more, youcan move the cruise control switch briefly from on toresume/accelerate.
You’ll go right back up to your chosen speed andstay there.
If you hold the switch at resume/accelerate, the vehiclewill keep going faster until you release the switch orapply the brake. So unless you want to go faster, don’thold the switch at resume/accelerate.
Increasing Speed While Using CruiseControlThere are two ways to go to a higher speed:
• Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higherspeed. Press the button at the end of the lever, thenrelease the button and the accelerator pedal.You’ll now cruise at the higher speed.
• Move the cruise switch from on toresume/accelerate. Hold it there until you get up tothe speed you want, and then release the switch.To increase your speed in very small amounts,move the switch briefly to resume/accelerate. Eachtime you do this, your vehicle will go about1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.
Reducing Speed While Using CruiseControlPress in the set button at the end of the lever until youreach the lower speed you want, then release it.Each time you do this, you’ll go about 1 mph (1.6 km/h)slower.
Passing Another Vehicle While UsingCruise ControlUse the accelerator pedal to increase your speed.When you take your foot off the pedal, your vehicle willslow down to the cruise control speed you set earlier.
United States Canada
3-13
Using Cruise Control on HillsHow well your cruise control will work on hills dependsupon your speed, load and the steepness of thehills. When going up steep hills, you may want to stepon the accelerator pedal to maintain your speed.When going downhill, you may have to brake or shift toa lower gear to keep your speed down. Of course,applying the brake takes you out of cruise control. Manydrivers find this to be too much trouble and don’t usecruise control on steep hills.
Ending Cruise ControlThere are three ways to turn off the cruise control:
• Step lightly on the brake pedal.
• Move the cruise switch to off, or
• Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL (N).
Erasing Speed MemoryWhen you turn off the cruise control or the ignition, yourcruise control set speed memory is erased.
Exterior Lamps
Your exterior lamps knobis located on yourinstrument panel to the leftof the steering wheel.
c(Off): Turn the knob to this symbol and release it toturn off the Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) and theautomatic headlamps. An indicator will illuminate whenthe position is selected. This position is not availablefor vehicles first sold in Canada.
i (Automatic DRL/AHS): Turning the knob to thissymbol puts the system into automatic headlamp mode.An indicator will illuminate when the position isselected.
3-14
; (Parking Lamps): Turn the knob to this symbol tomanually turn on the following:• Parking Lamps• Sidemarker Lamps• Taillamps• License Plate Lamps• Instrument Panel Lights
2(Headlamps): Turn the knob to this symbol to turnon all the lamps listed as well as the headlamps.
Automatic Headlamp SystemWhen it is dark enough outside, your AutomaticHeadlamp System will turn on your headlamps at thenormal brightness along with other lamps such asthe taillamps, sidemarker, parking lamps and theinstrument panel lights. The radio lights will also be on.Your vehicle is equipped with a light sensor on thetop of the instrument panel. Be sure it is not covered orthe system will be on whenever the ignition is on.The system may also turn on your lights when drivingthrough a parking garage, heavy overcast weatheror a tunnel. This is normal.There is a delay in the transition between the daytimeand nighttime operation of the Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) and the automatic headlamp systems, sothat driving under bridges or bright overhead street
lights does not affect the system. The DRL andautomatic headlamp system will only be affected whenthe light sensor sees a change in lighting lastinglonger than the delay.
If you start your vehicle in a dark garage, the automaticheadlamp system will come on immediately. Onceyou leave the garage, it will take about one minute forthe automatic headlamp system to change to DRL if it islight outside. During that delay, your instrument panelcluster may not be as bright as usual. Make sureyour instrument panel brightness control is in the fullbright position.
To idle your vehicle with the automatic headlampsystem off, set the parking brake while the ignition is off.Then start your vehicle. The automatic headlampsystem will stay off until you release the parking brake,shift out of park or turn the exterior lamp control tothe off position as described in “Exterior Lamps” listedpreviously.
Lamps On ReminderA reminder tone will sound when your headlamps orparking lamps are manually turned on, the driver’s dooris open and your ignition is in LOCK or ACCESSORY.To turn the tone off, turn the knob all the waycounterclockwise. In the automatic mode, the headlampsturn off once the ignition key is in LOCK.
3-15
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier forothers to see the front of your vehicle during theday. DRL can be helpful in many different drivingconditions, but they can be especially helpful in the shortperiods after dawn and before sunset. Fully functionaldaytime running lamps are required on all vehiclesfirst sold in Canada.
The DRL system will make your headlamps come onat reduced brightness when the following conditionsare met:
• The ignition is on
• the exterior lamps knob is in automaticheadlamp mode
• the light sensor detects daytime light
• the transmission is not in PARK (P)
When the DRL are on, only your headlamps will be on.The taillamps, sidemarker and other lamps won’t beon. The instrument panel won’t be lit up either.
When it begins to get dark, the headlamps willautomatically switch from DRL to the regular headlamps.
Fog LampsYour vehicle may have this feature. Use your fog lampsfor better vision in foggy or misty conditions. Yourignition must be in RUN for your fog lamps to work.
The fog lamp button islocated on the instrumentpanel to the right ofthe exterior lamps knob.
Press the button to turn the fog lamps on. Press thebutton again to turn them off. A light will glow near thebutton while the fog lamps are on. Fog lamps willturn off whenever your high-beam headlamps are on.
3-16
Interior Lamps
Instrument Panel Brightness
Press the knob locatednext to the exterior lampsknob to extend it.
Turn the knob to adjust the instrument panel lights. Turnthe knob all the way up to turn on the interior lamps.Press the knob back into its stored position when you’renot using it.
Dome Lamp Override
The dome override buttonis located below theexterior lamps knob.
To turn the dome lamps off, press the button. The domelamps will remain off when a door is open. This willoverride the illuminated entry feature unless youuse your keyless entry transmitter to unlock the vehicle.
To return the lamps to automatic operation, press thebutton again. The dome lamps will come on whenyou open a door.
3-17
Entry LightingYour vehicle is equipped with entry lighting.When a door is opened, the dome lamps will come on ifthe dome override button is in the “out” position.When all the doors are closed, the lamps will stay on fora short period of time and will then turn off automatically.If you use your keyless entry transmitter to unlock thevehicle, the interior lights will come on for a shorttime whether or not the dome override is on.
Exit LightingWith exit lighting, the interior lamps will come on whenyou remove the key from the ignition to help yousee while exiting the vehicle. With the dome overridebutton in the “out” position, these lights will stay on for ashort period of time and then will go out.
Reading Lamps
Press the lens on the lamp located above the doors toturn the reading lamps on and off.
Dome LampsThe dome lamps will come on when you open a doorunless the dome lamp override is pressed in.
You can also turn the dome lamps on by turning thethumbwheel, located next to the exterior lamps knob, allthe way up to the top detent position. In this position,the dome lamps will remain on until they are turned off.
Battery Run-Down ProtectionThis feature shuts off the dome, courtesy, vanity, andreading lamps if they are left on for more than20 minutes when the ignition is off. This will keep yourbattery from running down.
If the battery run-down protection shuts off the interiorlamps, it may be necessary to do one of the following toreturn to normal operation:
• Shut off all lamps and close all doors, or
• turn the ignition key to RUN.
This feature will also turn off the parking lamps andheadlamps under most circumstances, if they are left on.If you would like to turn them back on, turn the exteriorlamps knob.
3-18
Accessory Power OutletsYour vehicle may have accessory power outlets. Withthe accessory power outlets, you can plug in auxiliaryelectrical equipment such as a cellular telephone orCB radio.
The first outlet is located to the right of the cigarettelighter on the instrument panel. The second outletis located on the rear of the center console.
Remove the cover from the outlet to use the outlet. Besure to put the cover back on when not using theaccessory power outlet.
Certain electrical accessories may not be compatiblewith the accessory power outlet and could resultin blown vehicle or adaptor fuses. If you experience aproblem, see your dealer for additional informationon the accessory power outlets.
Notice: Adding any electrical equipment to yourvehicle may damage it or keep other componentsfrom working as they should. The repairs would notbe covered by your warranty. Check with yourdealer before adding electrical equipment.
When adding electrical equipment, be sure to follow theproper installation instructions included with theequipment.
Notice: Improper use of the power outlet can causedamage not covered by your warranty. Do nothang any type of accessory or accessory bracketfrom the plug because the power outlets aredesigned for accessory power plugs only.
Ashtrays and Cigarette LighterYour vehicle may have this feature. The ashtray isremovable and fits into the front cupholder.
Notice: If you put papers or other flammable itemsin the ashtray, hot cigarettes or other smokingmaterials could ignite them and possibly damageyour vehicle. Never put flammable items in theashtray.
To remove the ashtray, pull the covered bin out of thecupholder.
To use the lighter, press it in all the way, and let go.When it’s ready, it will pop back out by itself.
Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in while it isheating will not allow the lighter to back away fromthe heating element when it is hot. Damage fromoverheating may occur to the lighter or heatingelement, or a fuse could be blown. Do not hold acigarette lighter in while it is heating.
3-19
Climate Controls
Dual Climate Control SystemWith this system you can control the heating, coolingand ventilation for your vehicle.
9(Fan): Turn the left knob clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase or decrease the fan speed.If the knob is in off mode, outside air will still enter thevehicle, and will be directed based on the position of themode knob. The temperature can still be adjustedusing the temperature knob.
Turn the right knob clockwise or counterclockwise todirect the airflow inside of your vehicle.
To change the current mode, select one of the following:
H (Vent): This mode directs air to the instrumentpanel outlets.
)(Bi-Level): This mode directs about half of the airto the instrument panel outlets; then directs most ofthe remaining air to the floor outlets. A little air isdirected toward the windshield and the side windowoutlets. Cooler air is directed to the upper ventsand warmer air to the floor outlets.
6 (Floor): This mode directs most of the air to thefloor outlets with a little air directed to the windshield andthe side window outlets. The recirculation buttoncannot be selected while in floor mode.
h (Recirculation): Recirculation mode is used torecirculate the air inside of your vehicle. When thisbutton is pressed, an indicator light in the buttonwill come on to let you know that it is active. Use thismode to help prevent outside odors and/or dustfrom entering your vehicle or to help cool the air insideof your vehicle more quickly. The air conditioningcompressor will also come on when this mode isactivated. While in recirculation mode, the windows mayfog when the weather is cold and damp. To clear thefog, select either the defog or defrost mode and increasefan speed. Recirculation mode shuts off when theengine is turned off.
3-20
Temperature Control
Driver’s Side: The lever on the left side of the climatecontrol panel is used to raise or lower the temperatureon the driver’s side of the vehicle. Slide the leverup or down to adjust the temperature.
Passenger’s Side: The lever on the right side of theclimate control panel is used to raise or lower thetemperature on the passenger’s side of the vehicle.Slide the lever up or down to adjust the temperature.This lever also adjusts the temperature to the rear seatoutlets.
When the temperature outside is 0°F (-18°C) or lower,use the engine coolant heater, if equipped, to providewarmer air, faster to your vehicle.
#(Air Conditioning): Press this button to turn theair-conditioning system on or off. When the buttonis pressed, an indicator light will come on and thesystem will begin to cool and dehumidify the air insideof your vehicle. You may notice a slight change inengine performance when the air conditioningcompressor shuts off and turns on again. This isnormal.
Defogging and DefrostingFog on the inside of windows is a result of high humidity(moisture) condensing on the cool window glass. Thiscan be minimized if the climate control system isused properly. There are two modes to choose from toclear fog or frost from your windshield. Use thedefog mode to clear the windows of fog or moisture andwarm the passengers. Use the defrost mode toremove fog or frost from the windshield more quickly.
Turn the right knob clockwise or counterclockwiseto select one of the following modes:
-(Defog): This mode directs the air to the flooroutlets, windshield and side window outlets. Therecirculation button cannot be selected while in defogmode.
1(Defrost): This mode directs most of the air to thewindshield and the side window outlets, with only alittle air directed to the floor outlets. The air conditioningcompressor may run to dehumidify the air to preventwindow fogging. The recirculation button cannotbe selected while in defrost mode. Do not drive thevehicle until all the windows are clear.
3-21
Rear Window DefoggerYour vehicle may have this feature. The lines you seeon the rear window warm the glass.
Press this button to turn the rear window defogger on oroff. An indicator light in the button will come on to letyou know that the rear window defogger is active. Therear window defogger will automatically turn offapproximately ten minutes after the button is pressed.
If your vehicle is equipped with heated mirrors, thisbutton will activate them.
Notice: Don’t use anything sharp on the inside ofthe rear window. If you do, you could cut or damagethe warming grid, and the repairs wouldn’t becovered by your warranty. Do not attach a temporaryvehicle license, tape, a decal or anything similarto the defogger grid.
Outlet AdjustmentUse the air outlets located in the center and on the sideof your instrument panel to direct the airflow.
Ventilation SystemFor mild outside temperatures when little heating orcooling is needed, use the vent setting to direct outsideair through your vehicle.
Your vehicle’s ventilation system supplies outside air tothe inside of your vehicle when it is moving. With theside windows closed, air will flow into the front air inletgrilles, through the vehicle and out the air exhaustvalves.
Outside air will also enter the vehicle when the heateror the air conditioning is running, unless you haveselected recirculation mode.
3-22
Operation Tips• Keep the hood and front air inlets free of ice, snow,
or any other obstruction (such as leaves). Theheater and defroster will work far better, reducingthe chance of fogging the inside of your windows.
• When you enter a vehicle in cold weather, turn thefan knob all the way to the right for a few momentsbefore driving. This helps clear the intake ductsof snow and moisture, and reduces the chance offogging the inside of your window.
• Keep the air path under the front seats clear ofobjects. This helps air to circulate throughoutyour vehicle.
• Adding outside equipment to the front of yourvehicle, such as hood-air deflectors, may affect theperformance of the heating and air conditioningsystem. Check with your dealer before addingequipment to the outside of your vehicle.
Dual Automatic ClimateControl SystemYour vehicle may have the dual automatic climatecontrol system. With this system you can control theheating, cooling and ventilation for your vehicle.
When your vehicle is first started and the climate controlsystem is on, or if the climate control system hasbeen turned on, the display will show the driver’stemperature setting for five seconds. Then it will showthe outside temperature.
3-23
OFF: Press this button to turn off the entire climatecontrol system. Outside air will still enter the vehicle, andwill be directed to the floor. Press the AUTO button,the mode button, the fan arrows, or either temperatureknob to turn the system on.
MODE: Press this button to manually select the airdelivery mode to the floor, instrument panel, orwindshield outlets. The system will stay in the selectedmode until the mode button is pressed again or theAUTO button is pressed.
Driver’s Side Temperature Knob: Turn this knobclockwise or counterclockwise to manually raise or lowerthe temperature on the driver’s side of the vehicle.The display will show the temperature setting decreasingor increasing and the word DRIVER will appear onthe display. This knob can also adjust the passenger’sside temperature setting simultaneously if the twozones are linked. The words DRIVER and PASS willthen appear on the display.
Passenger’s Side Temperature Knob: Turn this knobclockwise or counterclockwise to manually raise orlower the temperature on the passenger’s side of thevehicle. The display will show the temperaturesetting decreasing or increasing and the word PASS willappear on the display. The passenger’s temperaturesetting can be set to match and link to the driver’stemperature setting by pressing and holding the AUTObutton for three seconds. Now, by adjusting thedriver’s side temperature setting, the passenger’s sidetemperature setting will follow and both DRIVERand PASS will appear on the display. The passenger’sside temperature setting also resets and relinks tothe driver’s side temperature setting if the vehicle hasbeen off for more than two hours.
3-24
Automatic Operation
AUTO (Automatic): When automatic operation isactive, the system will control the inside temperature,the air delivery mode, and the fan speed.
Use the steps below to place the entire system inautomatic mode:
1. Press the AUTO button.When AUTO is selected, the air conditioningoperation and air inlet mode will be automaticallycontrolled. The air conditioning compressor will runwhen the outside temperature is over approximately40°F (4°C). The air inlet will normally be set tooutside air. If it’s hot outside, the air inlet willautomatically switch to recirculate inside air to helpquickly cool down your vehicle.
2. Set the driver’s and passenger’s temperature.To find your comfort setting, start with a 72°F (22°C)temperature setting and allow about 20 minutesfor the system to regulate. Turn the driver’s orpassenger’s side temperature knob to adjust thetemperature setting as necessary. If you choose thetemperature setting of 60°F (15°C), the systemwill remain at the maximum cooling setting. If youchoose the temperature setting of 90°F (32°C),the system will remain at the maximum heat setting.Choosing either maximum setting may not causethe vehicle to heat or cool any faster.
Manual OperationTo change the current setting, select one of thefollowing:
w9x (Fan): This button allows you to manuallyadjust the fan speed. Press the up arrow to increase fanspeed and the down arrow to decrease fan speed.The display will change to show you the selected fanspeed and the driver’s side temperature setting forfive seconds.
(MODE): Press this button to manually change thedirection of the airflow in your vehicle. Keep pressing thebutton until the desired mode appears on the display.The display will change to show you the selectedair delivery mode and the driver’s temperature settingfor five seconds.
H(Vent): This mode directs air to the instrumentpanel outlets.
)(Bi-Level): This mode directs approximately half ofthe air to the instrument panel outlets, then directsthe remaining air to the floor outlets. A little air isdirected toward the windshield and the side windowoutlets. Cooler air is directed to the upper outlets andwarmer air to the floor outlets.
3-25
6(Floor): This mode directs most of the air to thefloor outlets. Some air also comes out of the defrosterand side window outlets. The recirculation button cannotbe selected in floor mode.
h (Recirculation): Press this button to turnrecirculation mode on or off. When this button ispressed, an indicator light in the button will also comeon to let you know that it is activated. Recirculationmode is used to recirculate the air inside of your vehicle.Use this mode to help prevent outside odors and/ordust from entering your vehicle or to help cool the airinside of your vehicle more quickly. Recirculationmode can be used with vent and bi-level modes, but itcannot be used with floor, defog or defrost modes.
If the weather is cold and damp, the system maycause the windows to fog while using recirculationmode. If the windows do start to fog, select defog ordefrost mode.
#A/C (Air Conditioning): Press this button tomanually turn the air conditioning system on or off.When the system is on, the system will automaticallybegin to cool and dehumidify the air inside of yourvehicle.
If you select air conditioning off while in front defrost ordefog mode, the air conditioning off symbol will flashto let you know this option is not allowed.
You may notice a slight change in engine performancewhen the air-conditioning compressor shuts off andturns on again. This is normal.
A/C OFF (Air Conditioning Off): When you turn theair conditioning off, the words A/C OFF will appearon the display. When the air conditioning is selected orin AUTO mode, the system will run the air conditioningautomatically.
Defogging and DefrostingFog on the inside of windows is a result of high humidity(moisture) condensing on the cool window glass. Thiscan be minimized if the climate control system isused properly. You can use either defog or front defrostto clear fog or frost from your windshield.
-(Defog): Use this setting to clear the windows of fogor moisture. This setting will deliver air to the floorand windshield outlets.
0 (Front Defrost): Press the front defrost button toclear the windshield and side windows of frost orfog quickly. The system will automatically control the fanspeed if you select defrost from AUTO mode. If theoutside temperature is 40°F (4°C) or warmer, your airconditioning compressor will automatically run tohelp dehumidify the air and dry the windshield. Do notdrive the vehicle until all the windows are clear.
3-26
Rear Window DefoggerThe rear window defogger uses a warming grid toremove fog from the rear window.
< (Rear): Press this button to turn the rear windowdefogger on or off.
An indicator light in the button will come on to let youknow that the rear window defogger is activated.
The rear window defogger will turn off approximately10 minutes after the button is pressed. If you needadditional warming time, press the button again.
Notice: Using a razor blade or sharp object to clearthe inside rear window may damage the rearwindow defogger. Repairs would not be covered byyour warranty. Do not clear the inside of the rearwindow with sharp objects.
Outlet AdjustmentUse the air outlets located in the center and on the sideof your instrument panel to direct the airflow.
Ventilation SystemFor mild outside temperatures when little heating orcooling is needed, use the vent setting to direct outsideair through your vehicle.
Your vehicle’s ventilation system supplies outside air tothe inside of your vehicle when it is moving. With theside windows closed, air will flow into the front air inletgrilles, through the vehicle and out the air exhaustvalves.
Outside air will also enter the vehicle when the heateror the air conditioning compressor is running, unless youhave pressed the recirculation button.
Operation Tips• Keep the hood and front air inlets free of ice, snow,
or any other obstruction (such as leaves). Theheater and defroster will work far better, reducingthe chance of fogging the inside of your windows.
• When you enter a vehicle in cold weather, turn thefan knob all the way to the right for a few momentsbefore driving. This helps clear the intake ductsof snow and moisture, and reduces the chance offogging the inside of your window.
• Keep the air path under the front seats clear ofobjects. This helps air to circulate throughoutyour vehicle.
• Adding outside equipment to the front of yourvehicle, such as hood-air deflectors, may affect theperformance of the heating and air conditioningsystem. Check with your dealer before addingequipment to the outside of your vehicle.
3-27
Rear Climate Control SystemYour TrailBlazer has one of the following rear climatecontrol systems. With either system, the rear climatecontrols will be disabled when the front climate controlsystem is in defrost. This occurs to provide maximumairflow to clear the windshield.
The temperature of the air coming through the rearoutlets is determined by the front passenger’stemperature setting. Press the PWR button to turn therear climate controls on and off. Use the mode knobto change the direction of airflow (upper, bi-level or floor)to the rear seat area.
If your vehicle has the rear seat audio system, the lowerbuttons are used to adjust the rear seat climate. Thetemperature of the air coming through the rear outlets isdetermined by the front passenger’s temperaturesetting.
If the front climate control is on and not in defrost mode,the rear climate control can be enabled by pressingthe lower power button (center button) on the controlface. If the front is off or is in defrost mode, therear climate control will flash “OFF” if the power buttonis pressed, indicating the function is unavailable atthis point.
The fan speed is controlled by the fan speed togglebutton. The mode button, on the right, will control wherethe air is vented.
3-28
Outlet Adjustment
Your vehicle may have rear seat outlets that can beused to adjust the airflow toward either seating area, thefloor or upward. Move the control in the center ofeach outlet in any direction to direct airflow.
TrailBlazer EXTTo operate the rear air conditioning system, the front airconditioning system must be on. With the front airconditioning system off, the rear system controls canonly be used to circulate air in the rear of the vehicle.
To adjust the airflowspeed, turn the fan knob(driver override switch),located on the floorconsole to 1, 2 or 3. Therear mode andtemperature position willnow mimic the front controlsystem mode andpassenger sidetemperature.
H(Panel): When panel mode is selected in the frontcontroller, the rear system will distribute air from the fourheadliner outlets.
3-29
)(Bi-level): When bi-level mode is selected in thefront controller, the rear system will distribute air from thefour headliner outlets and the third seat floor outlet.
6(Floor): When floor mode is selected in the frontcontroller, the rear system will distribute air from the thirdseat floor outlet and the second seat floor outlet.
-(Defog): When defog mode is selected in the frontcontroller, the rear system will distribute air from thethird seat floor outlet.
0(Defrost): When defrost mode is selected in thefront controller, the rear system will distribute airfrom the third seat floor outlet.
To activate the second row seat controls in the followingsystems, set the fan knob, located on the frontconsole, to R.
Turn the knobs on the control panel to choose a fanspeed, temperature and direction of airflow.
Select panel mode to deliver air to the four headlineroutlets. Select bi-level mode to deliver warmer air to thethird seat floor outlet and cooler air to the headlineroutlets. Select floor mode to deliver air to the floor outletlocated in the third seat area.
TrailBlazer EXT
3-30
Press the buttons at the bottom of the audio controlpanel to adjust the fan speed, mode and temperature forthe rear passengers. The selections will be shown onthe display.
Press the rear fan control button with the arrow pointingright to turn the rear climate control on. Toggle thisbutton to adjust the air flow speed. To turn therear system off, toggle the left arrow until the displayturns off.
Climate Controls PersonalizationIf your vehicle is equipped with the Driver InformationCenter (DIC), you can store and recall the climatecontrol settings for temperature, air delivery mode andfan speed for two different drivers. The personalchoice settings recalled are determined by thetransmitter used to enter the vehicle. After the buttonwith the unlock symbol on a remote keyless entrytransmitter is pressed, the climate control will adjust tothe last settings of the identified driver. The settingscan also be changed by pressing one of the memorybuttons (1 or 2) located on the driver’s door. Whenadjustments are made, the new settings areautomatically saved for the driver.
TrailBlazer EXT
3-31
Warning Lights, Gages andIndicatorsThis part describes the warning lights and gages thatmay be on your vehicle. The pictures will help youlocate them.
Warning lights and gages can signal that something iswrong before it becomes serious enough to causean expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention toyour warning lights and gages could also save youor others from injury.
Warning lights come on when there may be or is aproblem with one of your vehicle’s functions. As you willsee in the details on the next few pages, somewarning lights come on briefly when you start theengine just to let you know they’re working. If you arefamiliar with this section, you should not be alarmedwhen this happens.
Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problemwith one of your vehicle’s functions. Often gagesand warning lights work together to let you know whenthere’s a problem with your vehicle.
When one of the warning lights comes on and stays onwhen you are driving, or when one of the gagesshows there may be a problem, check the section thattells you what to do about it. Please follow thismanual’s advice.
Waiting to do repairs can be costly–and evendangerous. So please get to know your warning lightsand gages. They’re a big help.
Your vehicle may also have a Driver Information Center(DIC) that works along with the warning lights andgages. See Driver Information Center (DIC) onpage 3-48.
3-32
Instrument Panel ClusterYour instrument panel cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. You’ll know howfast you’re going, about how much fuel you’ve used, and many other thing you’ll need to know to drive safelyand economically.
United States version shown, Canada similar
3-33
Speedometer and OdometerYour speedometer lets you see your speed in bothmiles per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h).
Your odometer shows how far your vehicle hasbeen driven, in either miles (used in the United States)or kilometers (used in Canada).
The odometer mileage can be checked without thevehicle running. Simply press the trip stem located onthe instrument panel cluster.
You may wonder what happens if your vehicle needs anew odometer installed. The new one will be set tothe correct mileage total of the old odometer.
Trip Odometer
The trip odometer can tell you how far your vehicle hasbeen driven since you last set the trip odometer to zero.
The trip odometer is part of the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). For vehicles without a DIC, press the stemlocated on the instrument panel cluster to display thetrip odometer. Press and hold the stem to reset the tripodometer once it is displayed.
TachometerThe tachometer displays the engine speed in revolutionsper minute (rpm).
Notice: If you operate the engine with thetachometer in the shaded warning area, your vehiclecould be damaged, and the damages would notbe covered by your warranty. Do not operatethe engine with the tachometer in the shadedwarning area.
3-34
Safety Belt Reminder LightWhen the key is turned to RUN, a chime will come onfor several seconds to remind people to fasten theirsafety belts, unless the driver’s safety belt is alreadybuckled.
The safety belt light willalso come on and stay onfor several seconds,then it will flash forseveral more.
If the driver’s belt is already buckled, neither the chimenor the light will come on.
Air Bag Readiness LightThere is an air bag readiness light on the instrumentpanel, which shows the air bag symbol. The systemchecks the air bag’s electrical system for malfunctions.The light tells you if there is an electrical problem.The system check includes the air bag sensors, the airbag modules, the wiring and the crash sensing anddiagnostic module. For more information on the air bagsystem, see Air Bag Systems on page 1-49.
This light will come onwhen you start yourvehicle, and it will flash fora few seconds. Thenthe light should go out.This means the systemis ready.
3-35
If the air bag readiness light stays on after you start thevehicle or comes on when you are driving, your airbag system may not work properly. Have your vehicleserviced right away.
{CAUTION:
If the air bag readiness light stays on after youstart your vehicle, it means the air bag systemmay not be working properly. The air bags inyour vehicle may not inflate in a crash, or theycould even inflate without a crash. To helpavoid injury to yourself or others, have yourvehicle serviced right away if the air bagreadiness light stays on after you start yourvehicle.
The air bag readiness light should flash for a fewseconds when you turn the ignition key to RUN. If thelight doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it willbe ready to warn you if there is a problem.
Charging System Light
The charging system lightwill come on briefly whenyou turn on the ignition,but the engine is notrunning, as a check toshow you it is working.
It should go out once the engine is running. If it stayson, or comes on while you are driving, you may have aproblem with the charging system. It could indicatethat you have problems with a generator drive belt, oranother electrical problem. Have it checked rightaway. Driving while this light is on could drain yourbattery.
If you must drive a short distance with the light on, becertain to turn off all your accessories, such as the radioand air conditioner.
3-36
Voltmeter Gage
When your engine is notrunning, but the ignition ison (in RUN), this gageshows your battery’s stateof charge in DC volts.
When the engine is running, the gage shows thecondition of the charging system. Readings between thelow and high warning zones indicate the normaloperating range.
Readings in the low warning zone may occur when alarge number of electrical accessories are operating inthe vehicle and the engine is left idling for anextended period. This condition is normal since thecharging system is not able to provide full powerat engine idle. As engine speeds are increased, thiscondition should correct itself as higher engine speedsallow the charging system to create maximum power.
You can only drive for a short time with the readingin either warning zone. If you must drive, turn offall unnecessary accessories.
Readings in either warning zone indicate a possibleproblem in the electrical system. Have the vehicleserviced as soon as possible.
3-37
Brake System Warning LightWhen the ignition is on, the brake system warning lightwill come on when you set your parking brake. Thelight will stay on if your parking brake doesn’t releasefully. If it stays on after your parking brake is fullyreleased, it means you have a brake problem. A chimemay also sound when the light comes on.
Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into twoparts. If one part isn’t working, the other part can stillwork and stop you. For good braking, though, you needboth parts working well.
If the warning light comes on, there could be a brakeproblem. Have your brake system inspected right away.
This light should come on briefly when you turn theignition key to RUN. If it doesn’t come on then, have itfixed so it will be ready to warn you if there’s aproblem.
If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off theroad and stop carefully. You may notice that the pedal isharder to push. Or, the pedal may go closer to thefloor. It may take longer to stop. If the light is still on,have the vehicle towed for service. See TowingYour Vehicle on page 4-44.
{CAUTION:
Your brake system may not be workingproperly if the brake system warning light ison. Driving with the brake system warning lighton can lead to an accident. If the light is stillon after you have pulled off the road andstopped carefully, have the vehicle towed forservice.
United States Canada
3-38
Anti-Lock Brake SystemWarning Light
With the anti-lock brakesystem, this light will comeon when you start yourengine and may stay on forseveral seconds. That’snormal. A chime may alsosound when the lightcomes on.
If the light stays on, or comes on when you’re driving,your vehicle needs service. If the regular brakesystem warning light isn’t on, you still have brakes, butyou don’t have anti-lock brakes. If the regular brakesystem warning light is also on, you don’t have anti-lockbrakes and there’s a problem with your regularbrakes. See Brake System Warning Light on page 3-38earlier in this section.
The anti-lock brake system warning light should comeon briefly when you turn the ignition key to RUN. Ifthe light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it will beready to warn you if there is a problem.
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage
This gage shows the engine coolant temperature. If thegage pointer moves into the red area, it means thatyour engine coolant has overheated. If you have beenoperating your vehicle under normal driving conditions,you should pull off the road, stop your vehicle andturn off the engine as soon as possible.
See Engine Overheating on page 5-26 for moreinformation.
United States Canada
3-39
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Service Engine Soon Light in theUnited States or Check Engine Lightin Canada
Your vehicle is equipped with a computer whichmonitors operation of the fuel, ignition and emissioncontrol systems.
This system is called OBD II (On-BoardDiagnostics-Second Generation) and is intended toassure that emissions are at acceptable levels for thelife of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleanerenvironment. The SERVICE ENGINE SOON or CHECKENGINE light comes on to indicate that there is a
problem and service is required. Malfunctions often willbe indicated by the system before any problem isapparent. This may prevent more serious damage toyour vehicle. This system is also designed to assist yourservice technician in correctly diagnosing anymalfunction.
Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle with thislight on, after a while, your emission controlsmay not work as well, your fuel economy may notbe as good and your engine may not run assmoothly. This could lead to costly repairs that maynot be covered by your warranty.
Notice: Modifications made to the engine,transmission, exhaust, intake or fuel system of yourvehicle or the replacement of the original tireswith other than those of the same Tire PerformanceCriteria (TPC) can affect your vehicle’s emissioncontrols and may cause this light to come on.Modifications to these systems could lead to costlyrepairs not covered by your warranty. This mayalso result in a failure to pass a required EmissionInspection/Maintenance test.
United States Canada
3-40
This light should come on, as a check to show you it isworking, when the ignition is on and the engine isnot running. If the light does not come on, have itrepaired. This light will also come on during amalfunction in one of two ways:
• Light Flashing — A misfire condition has beendetected. A misfire increases vehicle emissionsand may damage the emission control system onyour vehicle. Diagnosis and service may berequired.
• Light On Steady — An emission control systemmalfunction has been detected on your vehicle.Diagnosis and service may be required.
If the Light Is FlashingThe following may prevent more serious damage toyour vehicle:
• Reducing vehicle speed.
• Avoiding hard accelerations.
• Avoiding steep uphill grades.
• If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amount ofcargo being hauled as soon as it is possible.
If the light stops flashing and remains on steady, see “Ifthe Light Is On Steady” following.
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so,stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park your vehicle.Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds and restartthe engine. If the light remains on steady, see “Ifthe Light Is On Steady” following. If the light is stillflashing, follow the previous steps, and see your dealerfor service as soon as possible.
If the Light Is On SteadyYou may be able to correct the emission systemmalfunction by considering the following:
Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?
If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully installthe cap. See Filling Your Tank on page 5-7. Thediagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap hasbeen left off or improperly installed. A loose or missingfuel cap will allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere.A few driving trips with the cap properly installedshould turn the light off.
Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?
If so, your electrical system may be wet. The conditionwill usually be corrected when the electrical systemdries out. A few driving trips should turn the light off.
3-41
Have you recently changed brands of fuel?
If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel. SeeGasoline Octane on page 5-4. Poor fuel quality willcause your engine not to run as efficiently as designed.You may notice this as stalling after start-up, stallingwhen you put the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitationon acceleration or stumbling on acceleration. (Theseconditions may go away once the engine is warmed up.)This will be detected by the system and cause thelight to turn on.
If you experience one or more of these conditions,change the fuel brand you use. It will require at leastone full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off.
If none of the above steps have made the light turn off,your dealer can check the vehicle. Your dealer hasthe proper test equipment and diagnostic tools to fix anymechanical or electrical problems that may havedeveloped.
Emissions Inspection and MaintenanceProgramsSome state/provincial and local governments have ormay begin programs to inspect the emission controlequipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass thisinspection could prevent you from getting a vehicleregistration.
Here are some things you need to know to help yourvehicle pass an inspection:
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the SERVICEENGINE SOON or CHECK ENGINE light is on or notworking properly.
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD(on-board diagnostic) system determines that criticalemission control systems have not been completelydiagnosed by the system. The vehicle would beconsidered not ready for inspection. This can happen ifyou have recently replaced your battery or if yourbattery has run down. The diagnostic system isdesigned to evaluate critical emission control systemsduring normal driving. This may take several daysof routine driving. If you have done this and your vehiclestill does not pass the inspection for lack of OBDsystem readiness, your GM dealer can prepare thevehicle for inspection.
3-42
Oil Pressure Gage
The oil pressure gage shows the engine oil pressure inpsi (pounds per square inch) when the engine isrunning. Canadian vehicles indicate pressure in kPa(kilopascals).
{CAUTION:
Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low. Ifyou do, your engine can become so hot that itcatches fire. You or others could be burned.Check your oil as soon as possible and haveyour vehicle serviced.
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance maydamage the engine. The repairs would not becovered by your warranty. Always follow themaintenance schedule in this manual for changingengine oil.
Oil pressure may vary with engine speed, outsidetemperature and oil viscosity, but readings above thelow pressure zone indicate the normal operating range.
A reading in the low pressure zone may be causedby a dangerously low oil level or other problems causinglow oil pressure.
United States Canada
3-43
Change Engine Oil Light
This light is displayed when the engine oil needs to bechanged.
Once the engine oil has been changed, the CHANGEENG OIL light must be reset. Until it is reset, the light willbe displayed when the engine is on.
Security Light
This light will come on briefly when you turn the keytoward START. The light will stay on until the enginestarts.
If the light flashes, the Passlock® system has entered atamper mode. If the vehicle fails to start, see Passlock®
on page 2-17.
If the light comes on continuously while driving andstays on, there may be a problem with the Passlock®
system. Your vehicle will not be protected by Passlock®,and you should see your dealer.
Also, see Content Theft-Deterrent on page 2-16 foradditional information regarding the SECURITY light.
United States Canada United States Canada
3-44
Cruise Control Light
Your vehicle may have this feature. The CRUISE lightappears whenever you set your cruise control.
Reduced Engine Power Light
This light is displayed when a noticeable reduction inthe vehicle’s performance may occur. The vehicle maybe driven at a reduced speed when the reducedengine power light is on but acceleration and speedmay be reduced. The performance may be reduced untilthe next time you drive your vehicle. If this light stayson, see your dealer as soon as possible for diagnosisand repair.
This light may also come on if there is a problem withthe Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If thishappens, take the vehicle in for service as soonas possible.
United States Canada United States Canada
3-45
Service Four-Wheel DriveWarning Light
This light should come on briefly when you turn on theignition, as a check to show you it is working.
The SERVICE 4WD light comes on to indicate thatthere may be a problem with the drive system andservice is required. Malfunctions can be indicated by thesystem before any problem is apparent, which mayprevent serious damage to the vehicle. This system isalso designed to assist your service technician incorrectly diagnosing a malfunction.
Check Gages Warning Light
The CHECK GAGES light will come on briefly when youare starting the engine.
If the light comes on and stays on while you are driving,check your coolant temperature and engine oilpressure gages to see if they are in the warning zones.
United States Canada
United States Canada
3-46
Gate Ajar Light
If this light comes on, your liftgate or liftglass is ajar. Tryclosing the liftgate or liftglass again. Never drive withthe liftgate or liftglass even partially open.
Fuel Gage
When the ignition is on, the fuel gage tells you abouthow much fuel you have remaining.
United States Canada
United States Canada
3-47
Here are four things that some owners ask about. Noneof these show a problem with your fuel gage:
• At the gas station, the gas pump shuts off beforethe gage reads full.
• It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than thegage indicated. For example, the gage may haveindicated the tank was half full, but it actually took alittle more or less than half the tank’s capacity tofill the tank.
• The gage moves a little when you turn a corner orspeed up.
• The gage doesn’t go back to empty when you turnoff the ignition.
Low Fuel Warning LightThe light next to the fuel gage will come on briefly whenyou are starting the engine.
This light comes on when the fuel tank is low on fuel.To turn it off, add fuel to the fuel tank.
Driver Information Center (DIC)Your vehicle may have this feature. The DIC displayis located on the instrument panel cluster abovethe steering wheel. The DIC can display informationsuch as the trip odometer, fuel economy andpersonalization features. The DIC buttons are locatedon the steering wheel.
A. Trip Information: Press this button to display theodometer, trip odometer and the timer.
B. Fuel Information: Press this button to display thecurrent range, average fuel economy, instantfuel economy and engine oil life.
C. Personalization: Press this button to change personalsettings for some of the options on your vehicle.
D. Select: Press this button to reset certain functionsand turn off or acknowledge messages on the DIC.
3-48
DIC Operation and DisplaysThe DIC comes on when the ignition is on. After a shortdelay the DIC will display the current driver and theinformation that was last displayed before the enginewas turned off.
If a problem is detected, a warning message will appearon the display. Pressing the trip stem will acknowledgeany warning or service messages. Pressing any ofthe DIC steering wheel buttons (Trip Information, FuelInformation, Personalization or Select button) willalso acknowledge any warnings or service messages.
The DIC has different modes which can be accessed bypressing the four buttons on the DIC. These buttonsare trip information, fuel information, personalization andselect. The button functions are detailed following.
Trip InformationUse the trip information button to scroll through theodometer, TRIP A, TRIP B and TIMER.
OdometerPress the trip information button until the odometerappears on the display. This shows the total distancethe vehicle has been driven in either miles or kilometers.Pressing the reset stem located on the instrumentcluster with the vehicle off will also display the odometer.
Trip A and Trip BPress the trip information button until TRIP A or TRIP Bis displayed. This shows the current distance traveledsince the last reset for each trip odometer in either milesor kilometers. Both odometers can be used at thesame time.Each trip odometer can be reset to zero separately bypressing select while the desired trip odometer isdisplayed. You can also reset the trip odometers withthe reset stem on the cluster. If you press and hold thereset stem for four seconds, the display will show thedistance traveled since the last ignition cycle.
TimerThe DIC can be used as a stopwatch. Press the selectbutton while TIMER is displayed to start the timer.The display will show the amount of time that haspassed since the timer was last reset (not including timethe ignition is off). Time will continue to be counted aslong as the ignition is on, even if another display is beingshown on the DIC. The timer will record up to 99 hours,59 minutes and 59 seconds (99:59:59) after whichthe display will roll back to zero.To stop the counting of time, press the select buttonbriefly while TIMER is displayed.To reset the timer to zero, press and hold the selectbutton while TIMER is displayed.
3-49
Fuel InformationUse the fuel information button to scroll through therange, average fuel economy, instant fuel economy andthe GM Oil Life System.
Fuel RangePress the fuel information button until RANGE appearsto display the remaining distance you can drivewithout refueling. It’s based on fuel economy and thefuel remaining in the tank. The display will show LOW ifthe fuel level is low.
The fuel economy data used to determine fuel range isan average of recent driving conditions. As yourdriving conditions change, this data is gradually updated.Fuel range cannot be reset.
Average Fuel EconomyPress the fuel information button until AVG appears inthe display. Average fuel economy is how manymiles per gallon your vehicle is getting based on currentand past driving conditions.
Press and hold the select button while AVG. ECON isdisplayed to reset the average fuel economy. Averagefuel economy will then be calculated starting fromthat point. If the average fuel economy is not reset, itwill be continually updated each time you drive.
Instant Fuel EconomyPress the fuel information button until INST appears inthe display. Instant fuel economy is how many milesper gallon your vehicle is at the particular momentin time. The instant fuel economy cannot be reset.
GM Oil Life SystemPress the fuel information button until ENGINE OIL LIFEappears in the display. The GM Oil Life System showsan estimate of the oil’s remaining useful life. It will show100% when the system is reset after an oil change. Itwill alert you to change your oil on a schedule consistentwith your driving conditions.
Always reset the engine oil life monitor after an oilchange. To reset the monitor, press and hold the selectbutton while ENGINE OIL LIFE is displayed.
The oil change monitor does not measure how much oilyou have in your engine. So, be sure to check youroil level often. For more information, see Engine Oil onpage 5-15.
3-50
PersonalizationYou can program certain features to a preferred settingfor up to two people. Press the personalization buttonto scroll through the following personalization features.All of the personalization options may not be availableon your vehicle. Only the options available will bedisplayed on your DIC.
• ALARM WARNING TYPE
• AUTOMATIC LOCKING
• AUTOMATIC UNLOCKING
• SEAT POSITION RECALL
• PERIMETER LIGHTING
• REMOTE LOCK FEEDBACK
• REMOTE UNLOCK FEEDBACK
• HEADLAMPS ON AT EXIT
• MIRROR CURB VIEW ASSIST
• EASY EXIT DRIVER SEAT
• DISPLAY UNITS — U.S./MET
• DISPLAY LANGUAGE
The driver’s preferences are recalled by pressing theunlock button on the remote keyless entry transmitter orby pressing the appropriate memory button 1 or 2located on the driver’s door.
Alarm Warning TypePress the personalization button until ALARMWARNING TYPE appears in the display. To select yourpersonalization for alarm warning type, press theselect button while ALARM WARNING TYPE isdisplayed on the DIC. Pressing the select button willscroll through the following choices:
• ALARM WARNING: BOTH (default): If you chooseBOTH, the headlamps will flash and the horn willchirp when the alarm is active.
• ALARM WARNING: OFF: If you choose OFF, therewill be no alarm warning on activation.
• ALARM WARNING: HORN: If you choose HORN,the horn will chirp when the alarm is active.
• ALARM WARNING: LAMPS: If you choose LAMPS,the headlamps will flash when the alarm is active.
Choose one of the four settings and press thepersonalization button while it is displayed on the DIC toselect it and move on to the next feature. For moreinformation on alarm warning type, see ContentTheft-Deterrent on page 2-16.
3-51
Automatic LockingPress the select button while AUTOMATIC LOCKING isdisplayed on the DIC to scroll through the followingchoices:
• LOCK DOORS OUT OF PARK (default): If youchoose for the doors to lock out of park, thedoors will lock when the vehicle is shifted out ofPARK (P).
• LOCK DOORS MANUALLY: If you choose for thedoors to lock manually, the doors will not belocked automatically.
• LOCK DOORS WITH SPEED: If you choose for thedoors to lock with speed, the doors will lock whenthe vehicle speed is above 8 mph (13 km/h) forthree seconds.
Press the personalization button while your choice isdisplayed on the DIC to select it and move on to the nextfeature. For more information on automatic door lockssee Programmable Automatic Door Locks on page 2-10.
Automatic UnlockingPress the personalization button until AUTOMATICUNLOCKING appears in the display. To selectyour personalization for automatic unlocking, press theselect button while AUTOMATIC UNLOCKING isdisplayed on the DIC.
Pressing the select button will scroll through thefollowing choices:
• UNLOCK ALL IN PARK (default): If you choose forall the doors to unlock in PARK (P), all of the doorswill unlock when the vehicle is shifted intoPARK (P).
• UNLOCK ALL AT KEY OUT: If you choose for allthe doors to unlock at key out, all of the doors willunlock when the key is taken out of the ignition.
• UNLOCK DOORS MANUALLY: If you choose forthe doors to unlock manually, the doors will notbe unlocked automatically.
• UNLOCK DRIVER IN PARK: If you choose for thedriver’s door to unlock in PARK (P), the driver’sdoor will be unlocked when the vehicle is shifted intoPARK (P).
Choose one of the four settings and press thepersonalization button while it is displayed on the DIC toselect it and move on to the next feature. For moreinformation on automatic door locks see ProgrammableAutomatic Door Locks on page 2-10.
3-52
Seat Position RecallPress the personalization button until SEAT POSITIONRECALL appears in the display. To select yourpersonalization for seat position recall, press the selectbutton while SEAT POSITION RECALL is displayedon the DIC. Pressing the select button will scroll throughthe following choices:
• SEAT POSITION RECALL OFF (default): If youchoose seat recall off, the memory seat positionyou saved will only be recalled when the memorybutton 1or 2 is pressed.
• SEAT POSITION RECALL AT KEY IN: If youchoose seat recall at key in, the memory seatposition you saved will be recalled when you putthe key in the ignition.
• SEAT POSITION RECALL ON REMOTE: If youchoose seat recall on remote, the memory seatposition you saved will be recalled when you unlockthe vehicle with the remote keyless entrytransmitter.
Choose one of the three settings and press thepersonalization button while it is displayed on the DIC toselect it and move on to the next feature.
Perimeter LightingPress the personalization button until PERIMETERLIGHTING appears in the display. To select yourpersonalization for perimeter lighting, press the selectbutton while PERIMETER LIGHTING is displayed on theDIC. Pressing the select button will scroll through thefollowing choices:
• PERIMETER LIGHTING ON (default): If you choosefor perimeter lighting to be on, the headlamps andback-up lamps will come on for 40 seconds, if itis dark enough outside, when you unlock the vehiclewith the remote keyless entry transmitter.
• PERIMETER LIGHTING OFF: Choose one of thetwo modes and press the personalization buttonwhile it is displayed on the DIC to select it and moveon to the next feature.
3-53
Remote Lock FeedbackPress the personalization button until REMOTE LOCKFEEDBACK appears in the display. To select yourpersonalization for the feedback you will receive whenlocking the vehicle with the remote keyless entrytransmitter, press the select button while REMOTELOCK FEEDBACK is displayed on the DIC. Pressingthe select button will scroll through the following choices:
• LOCK FEEDBACK: BOTH (default): If you chooseboth, the parking lamps will flash each time youpress the button with the lock symbol on the remotekeyless entry transmitter and the horn will chirpthe second time you press the lock button.
• LOCK FEEDBACK: OFF: If you choose off, therewill be no feedback when locking the vehicle.
• LOCK FEEDBACK: HORN: If you choose horn, thehorn will chirp the second time you press the buttonwith the lock symbol on the remote keyless entrytransmitter.
• LOCK FEEDBACK: LAMPS: If you choose lamps,the parking lamps will flash each time you pressthe button with the lock symbol on the remotekeyless entry transmitter.
Choose one of the four settingss and press thepersonalization button while it is displayed on the DIC toselect it and move on to the next feature.
Remote Unlock FeedbackPress the personalization button until REMOTEUNLOCK FEEDBACK appears in the display. To selectyour personalization for the feedback you will receivewhen unlocking the vehicle with the remote keylessentry transmitter, press the select button while REMOTEUNLOCK FEEDBACK is displayed on the DIC.Pressing the select button will scroll through thefollowing choices:• UNLOCK FEEDBACK: LAMPS (default): If you
choose lamps, the parking lamps will flash eachtime you press the button with the unlock symbol onthe remote keyless entry transmitter.
• UNLOCK FEEDBACK: BOTH: If you choose both,the parking lamps will flash each time you pressthe button with the unlock symbol on the remotekeyless entry transmitter. The horn will chirpthe second time you press the unlock button.
• UNLOCK FEEDBACK: OFF: If you choose off,there will be no feedback when unlocking thevehicle.
• UNLOCK FEEDBACK: HORN: If you choose horn,the horn will chirp the second time you press thebutton with the unlock symbol on the remote keylessentry transmitter.
Choose one of the four settings and press thepersonalization button while it is displayed on the DIC toselect it and move on to the next feature.
3-54
Headlamps on at ExitPress the personalization button until HEADLAMPS ONAT EXIT appears in the display. To select yourpersonalization for how long the headlamps will stay onwhen you turn off the vehicle, press the select buttonwhile HEADLAMPS ON AT EXIT is displayed onthe DIC. Pressing the select button will scroll throughthe following choices:
• HEADLAMP DELAY: 10 SEC (default)
• HEADLAMP DELAY: 20 SEC
• HEADLAMP DELAY: 40 SEC
• HEADLAMP DELAY: 60 SEC
• HEADLAMP DELAY: 120 SEC
• HEADLAMP DELAY: 180 SEC
• HEADLAMP DELAY OFF
The amount of time you choose will be the amount oftime that the headlamps stay on after you turn offthe vehicle. If you choose off, the headlamps will turnoff as soon as you turn off the vehicle.
Choose one of the seven settings and press thepersonalization button while it is displayed on the DIC toselect it and move on to the next feature.
Mirror Curb View AssistPress the personalization button until MIRRORCURBVIEW ASSIST appears in the display. To selectyour personalization for curb view assist, press theselect button while MIRROR CURBVIEW ASSIST isdisplayed on the DIC. With the engine running, engagethe parking brake, press the brake pedal and placethe vehicle in REVERSE (R) gear. Adjust thepassenger’s side and then the driver’s side outsidemirrors to the desired tilt positions. These positions willbe stored in memory once the vehicle is shifted outof REVERSE (R). Press the select button to scrollthrough the following choices:
• CURB VIEW: OFF (default): If you choose off,neither outside mirror will be tilted down whenthe vehicle is shifted into REVERSE (R).
• CURB VIEW: PASSENGER: If you choosepassenger, the passenger’s outside mirror will betilted down when the vehicle is shifted intoREVERSE (R).
• CURB VIEW: DRIVER: If you choose driver, thedriver’s outside mirror will be tilted down whenthe vehicle is shifted into REVERSE (R).
• CURB VIEW: BOTH: If you choose both, thedriver’s and passenger’s outside mirror will be tilteddown when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE (R).
3-55
When the vehicle is placed in PARK (P) or in anyforward gear, the mirror(s) will return to normal drivingpositions, following a short delay.
Choose one of the four settings and press thepersonalization button while it is displayed on the DIC toselect it and move on to the next feature.
Easy Exit Driver SeatPress the personalization button until EASY EXITDRIVER SEAT appears in the display. To select yourpersonalization for seat position exit, press theselect button while EASY EXIT DRIVER SEAT isdisplayed on the DIC. Pressing the select button willscroll through the following choices:
• EASY EXIT SEAT: OFF (default): If you choose forthe easy exit seat feature to be on, the driver’s seatwill move to the exit position when the key isremoved from the ignition.
• EASY EXIT SEAT: ON: If you choose for thisfeature to be off, no seat exit recall will occur.
Choose one of the two settings and press thepersonalization button while it is displayed on the DIC toselect it and move on to the next feature.
Display Units (U.S./MET)Press the personalization button until DISPLAYUNITS — U.S./MET appears in the display. To selectEnglish or metric, press the select button while DISPLAYUNITS — U.S./MET is displayed on the DIC. Pressingthe select button will scroll through the following choices:
• UNITS: U.S. (ENGLISH): If you choose U.S.(English), all information will be displayed in U.S.units. For example, distance in miles and fueleconomy in miles per gallon (U.S. gallon) isdisplayed.
• UNITS: METRIC (KM/L): If you choose metricKM/L, all information will be displayed in metricunits. For example, distance in kilometers and fueleconomy in KM/L is displayed.
• UNITS: METRIC (L/100KM): If you choose metricL/100KM, all information will be displayed inmetric units. For example, distance in kilometersand fuel economy in L/100KM is displayed.
Choose one of the three settings and press thepersonalization button while it is displayed on the DIC toselect it and end out of the personalization options.
3-56
Display LanguageTo select your personalization for display language,press the select button while DISPLAY LANGUAGE isdisplayed on the DIC. Pressing the select buttonwill scroll through the available languages:
Choosing a language will display all of the informationon the DIC in the desired language.
If your vehicle is equipped with an Information Center,press and hold the trip stem while the odometer isdisplayed. While holding down the trip stem button, theInformation Center will begin to list the availablelanguages. The name of each language will bedisplayed in its native language (ENGLISH for English,FRANCAIS for French and ESPANOL for Spanish).When you see the language that you would like, releasethe trip stem. The Information Center will then displaythe information in the language you chose.
If you accidentaly choose a language you do not wantor understand, press and hold the trip information buttonand the personalization button at the same time. Aftera short time, the display will begin cycling throughthe available languages. Release the buttons when yousee a language you would like. This will also resetall of the current driver’s personalization features to theirfactory default settings.
For vehicles with redundant steering wheel controls, see“Personalization” under the DIC.
SelectThe select button is used to reset certain functions andturn off or acknowledge messages on the DIC display.The select button also toggles through the optionsavailable in each personalization menu. For example, thisbutton will reset the trip odometers, turn off the FUELLEVEL LOW message, and toggle through the languagesyou can select the DIC to display information in.
DIC Warnings and MessagesMessages are displayed on the DIC to notify the driverthat the status of the vehicle has changed and thatsome action may be needed by the driver to correct thecondition. More than one message may appear atone time. They will appear one behind the other. Somemessages may not require immediate action but youshould press the trip stem to acknowledge that youreceived the message and clear it from the display.Pressing any of the DIC steering wheel buttons(Trip Information, Fuel Information, Personalization orSelect button) will also acknowledge any warningsor service messages. Some messages cannot becleared from the display because they are more urgent.These messages require action before they can beremoved from the DIC display. The following arethe possible messages that can be displayed and someinformation about them.
3-57
ENGINE COOLANT HOT/ENGINEOVERHEATEDIf the cooling system temperature gets hot, this messagewill appear in the DIC and you will hear a chime.Refer to “Engine Overheating” for the proper course ofaction. This message will clear when the coolanttemperature drops to a safe operating temperature.
OIL PRESSURE LOW/STOP ENGINEIf low oil pressure levels occur, this message willbe displayed on the DIC. Stop the vehicle as soon assafely possible and do not operate it until the causeof the low oil pressure has been corrected. Check youroil as soon as possible and have your vehicleserviced.
BATTERY NOT CHARGINGIf the battery is not charging during operation, thismessage will appear on the DIC. Driving with thisproblem could drain your battery. Have the electricalsystem checked as soon as possible. Press the selectbutton to acknowledge this message and clear itfrom the DIC display.
SERVICE AIR BAGIf there is a problem with the air bag system thismessage will be displayed on the DIC. Have a qualifiedtechnician inspect the system for problems. Pressthe select button to acknowledge this message and clearit from the DIC display.
SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEMIf a problem occurs with the brake system this messagewill appear on the DIC. If this message appears, stopas soon as possible and turn off the vehicle. Restart thevehicle and check for the message on the DIC display.If the message is still displayed, or appears again whenyou begin driving, the brake system needs service.
TURN SIGNAL ONIf a turn signal is left on for 3/4 of a mile (1.2 km), thismessage will appear on the display and you willhear a chime. Move the turn signal/multifunction lever tothe off position. Press the select button to acknowledgethis message and clear it from the DIC display.
3-58
REAR ACCESS OPENIf the liftgate or liftglass is open while the ignition is inRUN, this message will appear on the DIC and you willhear a chime. Turn off the vehicle and check theliftgate and liftglass. Restart the vehicle and check forthe message on the DIC display. Press the select buttonto acknowledge this message and clear it from theDIC display.
FUEL LEVEL LOWIf the fuel level is low in the vehicle’s gas tank thismessage will appear on the DIC and you will hear achime. Refuel as soon as possible. Press the selectbutton to acknowledge this message and clear it fromthe DIC display.
CHECK WASHER FLUIDIf the washer fluid level is low, this message will appearon the DIC. Adding washer fluid will clear the message.Press the select button to acknowledge this messageand clear it from the DIC display.
ICE POSSIBLEIf the outside temperature reaches a level where icecould form on the roadway, this message may appearon the DIC. If the temperature rises to a safe level,the message will clear. Press the select button toacknowledge this message and clear it from the DICdisplay.
DRIVER DOOR AJARIf the driver’s door is not fully closed, this message willappear on the display and you will hear a chime.Stop and turn off the vehicle, check the door forobstacles, and close the door again. Check to see if themessage still appears on the DIC. Press the selectbutton to acknowledge this message and clear it fromthe DIC display.
PASSENGER DOOR AJARIf the passenger’s door is not fully closed, this messagewill appear on the display and you will hear a chime.Stop and turn off the vehicle, check the door forobstacles, and close the door again. Check to see if themessage still appears on the DIC. Press the selectbutton to acknowledge this message and clear it fromthe DIC display.
3-59
LEFT REAR DOOR AJARIf the driver’s side rear door is not fully closed thismessage will appear on the display and you will hear achime. Stop and turn off the vehicle, check the doorfor obstacles, and close the door again. Check to see ifthe message still appears on the DIC. Press theselect button tol acknowledge this message and clear itfrom the DIC display.
RIGHT REAR DOOR AJARIf the passenger’s side rear door is not fully closed thismessage will appear on the display and you willhear a chime. Stop and turn off the vehicle, check thedoor for obstacles, and close the door again. Checkto see if the message still appears on the DIC. Press theselect button to acknowledge this message and clearit from the DIC display.
RFA # BATTERY LOWIf a remote keyless entry transmitter battery is low, thismessage will appear on the DIC. The battery needsto be replaced in the transmitter. Press the select buttonto acknowledge this message and clear it from theDIC display.
CURB VIEW ACTIVATEDThe CURB VIEW ACTIVATED message is displayedwhen one of the outside rear view mirrors move into thecurb view position. Refer to “Outside AutomaticDimming Mirror with Curb View Assist” for moreinformation.
TIGHTEN FUEL CAPIf the vehicle’s fuel cap is not tightened properly, thismessage may appear on the DIC and a chime willsound. Fully reinstall the fuel cap. The diagnostic systemcan determine if the fuel cap has been left off orimproperly installed. A loose or missing fuel cap willallow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. TheDIC message will remain on until the message iscancelled with the return button on the steering wheel.The DIC message will also be cancelled if the ignitionis turned off.
The DIC message and the Service Engine Soon lightmay come on again during a second trip if the fuel cap isstill not tightened properly. See Malfunction IndicatorLamp on page 3-40 for more information.
3-60
Audio System(s)Notice: Before you add any sound equipment toyour vehicle – like a tape player, CB radio, mobiletelephone or two-way radio – be sure you canadd what you want. If you can, it’s very important todo it properly. Added sound equipment mayinterfere with the operation of your vehicle’s engine,radio or other systems, and even damage them.Your vehicle’s systems may interfere with theoperation of sound equipment that has been addedimproperly.
So, before adding sound equipment, check withyour dealer and be sure to check federal rulescovering mobile radio and telephone units.
Your audio system has been designed to operate easilyand to give years of listening pleasure. You will getthe most enjoyment out of it if you acquaint yourself withit first. Figure out which radio you have in your vehicle,find out what your audio system can do and how tooperate all of its controls to be sure you’re getting themost out of the advanced engineering that went into it.
Your vehicle has a feature called Retained AccessoryPower (RAP). With RAP, you can play your audiosystem even after the ignition is turned off. See“Retained Accessory Power (RAP)” under IgnitionPositions on page 2-18.
Setting the TimeYour radio may have a button marked with an H or HRto represent hours and an M or MN to representminutes.
Press and hold the hour button until the correct hourappears on the display. AM or PM will appear onthe display. Press and hold the minute button until thecorrect minute appears on the display. The time may beset with the ignition on or off.
To synchronize the time with an FM station broadcastingRadio Data System (RDS) information, press andhold the hour and minute buttons at the same time fortwo seconds until UPDATED and the clock symbolappear on the display. If the time is not available fromthe station, NO UPDAT will appear on the display.
RDS time is broadcast once a minute. Once you havetuned to an RDS broadcast station, it may take afew minutes for your time to update.
3-61
Radio with CD
If your vehicle is equipped with the Bose® audiosystem, your vehicle will have six Bose® amplifiedspeakers.
Radio Data System (RDS)Your audio system is equipped with a Radio DataSystem (RDS). RDS features are available for use onlyon FM stations that broadcast RDS information.
With RDS, your radio can do the following:
• Seek to stations broadcasting the selected type ofprogramming
• Receive announcements concerning local andnational emergencies
• Display messages from radio stations
• Seek to stations with traffic announcements
This system relies upon receiving specific informationfrom these stations and will only work when theinformation is available. In rare cases, a radio stationmay broadcast incorrect information that will causethe radio features to work improperly. If this happens,contact the radio station.
While you are tuned to an RDS station, the stationname or the call letters will appear on the display insteadof the frequency. RDS stations may also provide thetime of day, a program type (PTY) for currentprogramming, and the name of the program beingbroadcast.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service(48 Contiguous US States)XM™ is a continental U.S. based satellite radio servicethat offers 100 coast to coast channels includingmusic, news, sports, talk, and children’s programming.XM™ provides digital quality audio and text information,including song title and artist name. A service fee isrequired in order to receive the XM™ service. For moreinformation, contact XM™ at www.xmradio.com orcall 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
Base Radio Shown, Bose ® Similar
3-62
Playing the Radio
PWR (Power): Press this knob to turn the system onand off.
VOL (Volume): Turn this knob to increase or todecrease volume.
AUTO VOL (Automatic Volume): With automaticvolume, your audio system will adjust automatically tomake up for road and wind noise as you drive byincreasing the volume as vehicle speed increases.
Set the volume at the desired level. Press this button toselect LOW, MEDIUM, or HIGH. AVOL will appearon the display. Each higher setting will provide morevolume compensation as vehicle speed increases.To turn automatic volume off, press this button untilAVOL OFF appears on the display.
DISPL (Display): Press this knob to switch the displaybetween the radio station frequency and the time.Time display is available with the ignition off.
For RDS, press the DISPL knob to change whatappears on the display while using RDS. The displayoptions are station name, RDS station frequency,PTY and the name of the program (if available).
For XM™ (48 contiguous US states, if equipped), pressthe DISPL knob while in XM mode to retrieve fourdifferent categories of information related to the currentsong or channel: Artist, Song Title, Category or PTY,Channel Number/Channel Name.
To change the default on the display, press the DISPLknob until you see the display you want, then holdthe knob for two seconds. The radio will produce onebeep and the selected display will now be the default.
Finding a Station
BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1, FM2,AM, or XM1 or XM2 (48 contiguous US states, ifequipped). The display will show your selection.
TUNE: Turn this knob to select radio stations.
q SEEKr: Press the right or the left arrow to go tothe next or to the previous station and stay there.
The radio will seek only to stations that are in theselected band and only to those with a strong signal.
q SCANr: Press and hold either arrow formore than two seconds. SCAN will appear on thedisplay and you will hear a beep. The radio will go to astation, play for a few seconds, then go on to thenext station. Press either arrow again to stop scanning.
3-63
To scan preset stations, press and hold either arrow formore than four seconds. PSCN will appear on thedisplay and you will hear two beeps. The radio will go tothe first preset station, play for a few seconds, thengo on to the next preset station. Press either arrow againor one of the pushbuttons to stop scanning.
The radio will scan only to stations that are in theselected band and only to those with a strong signal.
Setting Preset StationsThe six numbered pushbuttons let you return to yourfavorite stations. You can set up to 30 stations (six FM1,six FM2, and six AM, six XM1 and six XM2 (48contiguous US states, if equipped), by performing thefollowing steps:
1. Turn the radio on.2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, AM, or XM1
or XM2.3. Tune in the desired station.4. Press AUTO EQ to select the equalization.5. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons. The radio will produce one beep.Whenever you press that numbered pushbutton, thestation you set will return and the equalizationthat you selected will be automatically stored forthat pushbutton.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
AUDIO: Push and release the AUDIO knob until BASSor TREB appears on the display. Turn the knob toincrease or to decrease. The display will show the bassor treble level. If a station is weak or noisy, you maywant to decrease the treble.
To adjust the bass and treble to the middle position,push and hold the AUDIO knob. The radio will produceone beep and adjust the display level to the middleposition.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middleposition, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no toneor speaker control is displayed. ALL will appear onthe display, you will hear a beep and the display levelwill be adjusted to the middle position.
AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press this buttonto select customized equalization settings designedfor country/western, jazz, talk, pop, rock, and classical.Selecting CUSTOM or changing bass or treble,returns the EQ to the manual bass and treble settings.
The radio will save separate AUTO EQ settings foreach preset and source.
If you radio is equipped with the Bose audio system,your equalization settings are either CUSTOM or TALK.
3-64
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
AUDIO: To adjust the balance to the right and theleft speakers, push and release the AUDIO knob untilBAL appears on the display. Turn the knob to move thesound toward the right or the left speakers.
To adjust the fade to the front and the rear speakers,push and release the AUDIO knob until FADE appearson the display. Turn the knob to move the soundtoward the front or the rear speakers.
To adjust the balance and fade to the middle position,push the AUDIO knob then push it again and hold it untilthe radio produces one beep. The balance and fadewill be adjusted to the middle position and the displaywill show the speaker balance.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middleposition, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no toneor speaker control is displayed. ALL will appear onthe display, you will hear a beep and the display levelwill be adjusted to the middle position.
Finding a Program Type (PTY) Station(RDS and XM™)To select and find a desired PTY perform the following:
1. Turn the P-TYPE knob to activate program typeselect mode. TYPE and a PTY will appear on thedisplay.
2. Turn the P-TYPE knob to select a PTY.
3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press theSEEK TYPE button or one of the SEEK arrowsto take you to the PTY’s first station.
4. If you want to go to another station within that PTYand the PTY is displayed, press the SEEK TYPEbutton once. If the PTY is not displayed, pressthe SEEK TYPE button twice to display the PTY andthen to go to another station.
5. Press the P-TYPE knob to exit program typeselect mode.If PTY times out and is no longer on the display, goback to Step 1.
If both PTY and TRAF are on, the radio will search forstations with the selected PTY and trafficannouncements.
If the radio cannot find the desired program type, NONEwill appear on the display and the radio will return tothe last station you were listening to.
SCAN: You can scan the stations within a PTY byperforming the following:
1. Turn the P-TYPE knob to activate program typeselect mode. TYPE and a PTY will appear on thedisplay.
2. Turn the P-TYPE knob to select a PTY.
3-65
3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press eitherSCAN arrow, and the radio will begin scanningthe stations in the PTY.
4. Press either SCAN arrow to stop scanning.
If both PTY and TRAF are on, the radio will scan forstations with the selected PTY and trafficannouncements.
BAND (Alternate Frequency): Alternate frequencyallows the radio to switch to a stronger station with thesame program type. To turn alternate frequency on,press and hold BAND for two seconds. AF ON willappear on the display. The radio may switch to strongerstations.
To turn alternate frequency off, press and hold BANDagain for two seconds. AF OFF will appear on thedisplay. The radio will not switch to other stations.
This function does not apply for XM™ Satellite RadioService.
Setting Preset PTYs (RDS Only)The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to yourfavorite PTYs. These buttons have factory PTY presets.You can set up to 12 PTYs (six FM1 and six FM2) byperforming the following steps:
1. Press BAND to select FM1 or FM2.
2. Turn the P-TYPE knob to activate program typeselect mode. TYPE and a PTY will appear on thedisplay.
3. Turn the P-TYPE knob to select a PTY.
4. Press and hold one of the six numberedpushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever youpress that numbered pushbutton, the PTY youset will return.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
RDS Messages
ALERT!: Alert warns of local or national emergencies.When an alert announcement comes on the currentradio station, ALERT! will appear on the display. You willhear the announcement, even if the volume is mutedor a CD is playing. If a CD is playing, play will stopduring the announcement. You will not be able to turnoff alert announcements.
ALERT! will not be affected by tests of the emergencybroadcast system. This feature is not supported byall RDS stations.
INFO (Information): If the current station has amessage, the information symbol will appear on thedisplay. Press this button to see the message. Themessage may display the artist, song title, call in phonenumbers, etc.
3-66
If the whole message is not displayed, parts of themessage will appear every three seconds. To scrollthrough the message at your own speed, pressthe INFO button repeatedly. A new group of words willappear on the display with each press. Once thecomplete message has been displayed, the informationsymbol will disappear from the display until anothernew message is received. The old message canbe displayed by pressing the INFO button. You canview an old message until a new message is receivedor a different station is tuned to.
When a message is not available from a station,NO INFO will appear on the display.
TRAF (Traffic): If TRAF appears on the display, thetuned station broadcasts traffic announcementsand when a traffic announcement comes on the tunedradio station you will hear it.
If the current tuned station does not broadcast trafficannouncements, press this button and the radiowill seek to a station that does. When the radio finds astation that broadcasts traffic announcements, it willstop and TRAF will be displayed. When a trafficannouncement comes on the tuned radio station youwill hear it. If no station is found, NO TRAFFIC willappear on the display.
If TRAF is on the display you can press the TRAFbutton to turn off the traffic announcements.
Your radio will play the traffic announcement even if thevolume is low. Your radio will interrupt the play of aCD if the last tuned station broadcasts trafficannouncements.
This function does not apply to XM™ Satellite RadioService.
Radio Messages
CAL ERR (Calibration Error): Your audio system hasbeen calibrated for your vehicle from the factory. IfCAL ERR appears on the display, it means that yourradio has not been configured properly for the vehicleand must be returned to the dealer for service.
LOCKED: This message is displayed when theTHEFTLOCK® system has locked up. You must returnto the dealer for service.
3-67
XM™ Radio MessagesRadio Display
Message Condition Action Required
XL (Explicit LanguageChannels)
XL on the radio display,after the channel name,indicates content withexplicit language.
These channels, or any others, can be blocked at acustomer’s request, by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
Updating Updating encryptioncode
The encryption code in your receiver is being updated, andno action is required. This process should take no longerthan 30 seconds.
No Signal Loss of signal Your system is functioning correctly, but you are in alocation that is blocking the XM signal. When you move intoan open area, the signal should return.
Loading XM Acquiring channel audio(after 4 second delay)
Your radio system is acquiring and processing audio andtext data. No action is needed. This message shoulddisappear shortly.
CH Off Air Channel not in service This channel is not currently in service. Tune to anotherchannel.
CH Unavail Channel no longeravailable
This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned.Tune to another station. If this station was one of yourpresets, you may need to choose another station for thatpreset button.
No Info Artist Name/Feature notavailable
No artist information is available at this time on this channel.Your system is working properly.
3-68
XM™ Radio Messages (cont’d)Radio Display
Message Condition Action Required
No Info Song/Program Title notavailable
No song title information is available at this time on thischannel. Your system is working properly.
No Info Category Name notavailable
No category information is available at this time on thischannel. Your system is working properly.
No Info No Text/Informationalmessage available
No text or informational messages are available at this timeon this channel. Your system is working properly.
Not Found No channel available forthe chosen category
There are no channels available for the category youselected. Your system is working properly.
XM Locked Theft lock active The XM receiver in your vehicle may have previously beenin another vehicle. For security purposes, XM receiverscannot be swapped between vehicles. If you receive thismessage after having your vehicle serviced, check with theservicing facility.
Radio ID Radio ID label(channel 0)
If you tune to channel 0, you will see this messagealternating with your XM Radio 8 digit radio ID label. Thislabel is needed to activate your service.
Unknown Radio ID not known(should only be ifhardware failure)
If you receive this message when you tune to channel 0, youmay have a receiver fault. Consult with your dealer.
Chk XMRcvr Hardware failure If this message does not clear within a short period of time,your receiver may have a fault. Consult with your retaillocation.
3-69
Playing a CDInsert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. Theplayer will pull it in and the CD should begin playing. TheCD symbol will appear on the display. If you want toinsert a CD with the ignition off, first press the ejectbutton or the DISPL knob.
If you turn off the ignition or radio with the CD in theplayer, it will stay in the player. When you turn onthe ignition or the radio, the CD will start playing, whereit stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.
As each new track starts to play, the track number willappear on the display.
The CD player can play the smaller 8 cm single CDswith an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the smaller CDsare loaded in the same manner.
If playing a CD-R the sound quality may be reduceddue to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the qualityof the music that has been recorded, and the way theCD-R has been handled. You may experience anincrease in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks, and/ordifficulty in loading and ejecting. If these problems occurtry a known good CD.
Do not add paper labels to CDs, they could get caughtin the CD player.
Do not play 3 inch CDs without a standard adapter CD.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”later in this section.
1 PREV (Previous): Press this pushbutton to go to thecurrent track if it has been playing for more thaneight seconds. TRACK and the track number will appearon the display. If you hold this pushbutton or press itmore than once, the player will continue movingbackward through the CD.
2 NEXT: Press this pushbutton to go to the next track.TRACK and the track number will appear on thedisplay. If you hold this pushbutton or press it more thanonce, the player will continue moving forward throughthe CD.
3-70
3 REV (Reverse): Press and hold this pushbutton toreverse quickly within a track. Press and hold thispushbutton for less than two seconds to reverse at sixtimes the normal playing speed. Press and hold itfor more than two seconds to reverse at 17 times thenormal playing speed. Release it to play the passage.ET and the elapsed time of the track will appear onthe display.
4 FWD (Forward): Press and hold this pushbutton toadvance quickly within a track. Press and hold thispushbutton for less than two seconds to advance at sixtimes the normal playing speed. Press and hold it formore than two seconds to advance at 17 times thenormal playing speed. Release it to play the passage.ET and the elapsed time of the track will appear onthe display.
6 RDM (Random): Press this pushbutton to hear thetracks in random, rather than sequential, order. RDM ONwill appear on the display. RDM T and the tracknumber will appear on the display when each trackstarts to play. Press this pushbutton again to turnoff random play. RDM OFF will appear on the display.
q SEEKr: Press the left arrow to go to the startof the current or to the previous track. Press theright arrow to go to the start of the next track. If youhold either arrow or press it more than once, the playerwill continue moving backward or forward throughthe CD.
q SCANr: To scan the CD, press and hold eitherSCAN arrow for more than two seconds until SCANappears on the display and you hear a beep. Use thisfeature to listen to 10 seconds of each track of theCD. Press either SCAN arrow again, to stop scanning.
DISPL (Display): Press this knob to see how longthe current track has been playing. ET and the elapsedtime of the track will appear on the display. Tochange the default on the display (track or elapsedtime), press this knob until you see the display you want,then hold the knob for two seconds. The radio willproduce one beep and the selected display will now bethe default.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when aCD is playing. The inactive CD will remain safelyinside the radio for future listening
CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to play a CDwhen listening to the radio.
Z (Eject): Press this button to stop a CD when it isplaying or to eject a CD when it is not playing. Ejectmay be activated with either the ignition or radio off. CDsmay be loaded with the radio and ignition off if thisbutton is pressed first.
3-71
CD MessagesIf the CD comes out, it could be for one of the followingreasons:
• It is very hot. When the temperature returns tonormal, the CD should play.
• You are driving on a very rough road. When theroad becomes smoother, the CD should play.
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour andtry again.
• There may have been a problem while burningthe CD.
• The label may be caught in the CD player.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,try a known good CD.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot becorrected, contact your dealer. If your radio displays anerror message, write it down and provide it to yourdealer when reporting the problem.
Radio with Cassette and CD
If your vehicle is equipped with the Bose® audiosystem, your vehicle will have six Bose® amplifiedspeakers.
Radio Data System (RDS)Your audio system is equipped with a Radio DataSystem (RDS). RDS features are available for use onlyon FM stations that broadcast RDS information.
Base Radio Shown, Bose ® Similar
3-72
With RDS, your radio can do the following:
• Seek to stations broadcasting the selected type ofprogramming
• Receive announcements concerning local andnational emergencies
• Display messages from radio stations
• Seek to stations with traffic announcements
This system relies upon receiving specific informationfrom these stations and will only work when theinformation is available. In rare cases, a radio stationmay broadcast incorrect information that will causethe radio features to work improperly. If this happens,contact the radio station.
While you are tuned to an RDS station, the stationname or the call letters will appear on the display insteadof the frequency. RDS stations may also provide thetime of day, a program type (PTY) for currentprogramming, and the name of the program beingbroadcast.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service(48 Contiguous US States)XM™ is a continental U.S. based satellite radio servicethat offers 100 coast to coast channels includingmusic, news, sports, talk, and children’s programming.XM™ provides digital quality audio and text information,including song title and artist name. A service fee isrequired in order to receive the XM™ service. For moreinformation, contact XM™ at www.xmradio.com orcall 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
Playing the Radio
PWR (Power): Press this knob to turn the system onand off.
VOL (Volume): Turn this knob to increase or todecrease volume.
AUTO VOL (Automatic Volume): With automaticvolume, your audio system will adjust automatically tomake up for road and wind noise as you drive byincreasing the volume as vehicle speed increases.
3-73
Set the volume at the desired level. Press this button toselect LOW, MEDIUM, or HIGH. AVOL will appearon the display. Each higher setting will provide morevolume compensation as vehicle speed increases.To turn automatic volume off, press this button untilAVOL OFF appears on the display.
DISPL (Display): Press this knob to switch the displaybetween the radio station frequency and the time.Time display is available with the ignition turned off.
For RDS, press the DISPL knob to change what appearson the display while using RDS. The display optionsare station name, RDS station frequency, PTY, and thename of the program (if available).
For XM™ (48 contiguous US states, if equipped), pressthe DISPL knob while in XM mode to retrieve fourdifferent categories of information related to the currentsong or channel: Artist, Song Title, Category or PTY,Channel Number/Channel Name.
To change the default on the display, press the DISPLknob until you see the display you want, then holdthe knob for two seconds. The radio will produce onebeep and the selected display will now be the default.
Finding a Station
BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1, FM2,AM, or XM1 or XM2 (48 contiguous US states, ifequipped). The display will show your selection.
TUNE: Turn this knob to select radio stations.
q SEEKr: Press the right or the left arrow to go tothe next or to the previous station and stay there.
The radio will seek only to stations that are in theselected band and only to those with a strong signal.
q SCANr: Press and hold either arrow formore than two seconds. SCAN will appear on thedisplay and you will hear a beep. The radio will go to astation, play for a few seconds, then go on to thenext station. Press either arrow again to stop scanning.
To scan preset stations, press and hold either arrowfor more than four seconds. PSCN will appear onthe display and you will hear two beeps. The radio willgo to the first preset station, play for a few seconds,then go on to the next preset station. Press either arrowagain or one of the pushbuttons to stop scanning.
The radio will scan only to stations that are in theselected band and only to those with a strong signal.
3-74
Setting Preset StationsThe six numbered pushbuttons let you return to yourfavorite stations. You can set up to 30 stations (six FM1,six FM2, and six AM, or six XM1 and six XM2 (48contiguous US states, if equipped), by performing thefollowing steps:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, AM, or XM1or XM2.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press AUTO EQ to select the equalization.
5. Press and hold one of the six numberedpushbuttons. The radio will produce one beep.Whenever you press that numbered pushbutton, thestation you set will return and the equalizationthat you selected will be automatically stored forthat pushbutton.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
AUDIO: Push and release the AUDIO knob until BASSor TREB appears on the display. Turn the knob toincrease or to decrease. The display will show the bassor treble level. If a station is weak or noisy, you maywant to decrease the treble.
To adjust the bass and treble to the middle position,push and hold the AUDIO knob. The radio will produceone beep and adjust the display level to the middleposition.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middleposition, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no toneor speaker control is displayed. ALL will appear onthe display, you will hear a beep and the display levelwill be adjusted to the middle position.
AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press this buttonto select customized equalization settings designedfor country/western, jazz, talk, pop, rock, and classical.Selecting CUSTOM or changing bass or treble,returns the EQ to the manual bass and treble settings.
The radio will save separate AUTO EQ settings foreach preset and source.
If you radio is equipped with the Bose audio system,your equalization settings are either CUSTOM or TALK.
3-75
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
AUDIO: To adjust the balance between the rightand the left speakers, push and release the AUDIOknob until BAL appears on the display. Turn the knob tomove the sound toward the right or the left speakers.
To adjust the fade between the front and the rearspeakers, push and release the AUDIO knob until FADEappears on the display. Turn the knob to move thesound toward the front or the rear speakers.
To adjust the balance and fade to the middle position,push the AUDIO knob then push it again and hold it untilthe radio produces one beep. The balance and fadewill be adjusted to the middle position and the displaywill show the speaker balance.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middleposition, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no toneor speaker control is displayed. ALL will appear onthe display, you will hear a beep and the display levelwill be adjusted to the middle position.
Finding a Program Type (PTY) Station(RDS and XM™)To select and find a desired PTY perform the following:
1. Turn the P-TYPE knob to activate program typeselect mode. TYPE and a PTY will appear on thedisplay.
2. Turn the P-TYPE knob to select a PTY.
3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press theSEEK TYPE button or one of the SEEK arrowsto take you to the PTY’s first station.
4. If you want to go to another station within that PTYand the PTY is displayed, press the SEEK TYPEbutton once. If the PTY is not displayed, pressthe SEEK TYPE button twice to display the PTY andthen to go to another station.
5. Press the P-TYPE knob to exit program typeselect mode.If PTY times out and is no longer on the display, goback to Step 1.
If both PTY and TRAF are on, the radio will search forstations with the selected PTY and trafficannouncements.
If the radio cannot find the desired program type, NONEwill appear on the display and the radio will return tothe last station you were listening to.
SCAN: You can scan the stations within a PTY byperforming the following:
1. Turn the P-TYPE knob to activate program typeselect mode. TYPE and a PTY will appear on thedisplay.
2. Turn the P-TYPE knob to select a PTY.
3-76
3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press eitherSCAN arrow, and the radio will begin scanningthe stations in the PTY.
4. Press either SCAN arrow to stop scanning.
If both PTY and TRAF are on, the radio will scan forstations with the selected PTY and trafficannouncements.
BAND (Alternate Frequency): Alternate frequencyallows the radio to switch to a stronger station with thesame program type. To turn alternate frequency on,press and hold BAND for two seconds. AF ON willappear on the display. The radio may switch to strongerstations.
To turn alternate frequency off, press and hold BANDagain for two seconds. AF OFF will appear on thedisplay. The radio will not switch to other stations.
This function does not apply for XM™ Satellite RadioService.
Setting Preset PTYs (RDS Only)The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to yourfavorite PTYs. These buttons have factory PTY presets.You can set up to 12 PTYs (six FM1 and six FM2) byperforming the following steps:
1. Press BAND to select FM1 or FM2.
2. Turn the P-TYPE knob to activate program typeselect mode. TYPE and a PTY will appear on thedisplay.
3. Turn the P-TYPE knob to select a PTY.
4. Press and hold one of the six numberedpushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever youpress that numbered pushbutton, the PTY youset will return.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
RDS Messages
ALERT!: Alert warns of local or national emergencies.When an alert announcement comes on the currentradio station, ALERT! will appear on the display. You willhear the announcement, even if the volume is mutedor a cassette tape or CD is playing. If a cassette tape orCD is playing, play will stop during the announcement.You will not be able to turn off alert announcements.
ALERT! will not be affected by tests of the emergencybroadcast system. This feature is not supported byall RDS stations.
INFO (Information): If the current station has amessage, the information symbol will appear on thedisplay. Press this button to see the message. Themessage may display the artist, song title, call in phonenumbers, etc.
3-77
If the whole message is not displayed, parts of themessage will appear every three seconds. To scrollthrough the message at your own speed, pressthe INFO button repeatedly. A new group of words willappear on the display with each press. Once thecomplete message has been displayed, the informationsymbol will disappear from the display until anothernew message is received. The old message canbe displayed by pressing the INFO button. You canview an old message until a new message is receivedor a different station is tuned to.
When a message is not available from a station, NOINFO will appear on the display.
TRAF (Traffic): If TRAF appears on the display, thetuned station broadcasts traffic announcementsand when a traffic announcement comes on the tunedradio station you will hear it.
If the current tuned station does not broadcast trafficannouncements, press this button and the radiowill seek to a station that does. When the radio finds astation that broadcasts traffic announcements, it willstop and TRAF will be displayed. When a trafficannouncement comes on the tuned radio station youwill hear it. If no station is found, NO TRAFFIC willappear on the display.
If TRAF is on the display you can press the TRAFbutton to turn off the traffic announcements.
Your radio will play the traffic announcement even if thevolume is low. Your radio will interrupt the play of acassette tape or CD if the last tuned station broadcaststraffic announcements.
This function does not apply to XM™ Satellite RadioService.
Radio Messages
CAL ERR (Calibration Error): Your audio system hasbeen calibrated for your vehicle from the factory. IfCAL ERR appears on the display, it means that yourradio has not been configured properly for the vehicleand must be returned to the dealer for service.
LOCKED: This message is displayed when theTHEFTLOCK® system has locked up. You must returnto the dealer for service.
3-78
XM™ Radio MessagesRadio Display
Message Condition Action Required
XL (Explicit LanguageChannels)
XL on the radio display,after the channel name,indicates content withexplicit language.
These channels, or any others, can be blocked at acustomer’s request, by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
Updating Updating encryptioncode
The encryption code in your receiver is being updated, andno action is required. This process should take no longerthan 30 seconds.
No Signal Loss of signal Your system is functioning correctly, but you are in alocation that is blocking the XM signal. When you move intoan open area, the signal should return.
Loading XM Acquiring channel audio(after 4 second delay)
Your radio system is acquiring and processing audio andtext data. No action is needed. This message shoulddisappear shortly.
CH Off Air Channel not in service This channel is not currently in service. Tune to anotherchannel.
CH Unavail Channel no longeravailable
This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned.Tune to another station. If this station was one of yourpresets, you may need to choose another station for thatpreset button.
No Info Artist Name/Feature notavailable
No artist information is available at this time on this channel.Your system is working properly.
3-79
XM™ Radio Messages (cont’d)Radio Display
Message Condition Action Required
No Info Song/Program Title notavailable
No song title information is available at this time on thischannel. Your system is working properly.
No Info Category Name notavailable
No category information is available at this time on thischannel. Your system is working properly.
No Info No Text/Informationalmessage available
No text or informational messages are available at this timeon this channel. Your system is working properly.
Not Found No channel available forthe chosen category
There are no channels available for the category youselected. Your system is working properly.
XM Locked Theft lock active The XM receiver in your vehicle may have previously beenin another vehicle. For security purposes, XM receiverscannot be swapped between vehicles. If you receive thismessage after having your vehicle serviced, check with theservicing facility.
Radio ID Radio ID label(channel 0)
If you tune to channel 0, you will see this messagealternating with your XM Radio 8 digit radio ID label. Thislabel is needed to activate your service.
Unknown Radio ID not known(should only be ifhardware failure)
If you receive this message when you tune to channel 0,you may have a receiver fault. Consult with your dealer.
Chk XMRcvr Hardware failure If this message does not clear within a short period of time,your receiver may have a fault. Consult with your retaillocation.
3-80
Playing a Cassette TapeYour tape player is built to work best with tapes that areup to 30 to 45 minutes long on each side. Tapeslonger than that are so thin they may not work well inthis player. The longer side with the tape visible shouldface to the right. If the ignition is on, but the radio isoff, the tape can be inserted and will begin playing. Atape symbol will appear on the display whenever a tapeis inserted. If you hear nothing, or hear a garbledsound, the tape may not be in squarely. Press the ejectbutton to remove the tape and start over.
While the tape is playing, use the VOL, AUDIO, andSEEK controls just as you do for the radio. TAPEwill appear on the display and an arrow showing whichside of the tape is playing. The tape player automaticallybegins playing the other side when it reaches theend of the tape.
If you want to insert a tape while the ignition is off, firstpress the eject button or the DISPL knob. Cassettetape adapter kits for portable CD players will work inyour cassette tape player.
Your tape bias is set automatically when a metal orchrome tape is inserted.
If an error appears on the display, see “Cassette TapeMessages” later in this section.
1 PREV (Previous): Your tape must have at least threeseconds of silence between each selection for previousto work. Press this pushbutton to go to the previousselection on the tape if the current selection has beenplaying for less than three seconds. If pressed when thecurrent selection has been playing from 3 to 13 seconds,it will go to the beginning of the previous selection orthe beginning of the current selection, depending uponthe position on the tape. If pressed when the currentselection has been playing for more than 13 seconds, itwill go to the beginning of the current selection.
SEEK and a negative number will appear on the displaywhile the cassette player is in the previous mode.Pressing this pushbutton multiple times will increase thenumber of selections to be searched back, up to -9.
2 NEXT: Your tape must have at least three seconds ofsilence between each selection for next to work.Press this pushbutton to go to the next selection on thetape. If you press the pushbutton more than once,the player will continue moving forward through the tape.SEEK and a positive number will appear on thedisplay.
3-81
3 REV (Reverse): Press this pushbutton to reverse thetape rapidly. Press this pushbutton again to return toplaying speed. The radio will play while the tapereverses. The station frequency and REV will appear onthe display. You may select stations during reverseoperation by using TUNE and SEEK.
4 FWD (Forward): Press this pushbutton to advancethe tape rapidly. Press this pushbutton again to return toplaying speed. The radio will play while the tapeadvances. The station frequency and FWD will appearon the display. You may select stations duringforward operation by using TUNE and SEEK.
5 SIDE: Press this pushbutton to play the other side ofthe tape.
q SEEKr: The right arrow is the same as theNEXT pushbutton, and the left arrow is the same as thePREV pushbutton. If you hole either arrow or press itmore than once, the player will continue moving forwardor backward through the tape. SEEK and a positiveor negative number will appear on the display.
q SCANr: To scan the tape, press and hold eitherSCAN arrow for more than two seconds until SCANappears on the display and you hear a beep. Use thisfeature to listen to 10 seconds of each selection onthe current side of the tape. Press either SCAN arrowagain, to stop scanning. Your tape must have atleast three seconds of silence between each selectionfor scan to work.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when acassette tape or CD is playing. The inactive tape or CDwill remain safely inside the radio for future listening.
TAPE DISC: Press this button to play a cassette tape orCD when listening to the radio. The inactive tape orCD will remain safely inside the radio for future listening.
Z (Eject): Press this button to stop a tape when it isplaying or to eject a tape when it is not playing. Eject maybe activated with the radio off. Cassette tapes may beloaded with the radio off if this button is pressed first.
Cassette Tape Messages
CHK TAPE (Check Tape): If this message appears onthe display, the tape will not play because of one ofthe following errors:
• The tape is tight and the player cannot turn thetape hubs. Remove the tape. Hold the tape withthe open end down and try to turn the righthub counterclockwise with a pencil. Turn the tapeover and repeat. If the hubs do not turn easily, yourtape may be damaged and should not be used inthe player. Try a new tape to make sure your playeris working properly.
• The tape is broken. Try a new tape.
• The tape is wrapped around the tape head. Attemptto get the cassette out. Try a new tape.
3-82
CLEAN: If this message appears on the display, thecassette tape player needs to be cleaned. It will still playtapes, but you should clean it as soon as possible toprevent damage to the tapes and player. See Careof Your Cassette Tape Player on page 3-113.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot becorrected, contact your dealer. If your radio displays anerror message, write it down and provide it to yourdealer when reporting the problem.
CD Adapter KitsIt is possible to use a portable CD player with yourcassette tape player after activating the bypass featureon your tape player.
To activate the bypass feature, perform the followingsteps:
1. Turn the ignition on.
2. Turn the radio off.
3. Press and hold the TAPE DISC button for fiveseconds. READY will appear on the display andthe tape symbol on the display will flash, indicatingthe feature is active.
4. Insert the adapter into the cassette tape slot. It willpower up the radio and begin playing.
The override feature will remain active until the ejectbutton is pressed.
Playing a CDInsert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. Theplayer will pull it in and the CD should begin playing. TheCD symbol will appear on the display. If you want toinsert a CD with the ignition off, first press the ejectbutton or the DISPL knob.If you turn off the ignition or radio with the CD in theplayer, it will stay in the player. When you turn onthe ignition or the radio, the CD will start playing, whereit stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.As each new track starts to play, the track number willappear on the display.The CD player can play the smaller 8 cm single CDswith an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the smaller CDsare loaded in the same manner.If playing a CD-R the sound quality may be reduceddue to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the qualityof the music that has been recorded, and the way theCD-R has been handled. You may experience anincrease in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks, and/ordifficulty in loading and ejecting. If these problems occurtry a known good CD.Do not add paper labels to CDs, they could get caughtin the CD player.Do not play 3 inch CDs without a standard adapter CD.If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”later in this section.
3-83
1 PREV (Previous): Press this pushbutton to go to thecurrent track if it has been playing for more thaneight seconds. TRACK and the track number will appearon the display. If you hold this pushbutton or press itmore than once, the player will continue movingbackward through the CD.
2 NEXT: Press this pushbutton to go to the next track.TRACK and the track number will appear on thedisplay. If you hold this pushbutton or press it more thanonce, the player will continue moving forward throughthe CD.
3 REV (Reverse): Press and hold this pushbutton toreverse quickly within a track. Press and hold thispushbutton for less than two seconds to reverse at sixtimes the normal playing speed. Press and hold itfor more than two seconds to reverse at 17 times thenormal playing speed. Release it to play the passage.ET and the elapsed time of the track will appear onthe display.
4 FWD (Forward): Press and hold this pushbutton toadvance quickly within a track. Press and hold thispushbutton for less than two seconds to advance at sixtimes the normal playing speed. Press and hold it formore than two seconds to advance at 17 times thenormal playing speed. Release it to play the passage.ET and the elapsed time of the track will appear onthe display.
6 RDM (Random): Press this pushbutton to hear thetracks in random, rather than sequential, order. RDM ONwill appear on the display. RDM T and the tracknumber will appear on the display when each trackstarts to play. Press this pushbutton again to turnoff random play. RDM OFF will appear on the display.
q SEEKr: Press the left arrow to go to the startof the current or to the previous track. Press theright arrow to go to the start of the next track. If youhold either arrow or press it more than once, the playerwill continue moving backward or forward throughthe CD.
q SCANr: To scan the CD, press and hold eitherSCAN arrow for more than two seconds until SCANappears on the display and you hear a beep. Use thisfeature to listen to 10 seconds of each track of theCD. Press either SCAN arrow again, to stop scanning.
DISPL (Display): Press this knob to see how longthe current track has been playing. ET and the elapsedtime of the track will appear on the display. Tochange the default on the display (track or elapsedtime), press this knob until you see the display you want,then hold the knob for two seconds. The radio willproduce one beep and the selected display will now bethe default.
3-84
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when acassette tape or CD is playing. The inactive tape or CDwill remain safely inside the radio for future listening
TAPE DISC: Press this button to play a cassette tapeor CD when listening to the radio. The inactive tapeor CD will remain safely inside the radio for futurelistening.
Z (Eject): Press this button to stop a CD when it isplaying or to eject a CD when it is not playing. Ejectmay be activated with either the ignition or radio off. CDsmay be loaded with the radio and ignition off if thisbutton is pressed first.
CD MessagesIf the CD comes out, it could be for one of the followingreasons:• It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.• You are driving on a very rough road. When the
road becomes smoother, the CD should play.• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
try again.• There may have been a problem while burning
the CD.• The label may be caught in the CD player.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,try a known good CD.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot becorrected, contact your dealer. If your radio displays anerror message, write it down and provide it to yourdealer when reporting the problem.
Listening to a DVDIf your vehicle has the Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)system and a DVD is playing, the DVD symbol willappear on the radio display indicating that the DVD isavailable and can be listened to through your vehicle’sspeakers. To listen to the DVD, press the TAPEDISC button until RSE appears on the radio display.The current radio source will stop and the DVD soundwill come through the speakers. To stop listening tothe DVD, press the TAPE DISC button, if a cassettetape or a CD is loaded, or press the BAND buttonto select a different source.
When the RSE system is turned off, the DVD symbolwill go off of the radio display and RSE OFF will appearon the radio display. The radio will return to the lastradio source that you were listening to.
3-85
Radio with Six-Disc CD
If your vehicle is equipped with the Bose® audiosystem, your vehicle will have six Bose® amplifiedspeakers.
Radio Data System (RDS)Your audio system is equipped with a Radio DataSystem (RDS). RDS features are available for use onlyon FM stations that broadcast RDS information.
With RDS, your radio can do the following:
• Seek to stations broadcasting the selected type ofprogramming
• Receive announcements concerning local andnational emergencies
• Display messages from radio stations
• Seek to stations with traffic announcements
This system relies upon receiving specific informationfrom these stations and will only work when theinformation is available. In rare cases, a radio stationmay broadcast incorrect information that will causethe radio features to work improperly. If this happens,contact the radio station.
While you are tuned to an RDS station, the stationname or the call letters will appear on the display insteadof the frequency. RDS stations may also provide thetime of day, a program type (PTY) for currentprogramming, and the name of the program beingbroadcast.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service(48 Contiguous US States)XM™ is a continental U.S. based satellite radio servicethat offers 100 coast to coast channels includingmusic, news, sports, talk, and children’s programming.XM™ provides digital quality audio and text information,including song title and artist name. A service fee isrequired in order to receive the XM™ service. For moreinformation, contact XM™ at www.xmradio.com orcall 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
Base Radio Shown, Bose ® Similar
3-86
Playing the Radio
PWR (Power): Push this knob to turn the system onand off.
VOLUME: Turn the knob to increase or to decreasevolume.
AUTO VOL (Automatic Volume): With automaticvolume, your audio system will adjust automatically tomake up for road and wind noise as you drive byincreasing the volume as vehicle speed increases.
Set the volume at the desired level. Press this button toselect LOW, MEDIUM, or HIGH. AVOL will appearon the display. Each higher setting will provide morevolume compensation as vehicle speed increases.To turn automatic volume off, press this button untilAVOL OFF appears on the display.
RCL (Recall): Press this knob to switch the displaybetween the radio station frequency and the time.Pressing this knob with the ignition off will displaythe time.
For XM™ (48 contiguous US states, if equipped), pressthe RCL knob while in XM™ mode to retrieve fourdifferent categories of information related to the currentsong or channel: Artist, Song Title, Category or PTY,Channel Number/Channel Name.
To change the default on the display, press the RCLknob until you see the display you want, then hold theknob until the display flashes. The selected displaywill now be the default.
Finding a Station
BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1, FM2,AM, or XM1 or XM2 (48 contiguous US states, ifequipped). The display will show your selection.
TUNE: Turn this knob to select radio stations.
sSEEKt: Press the right or the left arrow to go tothe next or to the previous station and stay there.
The radio will seek only to stations that are in theselected band and only to those with a strong signal.
sSCANt: Press and hold either SCAN arrowfor two seconds until SC appears on the display andyou hear a beep. The radio will go to a station, play fora few seconds, then go on to the next station. Presseither SCAN arrow again to stop scanning.
3-87
To scan preset stations, press and hold either SCANarrow for more than four seconds. PRESET SCAN willappear on the display and you will hear a doublebeep. The radio will go to a preset station stored onyour pushbuttons, play for a few seconds, then go on tothe next preset station. Press either SCAN arrowagain to stop scanning presets.
The radio will scan only to stations that are in theselected band and only to those with a strong signal.
Setting Preset StationsThe six numbered pushbuttons let you return to yourfavorite stations. You can set up to 30 stations (six FM1,six FM2, and six AM, six XM1 and six XM2(48 contiguous US states, if equipped), by performingthe following steps:
1. Turn the radio on.2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, AM, or XM1
or XM2.3. Tune in the desired station.4. Press AUTO EQ to select the equalization.5. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever youpress that numbered pushbutton, the station you setwill return and the equalization that you selected willbe automatically stored for that pushbutton.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
AUDIO: Push the AUDIO knob until BASS or TREBappears on the display. Turn the knob to increase or todecrease. If a station is weak or noisy, you maywant to decrease the treble.
To adjust bass or treble to the middle position, selectBASS or TREB and push and hold the AUDIO knob. Theradio will produce one beep and adjust the displaylevel to zero.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middleposition, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no toneor speaker control is displayed. CENTERED willappear on the display and you will hear a beep.
AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press this buttonto select customized equalization settings designedfor country/western, jazz, talk, pop, rock, and classical.Selecting CUSTOM or changing bass or treble,returns the EQ to the manual bass and treble settings.
The radio will save separate AUTO EQ settings foreach preset and source.
If you radio is equipped with the Bose audio system,your equalization settings are either CUSTOM or TALK.
3-88
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
AUDIO: To adjust the balance between the rightand the left speakers, push the AUDIO knob until BALappears on the display. Turn the knob to move thesound toward the right or the left speakers.
To adjust the fade between the front and rear speakers,push and hold the AUDIO knob until FAD appears onthe display. Turn the knob to move the sound toward thefront or the rear speakers.
To adjust the balance and the fade to the middleposition, select balance or fade and push and hold theAUDIO knob. The radio will produce one beep andadjust the display level to the middle position.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middleposition, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no toneor speaker controls are displayed. CENTERED willappear on the display and you will hear a beep.
Finding a Program Type (PTY) Station(RDS and XM™)To select and find a desired PTY perform the following:
1. Press the P-TYPE button to activate programtype select mode. P-TYPE and the last selectedPTY will appear on the display.
2. Turn the P-TYPE knob to select a PTY.
3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press eitherSEEK arrow to select the PTY and take you tothe PTY’s first station.
4. If you want to go to another station within that PTYand the PTY is displayed, press either SEEK arrowonce. If the PTY is not displayed, press eitherSEEK arrow twice to display the PTY and then togo to another station.
5. Press the P-TYPE button to exit program typeselect mode.If PTY times out and is no longer on the display, goback to Step 1.
If both P-TYPE and TRAF are on, the radio will searchfor stations with the selected PTY and trafficannouncements.
To use the PTY interrupt feature, press and hold theP-TYPE button until you hear a beep on the PTYyou want to interrupt with. When selected, an asteriskwill appear beside that PTY on the display. Youmay select multiple interrupts if desired. When you arelistening to a CD, the last selected RDS station willinterrupt play if that selected program type formatis broadcast.
3-89
SCAN: You can scan the stations within a PTY byperforming the following:
1. Press the P-TYPE button to activate program typeselect mode. P-TYPE and the last selected PTY willappear on the display.
2. Turn the P-TYPE knob to select a PTY.
3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press and holdeither SCAN arrow, and the radio will beginscanning the stations in the PTY.
4. Press either SCAN arrow to stop at a station.
If both PTY and TRAF are on, the radio will scan forstations with the selected PTY and trafficannouncements.
BAND (Alternate Frequency): Alternate frequencyallows the radio to switch to a stronger station with thesame program type. To turn alternate frequency on,press and hold BAND for two seconds. AF ON willappear on the display. The radio may switch to strongerstations.
To turn alternate frequency off, press and hold BANDagain for two seconds. AF OFF will appear on thedisplay. The radio will not switch to other stations.
This function does not apply for XM™ Satellite RadioService.
Setting Preset PTYs (RDS Only)The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to yourfavorite PTYs. These buttons have factory PTY presets.You can set up to 12 PTYs (six FM1 and six FM2) byperforming the following steps:
1. Press BAND to select FM1 or FM2.
2. Press the P-TYPE button to activate program typeselect mode. P-TYPE and the last selected PTY willappear on the display.
3. Turn the P-TYPE knob to select a PTY.
4. Press and hold one of the six numberedpushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever youpress that numbered pushbutton, the PTY youset will return.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
3-90
RDS Messages
ALERT!: Alert warns of local or national emergencies.When an alert announcement comes on the currentradio station, ALERT! will appear on the display. You willhear the announcement, even if the volume is mutedor a CD is playing. If the CD player is playing, play willstop during the announcement. You will not be ableto turn off alert announcements.
ALERT! will not be affected by tests of the emergencybroadcast system. This feature is not supported byall RDS stations.
INFO (Information): If the current station has amessage, INFO will appear on the display. Press thisbutton to see the message. The message may displaythe artist, song title, call in phone numbers, etc.
If the whole message is not displayed, parts of themessage will appear every three seconds. To scrollthrough the message at your own speed, pressthe INFO button repeatedly. A new group of words willappear on the display with each press. Once thecomplete message has been displayed, INFO willdisappear from the display until another new messageis received. The old message can be displayed bypressing the INFO button. You can view an old messageuntil a new message is received or a different stationis tuned to.
TRAF (Traffic): If TRAF appears on the display, thetuned station broadcasts traffic announcements.To receive the traffic announcement from the tunedstation, press this button. Brackets will be displayedaround TRAF and when a traffic announcement comeson the tuned radio station you will hear it.
If the current tuned station does not broadcast trafficannouncements, press this button and the radiowill seek to a station that does. When the radio finds astation that broadcasts traffic announcements, theradio will stop and brackets will be displayed aroundTRAF. When a traffic announcement comes onthe tuned radio station you will hear it. If no station isfound, NO TRAFFIC will appear on the display.
If the brackets are on the display and TRAF is not, youcan then press the TRAF button to remove thebrackets or use the TUNE knob or the SEEK arrows togo to a station that supports traffic announcements.If no station is found, NO TRAFFIC will appear on thedisplay.
Your radio will play the traffic announcement even if thevolume is low. Your radio will interrupt the play of aCD if the last tuned station broadcasts trafficannouncements.
This function does not apply to XM™ Satellite RadioService.
3-91
XM™ Radio MessagesRadio Display
Message Condition Action Required
XL (Explicit LanguageChannels)
XL on the radio display,after the channel name,indicates content withexplicit language.
These channels, or any others, can be blocked at acustomer’s request, by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
Updating Updating encryptioncode
The encryption code in your receiver is being updated, andno action is required. This process should take no longerthan 30 seconds.
No Signal Loss of signal Your system is functioning correctly, but you are in alocation that is blocking the XM signal. When you move intoan open area, the signal should return.
Loading XM Acquiring channel audio(after 4 second delay)
Your radio system is acquiring and processing audio andtext data. No action is needed. This message shoulddisappear shortly.
CH Off Air Channel not in service This channel is not currently in service. Tune to anotherchannel.
CH Unavail Channel no longeravailable
This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned.Tune to another station. If this station was one of yourpresets, you may need to choose another station for thatpreset button.
No Info Artist Name/Feature notavailable
No artist information is available at this time on this channel.Your system is working properly.
3-92
XM™ Radio Messages (cont’d)Radio Display
Message Condition Action Required
No Info Song/Program Title notavailable
No song title information is available at this time on thischannel. Your system is working properly.
No Info Category Name notavailable
No category information is available at this time on thischannel. Your system is working properly.
No Info No Text/Informationalmessage available
No text or informational messages are available at this timeon this channel. Your system is working properly.
Not Found No channel available forthe chosen category
There are no channels available for the category youselected. Your system is working properly.
XM Locked Theft lock active The XM receiver in your vehicle may have previously beenin another vehicle. For security purposes, XM receiverscannot be swapped between vehicles. If you receive thismessage after having your vehicle serviced, check with theservicing facility.
Radio ID Radio ID label(channel 0)
If you tune to channel 0, you will see this messagealternating with your XM Radio 8 digit radio ID label. Thislabel is needed to activate your service.
Unknown Radio ID not known(should only be ifhardware failure)
If you receive this message when you tune to channel 0, youmay have a receiver fault. Consult with your dealer.
Chk XMRcvr Hardware failure If this message does not clear within a short period of time,your receiver may have a fault. Consult with your retaillocation.
3-93
Playing a CDIf you turn off the ignition or radio with the CD in theplayer, it will stay in the player. When you turn onthe ignition or the radio, the CD will start playing, whereit stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.
The CD player can play the smaller 8 cm single CDswith an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the smaller CDsare loaded in the same manner.
If playing a CD-R the sound quality may be reduceddue to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the qualityof the music that has been recorded, and the way theCD-R has been handled. You may experience anincrease in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks, and/ordifficulty in loading and ejecting. If these problems occurtry a known good CD.
Do not add paper labels to CDs, they could get caughtin the CD player.
Do not play 3 inch CDs without a standard adapter CD.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”later in this section.
LOAD CD Z: Press the LOAD side of this button toload CDs into the CD player. This CD player willhold up to six CDs.
To insert one CD, do the following:
1. Turn the ignition on.
2. Press and release the LOAD side of the LOAD CDbutton.
3. Wait for the light, located to the right of the slot, toturn green.
4. Load a CD. Insert the CD partway into the slot,label side up. The player will pull the CD in.
When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol will appear onthe display. If you select an equalization setting for yourCD, it will be activated each time you play a CD.
The CD will begin to play automatically.
As each new track starts to play, the track number willappear on the display.
To insert multiple CDs, do the following:
1. Turn the ignition on.
2. Press and hold the LOAD side of the LOAD CDbutton for two seconds.You will hear a beep and the light, located to theright of the slot, will begin to flash.
3. Once the light stops flashing and turns green, loada CD. Insert the CD partway into the slot, label sideup. The player will pull the CD in.Once the CD is loaded, the light will begin flashingagain. Once the light stops flashing and turns greenyou can load another CD. The CD player takes up tosix CDs. Do not try to load more than six.
3-94
To load more than one CD but less than six, completeSteps 1 through 3. When you have finished loadingCDs, the radio will begin to play the last CD loaded.
When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol will appear onthe display. If more than one CD has been loaded,a number for each CD will appear on the display. If youselect an equalization setting for your CD, it will beactivated each time you play a CD.
As each new track starts to play, the track number willappear on the display.
Playing a Specific Loaded CDFor every CD loaded, a number will appear on thedisplay. To play a specific CD, first press the CD AUXbutton. Then press the numbered pushbutton thatcorresponds to the CD you want to play. A small bar willappear under the CD number that is playing, and thetrack number will appear on the display.
If an error appears on the radio display, see “CDMessages” later in this section.
LOAD CD Z (Eject): Press the CD eject side of thisbutton to eject a single CD or multiple CDs. To eject theCD that is currently playing, press and release thisbutton. To eject multiple CDs, press and hold this buttonfor two seconds. You will hear a beep and the light willflash to let you know when a CD is being ejected.
REMOVE CD will appear on the display. You can nowremove the CD. If the CD is not removed, after25 seconds, the CD will be automatically pulled back intothe receiver. If you try to push the CD back into thereceiver, before the 25 second time period is complete,the receiver will sense an error and will try to eject the CDseveral times before stopping.
Do not repeatedly press the CD eject button to eject a CDafter you have tried to push it in manually. The receivers25-second eject timer will reset at each press of eject,which will cause the receiver to not eject the CD until the25-second time period has elapsed.
Once the player stops and the CD is ejected, remove theCD. After removing the CD, push the PWR knob off andthen on again. This will clear the CD-sensing feature andenable CDs to be loaded into the player again.
{ REV (Reverse): Press and hold this button toreverse quickly within a track. You will hear sound at areduced volume. Release the pushbutton to play thepassage. The elapsed time of the track will appearon the display.
FWD| (Forward): Press and hold this button toadvance quickly within a track. You will hear sound at areduced volume. Release the pushbutton to play thepassage. The elapsed time of the track will appearon the display.
3-95
RPT (Repeat): With repeat, you can repeat one trackor an entire CD. To use repeat, do the following:• To repeat the track you are listening to, press and
release the RPT button. RPT will appear on thedisplay. Press RPT again to turn off repeat play.
• To repeat the CD you are listening to, press andhold the RPT button for two seconds. RPT willappear on the display. Press RPT again to turn offrepeat play.
RDM (Random): With random, you can listen to thetracks in random, rather than sequential, order, on oneCD or on all of the CDs. To use random, do one ofthe following:• To play the tracks on the CD you are listening to in
random order, press and release the RDM button.RANDOM ONE will appear on the display. PressRDM again to turn off random play.
• To play the tracks on all of the CDs that are loadedin random order, press and hold the RDM button formore than two seconds. RANDOM ALL willappear on the display. Press RDM again to turn offrandom play.
AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press AUTO EQto select the desired equalization setting while playinga CD. The equalization will be automatically setwhenever you play a CD. For more information onAUTO EQ, see “AUTO EQ” listed previously inthis section.
sSEEKt: Press the left arrow to go to the start ofthe current track, if more than ten seconds have passed.Press the right arrow to go to the next track. If youpress either arrow more than once, the player willcontinue moving backward or forward through the CD.
sSCANt: To scan one CD, press and holdeither SCAN arrow for more than two seconds untilSCAN appears on the display and you hear a beep. Usethis feature to listen to 10 seconds of each track ofthe currently selected CD. Press either SCAN arrowagain, to stop scanning.
To scan all loaded CDs, press and hold either SCANarrow for more than four seconds until CD SCANappears on the display and you hear a beep. Use thisfeature to listen to 10 seconds of the first track ofeach CD loaded. Press either SCAN arrow again, tostop scanning.
RCL (Recall): Press this knob to see how long thecurrent track has been playing. To change the defaulton the display (track or elapsed time), press theknob until you see the display you want, then hold theknob until the display flashes. The selected displaywill now be the default.
BAND: Press this button to play the radio when aCD(s) is in the player.
3-96
Using Song List ModeThe six-disc CD changer has a feature called song list.This feature is capable of saving 20 track selections.
To save tracks into the song list feature, performthe following steps:
1. Turn the CD player on and load it with at least oneCD. See “LOAD CD” listed previously in this sectionfor more information.
2. Check to see that the CD changer is not in song listmode. S-LIST should not appear in the display. IfS-LIST is present, press the SONG LIST buttonto turn it off.
3. Select the desired CD by pressing the numberedpushbutton and then use the SEEK SCAN rightarrow to locate the track that you want to save. Thetrack will begin to play.
4. Press and hold the SONG LIST button to save thetrack into memory. When SONG LIST is pressed abeep will be heard immediately. After two secondsof continuously pressing SONG LIST, two beeps willsound to confirm that the track has been saved.
5. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for saving other selections.
S-LIST FULL will appear on the display if you try tosave more than 20 selections.
To play the song list, press the SONG LIST button. Onebeep will be heard and S-LIST will appear on thedisplay. The recorded tracks will begin to play in theorder that they were saved.
You may seek through the song list by using the SEEKSCAN arrows. Seeking past the last saved track willreturn you to the first saved track.
To delete tracks from the song list, perform thefollowing steps:
1. Turn the CD player on.
2. Press the SONG LIST button to turn song list on.S-LIST will appear on the display.
3. Press the SEEK SCAN arrows to select the desiredtrack to be deleted.
4. Press and hold the SONG LIST button. WhenSONG LIST is pressed, a beep will be heardimmediately. After two seconds of continuouslypressing the SONG LIST button, two beeps will beheard to confirm that the track has been deleted.
3-97
After a track has been deleted, the remaining tracks aremoved up the list. When another track is added to thesong list, the track will be added to the end of the list.
To delete the entire song list, perform thefollowing steps:
1. Turn the CD player on.
2. Press the SONG LIST button to turn song list on.S-LIST will appear on the display.
3. Press and hold the SONG LIST button. A beep willbe heard, followed by two beeps after two secondsand a final beep will be heard after four seconds.S-LIST EMPTY will appear on the display indicatingthat the song list has been deleted.
If a CD is ejected, and the song list contains savedtracks from that CD, those tracks are automaticallydeleted from the song list. Any tracks saved to the songlist again are added to the bottom of the list.
To end song list mode, press the SONG LIST button.One beep will be heard and S-LIST will be removed fromthe display.
CD Messages
CHECK CD: If this message appears on the display, itcould be for one of the following reasons:
• It is very hot. When the temperature returns tonormal, the CD should play.
• You are driving on a very rough road. When theroad becomes smooth, the CD should play.
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour andtry again.
• There may have been a problem while burningthe CD.
• The label may be caught in the CD player.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,try a known good CD.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot becorrected, contact your dealer. If your radio displays anerror message, write it down and provide it to yourdealer when reporting the problem.
3-98
Listening to a DVDIf your vehicle has Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)system and a DVD is playing, the DVD symbolwill appear on the radio display indicating that the DVDis available and can be listened to through yourvehicles speakers. To listen to the DVD, press the CDAUX button until RSE appears on the radio display. Thecurrent radio source will stop and the DVD sound willcome through the speakers. To stop listening tothe DVD, press the CD AUX button, if a CD is loaded,or press the BAND button to select a different source.
When the RSE system is turned off, the DVD symbol willgo off of the radio display and RSE OFF will appearon the radio display. The radio will return to thelast radio source that you were listening to.
Navigation/Radio System
Your vehicle may be equipped with an AM-FMnavigation radio system that includes digital soundprocessing (DSP), Radio Data System (RDS) withprogram type (PTY) selections that will seek out thekind of music you want to listen to and XM™ SatelliteRadio Service capabilities (48 contiguous US states,if equipped). The radio system can also communicatewith your navigation system to broadcastannouncements on traffic, weather, and emergency alertcommunications. For information on how to use thissystem, see the “Navigation System” manual.
Navigation/Radio Display and Controls
3-99
Rear Seat Entertainment SystemYour vehicle may have the optional Digital VersatileDisc (DVD) Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) system. TheRSE system includes a DVD player, a video displayscreen, two sets of wireless headphones, and a remotecontrol.
Before You DriveThe RSE system is for rear seat passengers. The drivercannot safely view the video screen while driving andshould not try to do so.
DVD PlayerThe DVD player is located in the overhead console. TheDVD player can be controlled by the buttons on theDVD player or by the buttons on the remote control. See“Remote Control” later in this section for moreinformation.
The DVD player power may be turned on when theignition is in RUN, ACCESSORY, or when RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) is active.
The RSE system DVD player is only compatible withDVDs of the appropriate DVD region code for thecountry that the vehicle was sold in. The DVD regioncode is printed on the jacket of most DVDs.
Standard audio CDs (CD-R and CD-RW discs) can alsobe played in this DVD player.
When using the wired headphones, if the front seatpassengers play a CD in the Radio with Six-Disc CD (ifequipped) or use XM™ Satellite Radio Service (48contiguous US states, if equipped), you will hear theaudio for these sources, instead of the DVD or CD thatis currently playing through the RSE.
If an error message appears on the video screen, see“DVD Messages” later in this section.
DVD Player Buttons
O(Power): Press this button to turn the RSE systemon or off. The power indicator light will illuminatewhen the power is on.
X (Eject): Press this button to eject a DVD or a CD.
3-100
SRCE (Source): Press this button to toggle betweenthe DVD player and an auxiliary source.
c(Stop): Press this button to stop playing, rewinding,or fast forwarding a DVD or CD. Press this buttontwice to return to the beginning of the DVD.
k (Play/Pause): Press this button to start play of aDVD or CD. Press this button while a DVD or CDis playing to pause it. Press this button again to continuethe play of the DVD or CD.
y (Main DVD Menu): Press this button to access theDVD menu. The DVD menu is different on everyDVD. Use the up, down, left, and right arrow buttons tomove the cursor around the DVD menu. After makinga selection press the enter button. This button onlyoperates when using a DVD.
z (Set-up Menu): Press this button to adjust thecolor, tint, brightness, contrast, and display mode(normal, full, or zoom). The dynamic range compressionfeature can be used to reduce loud audio and increaselow audio produced by some DVDs.
n,q,p,o (Menu Navigation Arrows): Use thearrow buttons to navigate through a menu.
r (Enter): Press this button to select the choicesthat are highlighted in any menu.
Playing a DiscTo play a disc, gently insert the disc with the label sideup into the loading slot. The DVD player will continueloading the disc and the player will automatically start, ifthe vehicle ignition is in RUN, ACCESSORY, or whenRAP is active.
If a disc is already in the player, press the play/pausebutton on the face of the DVD player or on theremote control.
Some DVDs will not allow you to fast forward or skipthe copyright information or previews. Some DVDs willbegin playing after the previews have finished. If theDVD does not begin to play the main title, refer to theon-screen instructions, as the DVD may be displayingits main title menu.
Stopping and Resuming PlaybackTo stop a disc, press and release the stop button on theDVD player or the remote control. To resume playback,press the play/pause button on the DVD player orthe remote control. As long as the disc has not beenejected and the stop button has not been pressed twice,the movie should resume play from where it was laststopped. If the disc has been ejected, or if the stopbutton has been pressed twice, the disc will resume playat the beginning of the DVD or CD.
3-101
Ejecting a DiscPress the eject button on the DVD player to ejectthe disc.
If a disc is ejected from the player, but is not removed,the DVD player will reload the disc after a shortperiod of time. The disc will then be stored in the DVDplayer. The DVD player will not resume play of thisdisc automatically.
There is not an eject button on the remote control.
DVD MessagesThe following errors may be displayed on the videoscreen:
Disc Format Error: This message will be displayed if adisc is inserted upside down, not readable, or theformat is not compatible with the DVD player.
Load/Eject Error: This message will be displayed if thedisc is not properly loaded or ejected.
Disc Play Error: This message will be displayed if theDVD player cannot play the disc. Scratched ordamaged discs will cause this error.
Region Code Error: This message will be displayed ifthe region code of the DVD is not compatible withthe region code of the DVD player.
No Disc: This message will be displayed if any of thebuttons on the DVD faceplate or remote control arepressed and no disc is present in the DVD player.
Parental Control Button: This button is located behindthe video screen. Press this button while a DVD orCD is playing to freeze the video and mute the audio.The video screen will display Parental Control ONand the power indicator light on the DVD player willflash. It will also disable all other button operations fromthe remote control and the DVD player, with theexception of the eject button. Press this button again torestore operation of the DVD player.
This button may also be used to turn the DVD playerpower on and automatically resume play if the ignition isin RUN, ACCESSORY, or if RAP is active.
Video ScreenThe video screen is located in the overhead console. Touse the video screen, push forward on the releaselatch and the screen will fold down. Adjust the screen’sposition as desired. When the video screen is not inuse, push it up into its latched position.
3-102
The DVD player and display will continue to operatewhen the screen is in either the up or the down position.The video screen contains the infrared transmitters forthe wireless headphones and the infrared receiverfor the remote control. If the screen is in the closedposition, the infrared signals will not be available for theoperation of the headphones or the remote control.
Notice: Directly touching the video screenmay damage it. Do not touch the screen. SeeCleaning the Video Screen on page 3-114 for moreinformation.
Remote ControlTo use the remote control, aim it at the infrared windowbelow the video screen and press the desired button.Direct sunlight or very bright light may affect the ability ofthe entertainment system to receive signals from theremote control. If the remote control does not seem tobe working, the batteries may need to be replaced.See “Battery Replacement” later in this section.
Objects blocking the line of sight may also affect thefunction of the remote control.
Notice: Do not store the remote control in heat ordirect sunlight. This could damage the remotecontrol and it would not be covered by your vehicleswarranty. Keep the remote control stored in acool, dry place.
Remote Control Buttons
O (Power): Press this button to turn the DVD playeron or off.
v (Title): Press this button to return the DVD to themain menu of the DVD.
n,q,p,o (Menu Navigation Arrows): Use thearrow buttons to navigate through a menu.
3-103
z (Set-up Menu): Press this button to adjust thecolor, tint, brightness, contrast, and display mode(normal, full, or zoom). The dynamic range compressionfeature can be used to reduce loud audio and increaselow audio produced by some DVDs.
e (Audio): Press this button to display a menu thatwill only appear when a DVD is being played. The formatand content of this function is dependent on the disc.
r (Fast Reverse): Press this button to fast reversethe DVD or CD. To stop fast reversing, press this buttonagain. This button may not work when the DVD isplaying the copyright information or the previews.
SRCE (Source): Press this button to toggle betweenthe DVD player and an auxiliary source.
c (Stop): Press this button to stop playing, rewinding,or fast forwarding a DVD or CD. Press this buttontwice to return to the beginning of the DVD.
t (Previous Track/Chapter): Press this button toreturn to the start of the current track or chapter. Pressthis button again to return to the previous track orchapter. This button may not work when the DVD isplaying the copyright information or the previews.
1 through 0 (Numeric Keypad): The remote controlnumeric keypad provides you with the capability of directchapter, title, and track number selection.
\: Press this button, within 3 seconds after inputtinga numeric selection to clear all numeric inputs. Pressthis button before inputting the number.
}10: Press the button, to select chapter, title, andtrack numbers greater than 9. Press this button beforeinputting the number.
P (Illumination): Press this button to turn the remotecontrol backlight on. The backlight will time out afterabout 7 to 10 seconds if no other button is pressed whilethe backlight is on.
y (Main DVD Menu): Press this button to access theDVD menu. The DVD menu is different on everyDVD. Use the up, down, left, and right arrow buttons tomove the cursor around the DVD menu. After makinga selection press the enter button. This button onlyoperates when using a DVD.
r (Enter): Press this button to select the choicesthat are highlighted in any menu.
q (Return): Press this button to exit the currentactive menu and return to the previous menu. Thisbutton will operate only when a DVD is being playedand a menu is active.
3-104
| (Camera Angle): This button changes cameraangles on DVDs that have this feature when a DVD isplaying. The format and content of this function isdependent on the disc.
{ (Subtitle): This button turns on subtitles and movesthrough subtitle options when a DVD is playing. Theformat and content of this function is dependent on thedisc.
[ (Fast Forward): Press this button to fast forwardthe DVD or CD. To stop fast forwarding, press thisbutton again. This button may not work when the DVDis playing the copyright information or the previews.
s (Play/Pause): Press this button to start play of aDVD or CD. Press this button while a DVD or CD isplaying to pause it. Press this button again to continuethe play of the DVD or CD.
Slow Play: When the DVD is playing, press the pausebutton then press the fast forward button. The DVDwill continue playing in a slow play mode. To cancel slowplay mode, press the play/pause button.
u (Next Track/Chapter): Press this button to advanceto the beginning of the next track or chapter. Thisbutton may not work when the DVD is playing thecopyright information or the previews.
Battery ReplacementTo change the batteries, do the following:
1. Remove the battery compartment door located onthe bottom of the remote control.
2. Replace the two AA batteries in the compartment.Make sure that they are installed correctly, usingthe diagram on the inside of the batterycompartment.
3. Close the battery door securely.
Notice: Do not store the remote control in heat ordirect sunlight. This could damage the remotecontrol and it would not be covered by your vehicleswarranty. Keep the remote control stored in acool, dry place.
If the remote control is to be stored for a long period oftime, remove the batteries and keep them in a cool,dry place.
HeadphonesThe RSE system includes two sets of wirelessheadphones.
Each set of headphones has an ON/OFF control. Anindicator light will illuminate on the headphoneswhen they are on. If the light does not illuminate, thebatteries may need to be replaced. See “BatteryReplacement” following for more information.
3-105
Each set of headphones has a volume knob. To adjustthe volume, adjust this knob.
The headphones will automatically turn off if they losethe infrared signal from the system after approximatelyfour minutes in order to preserve their battery power.The signal may be lost if the system is turned off or if theheadphones are out of range of the infrared signaltransmitters that are located below the video displayscreen.
When using the wired headphones, if the front seatpassengers play a CD in the Radio with Six-Disc CD (ifequipped) or use XM™ Satellite Radio Service (48contiguous US states, if equipped), you will hear theaudio for these sources, instead of the DVD or CD thatis currently playing through the RSE.
Battery ReplacementTo change the batteries, do the following:
1. Loosen the screw on the battery compartment doorlocated on the left side of the headphone earpiece.
2. Replace the two AAA batteries in the compartment.Make sure that they are installed correctly, usingthe diagram on the inside of the batterycompartment.
3. Tighten the screw to close the compartment door.
Notice: Do not store the headphones in heat ordirect sunlight. This could damage the headphonesand repairs would not be covered by your warranty.Keep the headphones stored in a cool, dry place.
If the headphones are to be stored for a long period oftime, remove the batteries and keep them in a cool,dry place.
Stereo RCA JacksThe RCA jacks are located behind the video screen.The RCA jacks allow you to connect audio andvideo from an auxiliary device such as a camcorder or avideo game unit to your RSE system. Standard RCAcables are needed to connect the auxiliary device to theRCA jacks. The yellow connector inputs video andthe red and white connectors input right and left stereoaudio. Refer to the manufacturer’s instructions forproper connection of your auxiliary device.
To use the auxiliary inputs on the RSE system, connectan external auxiliary device to the color-coded RCAjacks and turn both the auxiliary device and theRSE system power on. If the RSE system had beenpreviously in the DVD player mode, pressing the SRCEbutton on the faceplate or the remote control willtoggle the RSE system between the auxiliary deviceand the DVD player.
3-106
How to Change the Video Format when inthe Auxiliary ModeThe auxiliary input video format is preset to NTSC. Insome countries, the video format may be in PAL system.To change the video format, perform the following:
1. Press the display menu button.
2. Press the down arrow button to highlight the VideoFormat option.
3. Press the enter button to select Video Format.
4. Press the right or left arrow button to selectthe desired video format.
5. Press the enter button to accept the change.
Audio OutputAudio from the DVD player or auxiliary inputs may beheard through the following possible sources:
• Wireless Headphones
• Vehicle Speakers
• Vehicle wired headphone jacks on the Rear SeatAudio system (if equipped)
The RSE system will always transmit the audio signalby infrared to the wireless headphones, if there is audioavailable. See “Headphones” previously for moreinformation.
The RSE system is capable of outputting audio to thevehicle speakers by using the radio. The RSEsystem may be selected as an audio source on theradio if the RSE system power is on. Once theRSE system is selected as an audio source on the radioyou may adjust the speaker volume on the radio. Ifthe RSE system power is not on, the RSE system willnot be an available source on the radio. Refer tothe radio information for the radio that your vehicle hasfor more information.
The RSE system is capable of outputting audio to thewired headphone jacks on the rear seat audio system (ifequipped). The RSE system may be selected as anaudio source on the rear seat audio system if the RSEsystem power is on. Refer to Rear Seat Audio (RSA)on page 3-110 for more information.
3-107
Problem Recommended ActionNo power. The ignition might not be
in on or accessory.Check to make sure theparental control buttonhas not been activated.(The power indicator lightwill flash if parentalcontrol is active.)
Disc will not play. The system might be off.Check to make sure theparental control buttonhas not been activated.(The power indicator lightwill flash if parentalcontrol is active.)The system might be inauxiliary mode.The disc is upside downor is not compatible.
The picture does not fillthe screen. There areblack borders on the topand bottom or on bothsides or it looksstretched out.
Check the display modesettings in the displaymenu.
The disc was ejected, butit was pulled back intothe DVD player.
The disc is being storedin the DVD player. Pressthe eject button again toeject the disc.
Problem Recommended ActionIn auxiliary mode, thepicture moves or scrolls.
Check the auxiliary inputconnections at bothdevices.Change the VideoFormat to PAL or NTSC.
The language in theaudio or on the screen iswrong.
Check the audio orlanguage selection in themain DVD menu.
The remote control doesnot work.
Check to make surethere is no obstructionbetween the remotecontrol and the infraredwindow located below thevideo screen.Check the batteries tomake sure they are notdead or installedincorrectly.Check to make sure theparental control buttonhas not been activated.(The power indicator lightwill flash if parentalcontrol is active.)
3-108
Problem Recommended ActionAfter stopping the player, Ipush Play but sometimesthe DVD starts where Ileft off and sometimes atthe beginning.
If the stop button waspressed one time, theDVD player will resumeplaying where the DVDwas stopped. If the stopbutton was pressed twotimes the DVD player willbegin to play from thebeginning of the DVD.
The auxiliary source isrunning but there is nopicture or sound.
Check that the DVDplayer is in the auxiliarysource mode.Check the auxiliary inputconnections at bothdevices.
My disc is stuck in theplayer. The Load/Ejectbutton does not work.
Turn the DVD power off,then on and press theLoad/Eject button on theDVD player.Do not attempt to forciblyremove the disc from theDVD player. This couldpermanently damage thedisc and DVD player.
Problem Recommended ActionSometimes the wirelessheadphone audio cuts outor buzzes.
Check for obstructions,low batteries, receptionrange, and interferencefrom cellular telephonetowers or by using yourcellular telephone in thevehicle.Check that theheadphones are facingthe front of the vehicle.
I lost the remote and/orthe headphones.
See your dealer forassistance.
The DVD is playing, butthere is no picture orsound.
Check that the DVDplayer is in DVD mode.
The audio/video skips orjumps.
The DVD or CD could bedirty, scratched, ordamaged.
What is the best way toclean the video screen?
Wipe the video screenwith a damp, soft cloth.
The audio from the radiofor the Radio withSix-Disc CD and XM™has taken over the audiofrom the DVD or CDwhen using the wiredheadphones.
The RSE is workingcorrectly.Use the wirelessheadphones or have thefront seat passengerslisten to another audiosource.
3-109
Rear Seat Audio (RSA)This feature allows rear seat passengers to listen to anyof the music sources: radio, cassette tapes, CDs, orDVDs. The rear seat passengers can only control themusic sources that the front seat passengers are notlistening to. For example, rear seat passengers maylisten to a cassette tape or CD through headphones whilethe driver listens to the radio through the front speakers.The rear seat passengers have control of the volume foreach set of headphones. The front seat audio controlsalways override the rear seat audio controls.
P (Power): Press this button to turn the rear seataudio system on or off. The rear speakers will be mutedwhen the power is turned on unless you have a Bose®
equipped vehicle. You may operate the rear seat audiofunctions even when the primary radio power is off.
u (Volume): Turn this knob to increase or todecrease volume. The left volume knob controls the leftheadphone and the right volume knob controls theright headphone.
SRCE (Source): Press this button to select an audiosource: radio, cassette tape, CD, or DVD. The inactivetape, CD, or DVD will remain safely inside the radiofor future listening.
SEEK: Press this button to go to the next station andstay there. The display will show your selection.
To scan preset stations, press and hold the SEEKbutton. The radio will go to a preset station, play for afew seconds, then go the next preset station. Thedisplay will show your selections. The SEEK button isinactive if the front radio is in use.
While listening to a cassette tape, press the SEEKbutton to hear the next selection on the tape. Press andhold the SEEK button to go to the other side of thetape. The SEEK button is inactive if the tape mode onthe front radio is in use.
While listening to a CD, press the SEEK button to hearthe next track on the CD. The SEEK button is inactiveif the CD mode on the front radio is in use.
If your vehicle has the Radio with Six-Disc CD andthere is more than one CD loaded, press and hold theSEEK button for 2 seconds to take you to the next CD.
3-110
Radio PersonalizationIf your vehicle has this feature, it allows the driver toreturn to the last used audio source (radio, cassette orCD) using the remote keyless entry transmitter. Thisfeature can also store and recall AM and FM presets,volume, tone and the last selected radio station.The number on the back of each transmitter (1 or 2)corresponds to driver 1 or 2. If transmitter 1 is used toenter the vehicle, the last used audio source and/orsettings set by driver 1 will be recalled. If transmitter 2 isused to enter the vehicle, the last used audio sourceand/or settings set by driver 2 will be recalled.
Theft-Deterrent Feature(RDS Radios)THEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft of yourradio. The feature works automatically by learninga portion of the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). Ifthe radio is moved to a different vehicle, it will notoperate and LOCKED will appear on the display.
When the radio and vehicle are turned off, the blinkingred light indicates that THEFTLOCK® is armed.
With THEFTLOCK® activated, your radio will not operateif stolen.
Audio Steering Wheel ControlsYou can control certain radio functions using the buttonson your steering wheel.
g (OnStar/Voice Recognition): You can press thisbutton to interact with the OnStar® system. See theOnStar® manual provided with your vehicle for moreinformation.
PROG (Program): Press this button to play a stationyou have stored on the radio preset pushbuttons.
If a cassette tape is playing, press this button to playthe other side of the tape.
If a CD is playing, press this button to go to the nextavailable CD.
3-111
Q SOURCER: Press this button to select FM1,FM2, AM, or XM1 or XM2 (48 contiguous US states, ifequipped), or a cassette tape or CD. Availableloaded sources are shown on the display as a tape or aCD symbol.
Q SEEKR: Press the up or the down arrow to goto the next or to the previous radio station andstay there.
If a cassette tape or CD is playing, press the up or thedown arrow to fast forward or reverse.
Q VOLR (Volume): Press the up or the down arrowto increase or to decrease volume.
DVD DistortionYou may experience audio distortion in theIR headphones when operating cellular phones,scanners, CB radios, Global Positioning Systems(GPS)*, two-way radios, mobile fax, or walkie talkies.
It may be necessary to turn off the DVD playerwhen operating one of these devices in or near thevehicle.
* Excludes the OnStar® System.
Understanding Radio Reception
AMThe range for most AM stations is greater than for FM,especially at night. The longer range, however, cancause stations to interfere with each other. AM can pickup noise from things like storms and power lines. Tryreducing the treble to reduce this noise.
FM StereoFM stereo will give you the best sound, but FM signalswill reach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km).Tall buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals,causing the sound to come and go.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service(48 Contiguous US States)XM™ Satellite Radio gives you digital radio receptionfrom coast to coast. Just as with FM, tall buildingsor hills can interfere with satellite radio signals, causingthe sound to come and go. Your radio may displayNO SIGNAL to indicate interference.
3-112
Care of Your Cassette Tape PlayerA tape player that is not cleaned regularly can causereduced sound quality, ruined cassettes, or a damagedmechanism. Cassette tapes should be stored in theircases away from contaminants, direct sunlight, andextreme heat. If they are not, they may not operateproperly or may cause failure of the tape player.
Your tape player should be cleaned regularly after every50 hours of use. Your radio may display CLEAN toindicate that you have used your tape player for50 hours without resetting the tape clean timer. If thismessage appears on the display, your cassettetape player needs to be cleaned. It will still play tapes,but you should clean it as soon as possible toprevent damage to your tapes and player. If you noticea reduction in sound quality, try a known goodcassette to see if the tape or the tape player is at fault.If this other cassette has no improvement in soundquality, clean the tape player.
For best results, use a scrubbing action, non-abrasivecleaning cassette with pads which scrub the tapehead as the hubs of the cleaner cassette turn. Therecommended cleaning cassette is available throughyour dealer.
The broken tape detection feature of your cassette tapeplayer may identify the cleaning cassette as adamaged tape, in error. To prevent the cleaning cassettefrom being ejected, use the following steps:
1. Turn the ignition on.
2. Turn the radio off.
3. Press and hold the TAPE CD button for fiveseconds. READY will appear on the display and acassette symbol will flash for five seconds.
4. Insert the scrubbing action cleaning cassette.
5. Eject the cleaning cassette after the manufacturer’srecommended cleaning time.
After the cleaning cassette is ejected, the broken tapedetection feature will be active again.
3-113
You may also choose a non-scrubbing action, wet-typecleaner which uses a cassette with a fabric belt toclean the tape head. This type of cleaning cassette willnot eject on its own. A non-scrubbing action cleanermay not clean as thoroughly as the scrubbing typecleaner. The use of a non-scrubbing action, dry-typecleaning cassette is not recommended.
After you clean the player, press and hold the EJTbutton for five seconds to reset the CLEAN indicator.The radio will display CLEANED to show the indicatorwas reset.
Cassettes are subject to wear and the sound qualitymay degrade over time. Always make sure the cassettetape is in good condition before you have your tapeplayer serviced.
Care of Your CDs and DVDsHandle discs carefully. Store them in their original casesor other protective cases and away from direct sunlightand dust. If the surface of a disc is soiled, dampena clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral detergent solutionand clean it, wiping from the center to the edge.
Be sure never to touch the side without writing whenhandling discs. Pick up discs by grasping the outeredges or the edge of the hole and the outer edge.
Care of Your CD and DVD PlayerThe use of CD lens cleaner discs is not advised, due tothe risk of contaminating the lens of the CD opticswith lubricants internal to the CD mechanism.
Cleaning the Video ScreenPour some isopropyl or rubbing alcohol on a clean clothand gently wipe the video screen. Do not spraydirectly onto the screen and do not press too hard ortoo long on the video screen.
Fixed Mast AntennaThe fixed mast antenna can withstand most car washeswithout being damaged. If the mast should everbecome slightly bent, you can straighten it out by hand.If the mast is badly bent, you should replace it.
Check occasionally to be sure the mast is still tightenedto the fender. If tightening is required, tighten byhand, then with a wrench one quarter turn.
3-114
XM™ Satellite Radio AntennaSystem (48 Contiguous US States)Your XM™ Satellite Radio antenna is located on the roofof your vehicle. Keep this antenna clear of snow andice build up for clear radio reception.
The performance of your XM™ system may be affectedif your sunroof is open.
Loading items onto the roof of your vehicle can interferewith the performance of your XM™ system. Makesure that the XM™ satellite antenna is not obstructed.
Chime Level AdjustmentThe volume level of the vehicle’s chimes can becontrolled by the radio. To change the volume level,press and hold pushbutton 6 with the ignition on and theradio power off. The chime volume level will changefrom the normal level to loud, and LOUD will appear onthe display. To change back to the default or normalsetting, press and hold pushbutton 6 again. The chimelevel will change from the loud level to normal, andNORMAL will appear on the display.
3-115
✍ NOTES
3-116
Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle ..........4-2Defensive Driving ...........................................4-2Drunken Driving .............................................4-2Control of a Vehicle ........................................4-5Braking .........................................................4-6Traction Assist System (TAS) ...........................4-9Locking Rear Axle ........................................4-10Steering ......................................................4-10Off-Road Recovery .......................................4-12Passing .......................................................4-13Loss of Control .............................................4-14Off-Road Driving with Your Four-Wheel-Drive
Vehicle ....................................................4-15Driving at Night ............................................4-28Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads ..................4-29
City Driving ..................................................4-32Freeway Driving ...........................................4-33Before Leaving on a Long Trip .......................4-34Highway Hypnosis ........................................4-35Hill and Mountain Roads ................................4-36Winter Driving ..............................................4-37If You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud,
Ice or Snow ..............................................4-42Towing ..........................................................4-44
Towing Your Vehicle .....................................4-44Recreational Vehicle Towing ...........................4-44Loading Your Vehicle ....................................4-47Adding a Snow Plow or Similar Equipment .......4-52Towing a Trailer ...........................................4-53
Section 4 Driving Your Vehicle
4-1
Your Driving, the Road, andYour Vehicle
Defensive DrivingThe best advice anyone can give about driving is: Drivedefensively.
Please start with a very important safety device in yourvehicle: Buckle up. See Safety Belts: They Are forEveryone on page 1-8.
Defensive driving really means “be ready for anything.”On city streets, rural roads or freeways, it means“always expect the unexpected.”
Assume that pedestrians or other drivers are going tobe careless and make mistakes. Anticipate whatthey might do. Be ready for their mistakes.
Rear-end collisions are about the most preventable ofaccidents. Yet they are common. Allow enough followingdistance. It is the best defensive driving maneuver, inboth city and rural driving. You never know whenthe vehicle in front of you is going to brake or turnsuddenly.
Defensive driving requires that a driver concentrate onthe driving task. Anything that distracts from the drivingtask — such as concentrating on a cellular telephone call,reading, or reaching for something on the floor — makes
proper defensive driving more difficult and can evencause a collision, with resulting injury. Ask a passenger tohelp do things like this, or pull off the road in a safe placeto do them yourself. These simple defensive drivingtechniques could save your life.
Drunken DrivingDeath and injury associated with drinking and driving isa national tragedy. It is the number one contributorto the highway death toll, claiming thousands of victimsevery year.
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive avehicle:
• Judgment
• Muscular Coordination
• Vision
• Attentiveness.
Police records show that almost half of all motorvehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,these deaths are the result of someone who wasdrinking and driving. In recent years, more than16,000 annual motor vehicle-related deaths have beenassociated with the use of alcohol, with more than300,000 people injured.
4-2
Many adults — by some estimates, nearly half the adultpopulation — choose never to drink alcohol, so theynever drive after drinking. For persons under 21,it is against the law in every U.S. state to drink alcohol.There are good medical, psychological anddevelopmental reasons for these laws.
The obvious way to eliminate the leading highwaysafety problem is for people never to drink alcohol andthen drive. But what if people do? How much is “toomuch” if someone plans to drive? It is a lot lessthan many might think. Although it depends on eachperson and situation, here is some general informationon the problem.
The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) of someonewho is drinking depends upon four things:
• The amount of alcohol consumed
• The drinker’s body weight
• The amount of food that is consumed before andduring drinking
• The length of time it has taken the drinker toconsume the alcohol.
According to the American Medical Association, a 180 lb(82 kg) person who drinks three 12 ounce (355 ml)bottles of beer in an hour will end up with a BACof about 0.06 percent. The person would reach the
same BAC by drinking three 4 ounce (120 ml) glassesof wine or three mixed drinks if each had 1-1/2 ounces(45 ml) of liquors like whiskey, gin or vodka.
It is the amount of alcohol that counts. For example, ifthe same person drank three double martinis (3 ouncesor 90 ml of liquor each) within an hour, the person’sBAC would be close to 0.12 percent. A personwho consumes food just before or during drinking willhave a somewhat lower BAC level.
4-3
There is a gender difference, too. Women generallyhave a lower relative percentage of body waterthan men. Since alcohol is carried in body water, thismeans that a woman generally will reach a higher BAClevel than a man of her same body weight will wheneach has the same number of drinks.
The law in an increasing number of U.S. states, andthroughout Canada, sets the legal limit at 0.08 percent.In some other countries, the limit is even lower. Forexample, it is 0.05 percent in both France and Germany.The BAC limit for all commercial drivers in the UnitedStates is 0.04 percent.
The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three to sixdrinks (in one hour). Of course, as we have seen,it depends on how much alcohol is in the drinks, andhow quickly the person drinks them.
But the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC of0.10 percent. Research shows that the driving skillsof many people are impaired at a BAC approaching0.05 percent, and that the effects are worse at night. Alldrivers are impaired at BAC levels above 0.05 percent.Statistics show that the chance of being in a collisionincreases sharply for drivers who have a BAC of0.05 percent or above. A driver with a BAC level of0.06 percent has doubled his or her chance of having acollision. At a BAC level of 0.10 percent, the chanceof this driver having a collision is 12 times greater; at alevel of 0.15 percent, the chance is 25 times greater!
The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the alcoholin one drink. No amount of coffee or number of coldshowers will speed that up. “I will be careful” is not theright answer. What if there is an emergency, a needto take sudden action, as when a child darts intothe street? A person with even a moderate BAC mightnot be able to react quickly enough to avoid thecollision.
4-4
There is something else about drinking and driving thatmany people do not know. Medical research showsthat alcohol in a person’s system can make crashinjuries worse, especially injuries to the brain, spinalcord or heart. This means that when anyone who hasbeen drinking — driver or passenger — is in a crash,that person’s chance of being killed or permanentlydisabled is higher than if the person had not beendrinking.
{CAUTION:
Drinking and then driving is very dangerous.Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness andjudgment can be affected by even a smallamount of alcohol. You can have a serious — oreven fatal — collision if you drive after drinking.Please do not drink and drive or ride with adriver who has been drinking. Ride home in acab; or if you are with a group, designate adriver who will not drink.
Control of a VehicleYou have three systems that make your vehicle gowhere you want it to go. They are the brakes, the steeringand the accelerator. All three systems have to do theirwork at the places where the tires meet the road.
Sometimes, as when you are driving on snow or ice, itis easy to ask more of those control systems thanthe tires and road can provide. That means you can losecontrol of your vehicle.
4-5
BrakingBraking action involves perception time andreaction time.
First, you have to decide to push on the brake pedal.That is perception time. Then you have to bring up yourfoot and do it. That is reaction time.
Average reaction time is about 3/4 of a second. But thatis only an average. It might be less with one driverand as long as two or three seconds or more withanother. Age, physical condition, alertness, coordinationand eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol, drugs andfrustration. But even in 3/4 of a second, a vehicle movingat 60 mph (100 km/h) travels 66 feet (20 m). Thatcould be a lot of distance in an emergency, so keepingenough space between your vehicle and others isimportant.
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatlywith the surface of the road (whether it is pavementor gravel); the condition of the road (wet, dry, icy); tiretread; the condition of your brakes; the weight ofthe vehicle and the amount of brake force applied.
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drivein spurts — heavy acceleration followed by heavybraking — rather than keeping pace with traffic. This isa mistake. Your brakes may not have time to coolbetween hard stops. Your brakes will wear out muchfaster if you do a lot of heavy braking. If you keep pacewith the traffic and allow realistic following distances,you will eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking.That means better braking and longer brake life.
If your engine ever stops while you are driving, brakenormally but do not pump your brakes. If you do,the pedal may get harder to push down. If your enginestops, you will still have some power brake assist.But you will use it when you brake. Once the powerassist is used up, it may take longer to stop andthe brake pedal will be harder to push.
4-6
Anti-lock Brake SystemYour vehicle has anti-lock brakes. ABS is an advancedelectronic braking system that will help prevent abraking skid.
When you start your engine and begin to drive away,your anti-lock brake system will check itself. Youmay hear a momentary motor or clicking noise whilethis test is going on. This is normal.
If there is a problem withthe anti-lock brake system,this warning light willstay on. See Anti-LockBrake System WarningLight on page 3-39.
Along with ABS, your vehicle has a Dynamic RearProportioning (DRP) system. If there is a DRP problem,both the brake and ABS warning lights will come onaccompanied by a 10-second chime. The lightsand chime will come on each time the ignition is turnedon until the problem is repaired. See your dealer forservice.
Let us say the road is wet and you are driving safely.Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of you. You slamon the brakes and continue braking. Here is whathappens with ABS:
A computer senses that wheels are slowing down. Ifone of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computerwill separately work the brakes at each front wheeland at both rear wheels.
4-7
The anti-lock system can change the brake pressurefaster than any driver could. The computer isprogrammed to make the most of available tire and roadconditions. This can help you steer around the obstaclewhile braking hard.
As you brake, your computer keeps receiving updates onwheel speed and controls braking pressure accordingly.
Remember: Anti-lock does not change the time youneed to get your foot up to the brake pedal or alwaysdecrease stopping distance. If you get too close tothe vehicle in front of you, you will not have time to applyyour brakes if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops.Always leave enough room up ahead to stop, eventhough you have anti-lock brakes.
Using Anti-LockDo not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedaldown firmly and let anti-lock work for you. You may feelthe brakes vibrate, or you may notice some noise,but this is normal.
Braking in EmergenciesWith anti-lock, you can steer and brake at the sametime. In many emergencies, steering can help you morethan even the very best braking.
4-8
Traction Assist System (TAS)Your two-wheel drive vehicle may have a TractionAssist System (TAS) that limits wheel spin. Thisis especially useful in slippery road conditions. Thesystem operates only if it senses that one or both of therear wheels are spinning or beginning to lose traction.When this happens, the system reduces enginepower to limit wheel spin.
The low traction symbol next to the button will come onwhen the TAS is limiting wheel spin. You may feel orhear the system working, but this is normal.
The Traction Assist System may operate on dry roadsunder some conditions. When this happens, youmay notice a reduction in acceleration. This is normaland doesn’t mean there’s a problem with your vehicle.Examples of these conditions include a hardacceleration in a turn, an abrupt upshift or downshift ofthe transmission or driving on rough roads.
If your vehicle is in cruise control when the TAS beginsto limit wheel spin, the cruise control will automaticallydisengage. When road conditions allow you to safelyuse it again, you may re-engage the cruise control. See“Cruise Control” under Turn Signal/MultifunctionLever on page 3-7. When the traction control off symbolon the button is on, the TAS is off and will not limitwheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.
The traction control off symbol on the button will comeon under the following conditions:• The Traction Assist System is turned off, either by
pressing the TAS on/off button or by turning offthe automatic engagement feature of the TAS.
• The transmission is in FIRST (1) gear; TAS will notoperate in this gear. This is normal.
• The vehicle is driven on an extremely rough road.When the vehicle leaves the rough surface, slowsdown or stops, the light will go off and TAS willbe on again. This is normal.
• A Traction Assist System, Anti-Lock Brake Systemor engine-related problem has been detected andthe vehicle needs service.
The Traction Assist System, as delivered from thefactory, will automatically come on whenever you startyour vehicle. To limit wheel spin, especially in slipperyroad conditions, you should always leave the system on.But you can turn the TAS off if you ever need to. Youshould turn the TAS off if your vehicle ever gets stuck insand, mud or snow and rocking the vehicle is required.To turn the system on or off, press the TAS buttonlocated near the shift lever. If you used the button to turnthe system off, the traction control off symbol on thebutton will come on and stay on.You can turn the system back on at any time bypressing the button again. The traction control off symbolon the button should go off.
4-9
If desired, you can change the TAS automaticengagement feature so that the system will not come onautomatically when the engine is started. To do so:
1. Turn the ignition to RUN.
2. Move the shift lever to NEUTRAL.
3. Apply the brake pedal and press the acceleratorpedal to the floor.
4. Press and hold the TAS button for at leastsix seconds.
5. Release the TAS button and both pedals.
6. Start the engine and wait a few seconds.
The next time you start your vehicle, the TAS will notautomatically come on. You can restore the automaticfeature by using the same procedure. Whether the TASis set to come on automatically or not, you can alwaysturn the system on or off by pressing the TAS button.
Locking Rear AxleIf your vehicle has this feature, your locking rear axlecan give you additional traction on snow, mud, ice, sandor gravel. It works like a standard axle most of thetime, but when one of the rear wheels has no tractionand the other does, this feature will allow the wheel withtraction to move the vehicle.
Steering
Power SteeringIf you lose power steering assist because the enginestops or the system is not functioning, you can steer butit will take much more effort.
Steering TipsDriving on CurvesIt is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.
A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned onthe news happen on curves. Here is why:
Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is subject tothe same laws of physics when driving on curves.The traction of the tires against the road surface makesit possible for the vehicle to change its path whenyou turn the front wheels. If there is no traction, inertiawill keep the vehicle going in the same direction. Ifyou have ever tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice, youwill understand this.
The traction you can get in a curve depends on thecondition of your tires and the road surface, the angle atwhich the curve is banked, and your speed. Whileyou are in a curve, speed is the one factor youcan control.
4-10
Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve. Thenyou suddenly accelerate. Both control systems —steering and acceleration — have to do their work wherethe tires meet the road. Adding the sudden accelerationcan demand too much of those places. You can losecontrol. See Traction Assist System (TAS) on page 4-9.
What should you do if this ever happens? Ease upon the accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the way youwant it to go, and slow down.
Speed limit signs near curves warn that you shouldadjust your speed. Of course, the posted speedsare based on good weather and road conditions. Underless favorable conditions you will want to go slower.
If you need to reduce your speed as you approacha curve, do it before you enter the curve, while your frontwheels are straight ahead.
Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive” through thecurve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait toaccelerate until you are out of the curve, and thenaccelerate gently into the straightaway.
Steering in EmergenciesThere are times when steering can be more effectivethan braking. For example, you come over a hill and finda truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pullsout from nowhere, or a child darts out from betweenparked cars and stops right in front of you. Youcan avoid these problems by braking — if you can stopin time. But sometimes you can not; there is notroom. That is the time for evasive action — steeringaround the problem.
Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies likethese. First apply your brakes.
See Braking on page 4-6. It is better to remove as muchspeed as you can from a possible collision. Thensteer around the problem, to the left or right dependingon the space available.
4-11
An emergency like this requires close attention and aquick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel atthe recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, youcan turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly withoutremoving either hand. But you have to act fast, steerquickly, and just as quickly straighten the wheelonce you have avoided the object.
The fact that such emergency situations are alwayspossible is a good reason to practice defensive drivingat all times and wear safety belts properly.
Off-Road RecoveryYou may find that your right wheels have dropped offthe edge of a road onto the shoulder while you aredriving.
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below thepavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off theaccelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way,steer so that your vehicle straddles the edge ofthe pavement. You can turn the steering wheel up toone-quarter turn until the right front tire contactsthe pavement edge. Then turn your steering wheel to gostraight down the roadway.
4-12
PassingThe driver of a vehicle about to pass another on atwo-lane highway waits for just the right moment,accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, thengoes back into the right lane again. A simple maneuver?
Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on a two-lanehighway is a potentially dangerous move, since thepassing vehicle occupies the same lane as oncomingtraffic for several seconds. A miscalculation, an error injudgment, or a brief surrender to frustration or angercan suddenly put the passing driver face to face with theworst of all traffic accidents — the head-on collision.
So here are some tips for passing:
• “Drive ahead.” Look down the road, to the sidesand to crossroads for situations that might affectyour passing patterns. If you have any doubtwhatsoever about making a successful pass, waitfor a better time.
• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings andlines. If you can see a sign up ahead that mightindicate a turn or an intersection, delay your pass.A broken center line usually indicates it is allright to pass (providing the road ahead is clear).Never cross a solid line on your side of the lane ora double solid line, even if the road seems emptyof approaching traffic.
• Do not get too close to the vehicle you want topass while you are awaiting an opportunity. For onething, following too closely reduces your area ofvision, especially if you are following a largervehicle. Also, you will not have adequate space ifthe vehicle ahead suddenly slows or stops.Keep back a reasonable distance.
• When it looks like a chance to pass is coming up,start to accelerate but stay in the right lane anddo not get too close. Time your move so you will beincreasing speed as the time comes to move intothe other lane. If the way is clear to pass, youwill have a “running start” that more than makes upfor the distance you would lose by droppingback. And if something happens to cause you tocancel your pass, you need only slow downand drop back again and wait for anotheropportunity.
• If other vehicles are lined up to pass a slow vehicle,wait your turn. But take care that someone is nottrying to pass you as you pull out to pass the slowvehicle. Remember to glance over your shoulderand check the blind spot.
4-13
• Check your mirrors, glance over your shoulder, andstart your left lane change signal before moving outof the right lane to pass. When you are farenough ahead of the passed vehicle to see its frontin your inside mirror, activate your right lanechange signal and move back into the right lane.(Remember that your right outside mirror is convex.The vehicle you just passed may seem to befarther away from you than it really is.)
• Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time ontwo-lane roads. Reconsider before passing thenext vehicle.
• Do not overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly.Even though the brake lamps are not flashing, itmay be slowing down or starting to turn.
• If you are being passed, make it easy for thefollowing driver to get ahead of you. Perhapsyou can ease a little to the right.
Loss of ControlLet us review what driving experts say about whathappens when the three control systems (brakes,steering and acceleration) do not have enough frictionwhere the tires meet the road to do what the driverhas asked.
In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying to steerand constantly seek an escape route or area of lessdanger.
SkiddingIn a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonablecare suited to existing conditions, and by not“overdriving” those conditions. But skids are alwayspossible.
The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle’sthree control systems. In the braking skid, your wheelsare not rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too muchspeed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and losecornering force. And in the acceleration skid, too muchthrottle causes the driving wheels to spin.
A cornering skid is best handled by easing your foot offthe accelerator pedal.
4-14
If you have the Traction Assist System, remember: Ithelps avoid only the acceleration skid. If you do not havethis system, or if the system is off, then an accelerationskid is also best handled by easing your foot off theaccelerator pedal.
If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off theaccelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you wantthe vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough,your vehicle may straighten out. Always be readyfor a second skid if it occurs.
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,gravel or other material is on the road. For safety,you will want to slow down and adjust your driving tothese conditions. It is important to slow down on slipperysurfaces because stopping distance will be longer andvehicle control more limited.
While driving on a surface with reduced traction, tryyour best to avoid sudden steering, accelerationor braking (including engine braking by shifting to alower gear). Any sudden changes could cause the tiresto slide. You may not realize the surface is slipperyuntil your vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warningclues — such as enough water, ice or packed snowon the road to make a “mirrored surface” — and slowdown when you have any doubt.
Remember: Any anti-lock brake system (ABS) helpsavoid only the braking skid.
Off-Road Driving with YourFour-Wheel-Drive VehicleThis off-road guide is for vehicles that have four-wheeldrive. Also, see Braking on page 4-6. If your vehicledoes not have four-wheel drive, you should notdrive off-road unless you are on a level, solid surface.
Off-road driving can be great fun. But it does havesome definite hazards. The greatest of these is theterrain itself.
“Off-roading” means you have left the great NorthAmerican road system behind. Traffic lanes are notmarked. Curves are not banked. There are noroad signs. Surfaces can be slippery, rough, uphill ordownhill. In short, you have gone right back to nature.
Off-road driving involves some new skills. And thatis why it is very important that you read this guide. Youwill find many driving tips and suggestions. Thesewill help make your off-road driving safer and moreenjoyable.
4-15
Before You Go Off-RoadingThere are some things to do before you go out. Forexample, be sure to have all necessary maintenanceand service work done. Check to make sure allunderbody shields (if so equipped) are properlyattached.
Be sure you read all the information about yourfour-wheel-drive vehicle in this manual.
Is there enough fuel? Is the spare tire fully inflated? Arethe fluid levels up where they should be? What arethe local laws that apply to off-roading where you will bedriving? If you do not know, you should check withlaw enforcement people in the area. Will you beon someone’s private land? If so, be sure to get thenecessary permission.
Loading Your Vehicle for Off-RoadDrivingThere are some important things to remember abouthow to load your vehicle.
• The heaviest things should be on the load floor andforward of your rear axle. Put heavier items as farforward as you can.
• Be sure the load is secured properly, so driving onthe off-road terrain does not toss things around.
{CAUTION:
• Cargo on the load floor piled higher thanthe seatbacks can be thrown forwardduring a sudden stop. You or yourpassengers could be injured. Keep cargobelow the top of the seatbacks.
• Unsecured cargo on the load floor can betossed about when driving over roughterrain. You or your passengers can bestruck by flying objects. Secure the cargoproperly.
• Heavy loads on the roof raise the vehicle’scenter of gravity, making it more likely toroll over. You can be seriously or fatallyinjured if the vehicle rolls over. Put heavyloads inside the cargo area, not on theroof. Keep cargo in the cargo area as farforward and low as possible.
You will find other important information in this manual.See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-47, LuggageCarrier on page 2-44 and Tires on page 5-52.
4-16
Environmental ConcernsOff-road driving can provide wholesome and satisfyingrecreation. However, it also raises environmentalconcerns. We recognize these concerns and urge everyoff-roader to follow these basic rules for protectingthe environment:
• Always use established trails, roads and areas thathave been specially set aside for public off-roadrecreational driving; obey all posted regulations.
• Avoid any driving practice that could damagethe environment — shrubs, flowers, trees,grasses — or disturb wildlife (this includeswheel-spinning, breaking down trees orunnecessary driving through streams or over softground).
• Always carry a litter bag — make sure all refuse isremoved from any campsite before leaving.
• Take extreme care with open fires (wherepermitted), camp stoves and lanterns.
• Never park your vehicle over dry grass or othercombustible materials that could catch fire fromthe heat of the vehicle’s exhaust system.
Traveling to Remote AreasIt makes sense to plan your trip, especially when goingto a remote area. Know the terrain and plan yourroute. You are much less likely to get bad surprises.Get accurate maps of trails and terrain. Try to learn ofany blocked or closed roads.
It is also a good idea to travel with at least one othervehicle. If something happens to one of them, the othercan help quickly.
Does your vehicle have a winch? If so, be sure to readthe winch instructions. In a remote area, a winchcan be handy if you get stuck. But you will want to knowhow to use it properly.
Getting Familiar with Off-Road DrivingIt is a good idea to practice in an area that is safeand close to home before you go into the wilderness.Off-road driving does require some new and differentskills. Here is what we mean.
Tune your senses to different kinds of signals. Youreyes, for example, need to constantly sweep the terrainfor unexpected obstacles. Your ears need to listenfor unusual tire or engine sounds. With your arms,hands, feet and body, you will need to respond tovibrations and vehicle bounce.
4-17
Controlling your vehicle is the key to successful off-roaddriving. One of the best ways to control your vehicleis to control your speed. Here are some things to keepin mind. At higher speeds:
• you approach things faster and you have less timeto scan the terrain for obstacles.
• you have less time to react.
• you have more vehicle bounce when you drive overobstacles.
• you will need more distance for braking, especiallysince you are on an unpaved surface.
{CAUTION:
When you are driving off-road, bouncing andquick changes in direction can easily throwyou out of position. This could cause you tolose control and crash. So, whether you’redriving on or off the road, you and yourpassengers should wear safety belts.
Scanning the TerrainOff-road driving can take you over many different kindsof terrain. You need to be familiar with the terrainand its many different features. Here are some things toconsider.
Surface Conditions: Off-roading can take you overhard-packed dirt, gravel, rocks, grass, sand, mud, snowor ice. Each of these surfaces affects the steering,acceleration and braking of your vehicle in differentways. Depending upon the kind of surface you are on,you may experience slipping, sliding, wheel spinning,delayed acceleration, poor traction and longer brakingdistances.
Surface Obstacles: Unseen or hidden obstacles canbe hazardous. A rock, log, hole, rut or bump can startleyou if you are not prepared for them. Often theseobstacles are hidden by grass, bushes, snow or eventhe rise and fall of the terrain itself. Here are somethings to consider:• Is the path ahead clear?• Will the surface texture change abruptly up ahead?• Does the travel take you uphill or downhill?
(There is more discussion of these subjects later.)• Will you have to stop suddenly or change direction
quickly?
4-18
When you drive over obstacles or rough terrain, keep afirm grip on the steering wheel. Ruts, troughs orother surface features can jerk the wheel out of yourhands if you are not prepared.
When you drive over bumps, rocks, or other obstacles,your wheels can leave the ground. If this happens,even with one or two wheels, you can not control thevehicle as well or at all.
Because you will be on an unpaved surface, it isespecially important to avoid sudden acceleration,sudden turns or sudden braking.
In a way, off-road driving requires a different kind ofalertness from driving on paved roads and highways.There are no road signs, posted speed limits orsignal lights. You have to use your own good judgmentabout what is safe and what is not.
Drinking and driving can be very dangerous on anyroad. And this is certainly true for off-road driving. At thevery time you need special alertness and drivingskills, your reflexes, perceptions and judgment can beaffected by even a small amount of alcohol. Youcould have a serious — or even fatal — accident if youdrink and drive or ride with a driver who has beendrinking. See Drunken Driving on page 4-2.
Driving on Off-Road HillsOff-road driving often takes you up, down or across ahill. Driving safely on hills requires good judgmentand an understanding of what your vehicle can and cannot do. There are some hills that simply can not bedriven, no matter how well built the vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Many hills are simply too steep for any vehicle.If you drive up them, you will stall. If you drivedown them, you can not control your speed. Ifyou drive across them, you will roll over. Youcould be seriously injured or killed. If you haveany doubt about the steepness, do not drivethe hill.
4-19
Approaching a HillWhen you approach a hill, you need to decide if it isone of those hills that is just too steep to climb, descendor cross. Steepness can be hard to judge. On a verysmall hill, for example, there may be a smooth, constantincline with only a small change in elevation whereyou can easily see all the way to the top. On a large hill,the incline may get steeper as you near the top, butyou may not see this because the crest of the hillis hidden by bushes, grass or shrubs.Here are some other things to consider as you approacha hill.• Is there a constant incline, or does the hill get
sharply steeper in places?• Is there good traction on the hillside, or will the
surface cause tire slipping?• Is there a straight path up or down the hill so you
will not have to make turning maneuvers?• Are there obstructions on the hill that can block
your path (boulders, trees, logs or ruts)?• What is beyond the hill? Is there a cliff, an
embankment, a drop-off, a fence? Get out and walkthe hill if you do not know. It is the smart way tofind out.
• Is the hill simply too rough? Steep hills often haveruts, gullies, troughs and exposed rocks becausethey are more susceptible to the effects of erosion.
Driving UphillOnce you decide you can safely drive up the hill, youneed to take some special steps.• Use a low gear and get a firm grip on the
steering wheel.• Get a smooth start up the hill and try to maintain
your speed. Do not use more power than youneed, because you do not want your wheels to startspinning or sliding.
• Try to drive straight up the hill if at all possible. Ifthe path twists and turns, you might want to findanother route.
{CAUTION:
Turning or driving across steep hills can bedangerous. You could lose traction, slidesideways, and possibly roll over. You could beseriously injured or killed. When driving uphills, always try to go straight up.
• Ease up on your speed as you approach the top ofthe hill.
• Attach a flag to the vehicle to make you morevisible to approaching traffic on trails or hills.
4-20
• Sound the horn as you approach the top of the hillto let opposing traffic know you are there.
• Use your headlamps even during the day. Theymake you more visible to oncoming traffic.
{CAUTION:
Driving to the top (crest) of a hill at full speedcan cause an accident. There could be adrop-off, embankment, cliff, or even anothervehicle. You could be seriously injured orkilled. As you near the top of a hill, slow downand stay alert.
Q: What should I do if my vehicle stalls, or is aboutto stall, and I can not make it up the hill?
A: If this happens, there are some things you shoulddo, and there are some things you must not do.First, here is what you should do:
• Push the brake pedal to stop the vehicle and keepit from rolling backwards. Also, apply the parkingbrake.
• If your engine is still running, shift the transmissionto REVERSE (R), release the parking brake, andslowly back down the hill in REVERSE (R).
• If your engine has stopped running, you will need torestart it. With the brake pedal pressed and theparking brake still applied, shift the transmission toPARK (P) and restart the engine. Then, shift toREVERSE (R), release the parking brake, andslowly back down the hill as straight as possible inREVERSE (R).
• As you are backing down the hill, put your left handon the steering wheel at the 12 o’clock position.This way, you will be able to tell if your wheels arestraight and maneuver as you back down. It isbest that you back down the hill with your wheelsstraight rather than in the left or right direction.Turning the wheel too far to the left or rightwill increase the possibility of a rollover.
4-21
Here are some things you must not do if you stall, orare about to stall, when going up a hill.
• Never attempt to prevent a stall by shifting intoNEUTRAL (N) to “rev-up” the engine and regainforward momentum. This will not work. Your vehiclewill roll backwards very quickly and you could goout of control.Instead, apply the regular brake to stop the vehicle.Then apply the parking brake. Shift toREVERSE (R), release the parking brake, andslowly back straight down.
• Never attempt to turn around if you are about tostall when going up a hill. If the hill is steepenough to stall your vehicle, it is steep enough tocause you to roll over if you turn around. If you cannot make it up the hill, you must back straightdown the hill.
Q: Suppose, after stalling, I try to back down thehill and decide I just can not do it. What shouldI do?
A: Set the parking brake, put your transmission inPARK (P) and turn off the engine. Leave thevehicle and go get some help. Exit on the uphillside and stay clear of the path the vehiclewould take if it rolled downhill. Do not shift thetransfer case to NEUTRAL when you leavethe vehicle. Leave it in some gear.
{CAUTION:
Shifting the transfer case to NEUTRAL cancause your vehicle to roll even if thetransmission is in PARK (P). This is becausethe NEUTRAL position on the transfer caseoverrides the transmission. You or someoneelse could be injured. If you are going to leaveyour vehicle, set the parking brake and shiftthe transmission to PARK (P). But do not shiftthe transfer case to NEUTRAL. Leave thetransfer case in the 2 Wheel High, 4 High or4 Low position.
4-22
Driving DownhillWhen off-roading takes you downhill, you will want toconsider a number of things:
• How steep is the downhill? Will I be able to maintainvehicle control?
• What is the surface like? Smooth? Rough?Slippery? Hard-packed dirt? Gravel?
• Are there hidden surface obstacles? Ruts? Logs?Boulders?
• What is at the bottom of the hill? Is there a hiddencreek bank or even a river bottom with large rocks?
If you decide you can go down a hill safely, then try tokeep your vehicle headed straight down, and use alow gear. This way, engine drag can help your brakesand they will not have to do all the work. Descendslowly, keeping your vehicle under control at all times.
{CAUTION:
Heavy braking when going down a hill cancause your brakes to overheat and fade. Thiscould cause loss of control and a seriousaccident. Apply the brakes lightly whendescending a hill and use a low gear to keepvehicle speed under control.
Q: Are there some things I should not do whendriving down a hill?
A: Yes! These are important because if you ignorethem you could lose control and have a seriousaccident.
• When driving downhill, avoid turns that take youacross the incline of the hill. A hill that is not toosteep to drive down may be too steep to driveacross. You could roll over if you do not drivestraight down.
• Never go downhill with the transmission inNEUTRAL (N). This is called “free-wheeling.” Yourbrakes will have to do all the work and couldoverheat and fade.
4-23
Q: Am I likely to stall when going downhill?
A: It is much more likely to happen going uphill. But ifit happens going downhill, here is what to do.
• Stop your vehicle by applying the regular brakes.Apply the parking brake.
• Shift to PARK (P) and, while still braking, restart theengine.
• Shift back to a low gear, release the parking brake,and drive straight down.
• If the engine will not start, get out and get help.
Driving Across an InclineSooner or later, an off-road trail will probably go acrossthe incline of a hill. If this happens, you have todecide whether to try to drive across the incline. Hereare some things to consider:• A hill that can be driven straight up or down may be
too steep to drive across. When you go straight up ordown a hill, the length of the wheel base (thedistance from the front wheels to the rear wheels)reduces the likelihood the vehicle will tumble endover end. But when you drive across an incline, themuch more narrow track width (the distance betweenthe left and right wheels) may not prevent the vehiclefrom tilting and rolling over. Also, driving across anincline puts more weight on the downhill wheels. Thiscould cause a downhill slide or a rollover.
• Surface conditions can be a problem when you driveacross a hill. Loose gravel, muddy spots, or even wetgrass can cause your tires to slip sideways, downhill.If the vehicle slips sideways, it can hit something thatwill trip it (a rock, a rut, etc.) and roll over.
• Hidden obstacles can make the steepness of theincline even worse. If you drive across a rock with theuphill wheels, or if the downhill wheels drop into a rutor depression, your vehicle can tilt even more.
For reasons like these, you need to decide carefullywhether to try to drive across an incline. Just becausethe trail goes across the incline does not mean youhave to drive it. The last vehicle to try it mighthave rolled over.
{CAUTION:
Driving across an incline that is too steep willmake your vehicle roll over. You could beseriously injured or killed. If you have anydoubt about the steepness of the incline, donot drive across it. Find another route instead.
4-24
Q: What if I am driving across an incline that is nottoo steep, but I hit some loose gravel and startto slide downhill. What should I do?
A: If you feel your vehicle starting to slide sideways,turn downhill. This should help straighten out thevehicle and prevent the side slipping. However,a much better way to prevent this is to get out and“walk the course” so you know what the surfaceis like before you drive it.
Stalling on an InclineIf your vehicle stalls when you are crossing an incline,be sure you (and your passengers) get out on the uphillside, even if the door there is harder to open. If youget out on the downhill side and the vehicle starts to rollover, you will be right in its path.
If you have to walk down the slope, stay out of the paththe vehicle will take if it does roll over.
{CAUTION:
Getting out on the downhill (low) side of avehicle stopped across an incline isdangerous. If the vehicle rolls over, you couldbe crushed or killed. Always get out on theuphill (high) side of the vehicle and stay wellclear of the rollover path.
4-25
Driving in Mud, Sand, Snow or IceWhen you drive in mud, snow or sand, your wheels willnot get good traction. You can not accelerate asquickly, turning is more difficult, and you will need longerbraking distances.
It is best to use a low gear when you are in mud — thedeeper the mud, the lower the gear. In really deepmud, the idea is to keep your vehicle moving so you donot get stuck.
When you drive on sand, you will sense a change inwheel traction. But it will depend upon how looselypacked the sand is. On loosely packed sand (ason beaches or sand dunes) your tires will tend to sinkinto the sand. This has an effect on steering,accelerating and braking. Drive at a reduced speed andavoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers.
Hard packed snow and ice offer the worst tire traction.On these surfaces, it is very easy to lose control.On wet ice, for example, the traction is so poor that youwill have difficulty accelerating. And if you do getmoving, poor steering and difficult braking can causeyou to slide out of control.
{CAUTION:
Driving on frozen lakes, ponds or rivers can bedangerous. Underwater springs, currentsunder the ice, or sudden thaws can weaken theice. Your vehicle could fall through the ice andyou and your passengers could drown. Driveyour vehicle on safe surfaces only.
Driving in WaterHeavy rain can mean flash flooding, and flood watersdemand extreme caution.
Find out how deep the water is before you drive throughit. If it is deep enough to cover your wheel hubs,axles or exhaust pipe, do not try it — you probably willnot get through. Also, water that deep can damageyour axle and other vehicle parts.
4-26
If the water is not too deep, drive slowly through it. Atfaster speeds, water splashes on your ignitionsystem and your vehicle can stall. Stalling can alsooccur if you get your tailpipe under water. And, as longas your tailpipe is under water, you will never beable to start your engine. When you go through water,remember that when your brakes get wet, it maytake you longer to stop.
{CAUTION:
Driving through rushing water can bedangerous. Deep water can sweep your vehicledownstream and you and your passengerscould drown. If it is only shallow water, it canstill wash away the ground from under yourtires, and you could lose traction and rollthe vehicle over. Do not drive throughrushing water.
See Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads on page 4-29 formore information on driving through water.
After Off-Road DrivingRemove any brush or debris that has collected on theunderbody, chassis or under the hood. Theseaccumulations can be a fire hazard.
After operation in mud or sand, have the brake liningscleaned and checked. These substances can causeglazing and uneven braking. Check the body structure,steering, suspension, wheels, tires and exhaustsystem for damage. Also, check the fuel lines andcooling system for any leakage.
Your vehicle will require more frequent service due tooff-road use. Refer to the Maintenance Schedulefor additional information.
4-27
Driving at Night
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving.One reason is that some drivers are likely to beimpaired — by alcohol or drugs, with night visionproblems, or by fatigue.
Here are some tips on night driving.
• Drive defensively.
• Do not drink and drive.
• Since you can not see as well, you may need toslow down and keep more space between youand other vehicles.
• Slow down, especially on higher speed roads. Yourheadlamps can light up only so much road ahead.
• In remote areas, watch for animals.
• If you are tired, pull off the road in a safe placeand rest.
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime. Butas we get older these differences increase. A50-year-old driver may require at least twice as muchlight to see the same thing at night as a 20-year-old.
What you do in the daytime can also affect yournight vision. For example, if you spend the day in brightsunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses. Youreyes will have less trouble adjusting to night. But if youare driving, do not wear sunglasses at night. Theymay cut down on glare from headlamps, but they alsomake a lot of things invisible.
4-28
You can be temporarily blinded by approachingheadlamps. It can take a second or two, or even severalseconds, for your eyes to readjust to the dark. Whenyou are faced with severe glare (as from a driverwho does not lower the high beams, or a vehicle withmisaimed headlamps), slow down a little. Avoidstaring directly into the approaching headlamps.
Keep your windshield and all the glass on your vehicleclean — inside and out. Glare at night is made muchworse by dirt on the glass. Even the inside of the glasscan build up a film caused by dust. Dirty glass makeslights dazzle and flash more than clean glass would,making the pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.
Remember that your headlamps light up far less of aroadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keepyour eyes moving; that way, it is easier to pick out dimlylighted objects. Just as your headlamps should bechecked regularly for proper aim, so should your eyesbe examined regularly. Some drivers suffer fromnight blindness — the inability to see in dim light — andare not even aware of it.
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On a wetroad, you can not stop, accelerate or turn as wellbecause your tire-to-road traction is not as good as ondry roads. And, if your tires do not have much treadleft, you will get even less traction. It is always wise togo slower and be cautious if rain starts to fall whileyou are driving. The surface may get wet suddenly whenyour reflexes are tuned for driving on dry pavement.
4-29
The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see. Even if yourwindshield wiper blades are in good shape, a heavyrain can make it harder to see road signs andtraffic signals, pavement markings, the edge of the roadand even people walking.
It is wise to keep your wiping equipment in good shapeand keep your windshield washer tank filled withwasher fluid. Replace your windshield wiper insertswhen they show signs of streaking or missing areas onthe windshield, or when strips of rubber start toseparate from the inserts.
Driving too fast through large water puddles or evengoing through some car washes can cause problems,too. The water may affect your brakes. Try to avoidpuddles. But if you can not, try to slow down before youhit them.
{CAUTION:
Wet brakes can cause accidents. They will notwork as well in a quick stop and may causepulling to one side. You could lose control ofthe vehicle.
After driving through a large puddle of wateror a car wash, apply your brake pedal lightlyuntil your brakes work normally.
4-30
HydroplaningHydroplaning is dangerous. So much water can build upunder your tires that they can actually ride on thewater. This can happen if the road is wet enough andyou are going fast enough. When your vehicle ishydroplaning, it has little or no contact with the road.
Hydroplaning does not happen often. But it can if yourtires do not have much tread or if the pressure inone or more is low. It can happen if a lot of water isstanding on the road. If you can see reflectionsfrom trees, telephone poles or other vehicles, andraindrops “dimple” the water’s surface, there could behydroplaning.
Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds. Therejust is not a hard and fast rule about hydroplaning.The best advice is to slow down when it is raining.
Driving Through Deep Standing Water
Notice: If you drive too quickly through deeppuddles or standing water, water can come inthrough your engine’s air intake and badly damageyour engine. Never drive through water that isslightly lower than the underbody of your vehicle. Ifyou can not avoid deep puddles or standingwater, drive through them very slowly.
Driving Through Flowing Water
{CAUTION:
Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces.If you try to drive through flowing water, as youmight at a low water crossing, your vehicle canbe carried away. As little as six inches offlowing water can carry away a smaller vehicle.If this happens, you and other vehicleoccupants could drown. Do not ignore policewarning signs, and otherwise be very cautiousabout trying to drive through flowing water.
Some Other Rainy Weather Tips• Besides slowing down, allow some extra following
distance. And be especially careful when youpass another vehicle. Allow yourself more clearroom ahead, and be prepared to have yourview restricted by road spray.
• Have good tires with proper tread depth. See Tireson page 5-52.
4-31
City Driving
One of the biggest problems with city streets is theamount of traffic on them. You will want to watch out forwhat the other drivers are doing and pay attention totraffic signals.
Here are ways to increase your safety in city driving:
• Know the best way to get to where you aregoing. Get a city map and plan your trip intoan unknown part of the city just as you would for across-country trip.
• Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscrossmost large cities. You will save time and energy.See Freeway Driving on page 4-33.
• Treat a green light as a warning signal. A trafficlight is there because the corner is busy enoughto need it. When a light turns green, and just beforeyou start to move, check both ways for vehiclesthat have not cleared the intersection or maybe running the red light.
4-32
Freeway Driving
Mile for mile, freeways (also called thruways, parkways,expressways, turnpikes or superhighways) are thesafest of all roads. But they have their own special rules.
The most important advice on freeway driving is: Keepup with traffic and keep to the right. Drive at thesame speed most of the other drivers are driving.Too-fast or too-slow driving breaks a smooth traffic flow.Treat the left lane on a freeway as a passing lane.
At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leads tothe freeway. If you have a clear view of the freeway asyou drive along the entrance ramp, you should beginto check traffic. Try to determine where you expectto blend with the flow. Try to merge into the gap at closeto the prevailing speed. Switch on your turn signal,check your mirrors and glance over your shoulder asoften as necessary. Try to blend smoothly with thetraffic flow.
Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speed to theposted limit or to the prevailing rate if it is slower.Stay in the right lane unless you want to pass.
Before changing lanes, check your mirrors. Then useyour turn signal.
4-33
Just before you leave the lane, glance quickly over yourshoulder to make sure there is not another vehicle inyour “blind” spot.
Once you are moving on the freeway, make certain youallow a reasonable following distance. Expect tomove slightly slower at night.
When you want to leave the freeway, move to theproper lane well in advance. If you miss your exit, donot, under any circumstances, stop and back up. Driveon to the next exit.
The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quite sharply.The exit speed is usually posted.
Reduce your speed according to your speedometer, notto your sense of motion. After driving for any distanceat higher speeds, you may tend to think you aregoing slower than you actually are.
Before Leaving on a Long TripMake sure you are ready. Try to be well rested. If youmust start when you are not fresh — such as aftera day’s work — do not plan to make too many miles thatfirst part of the journey. Wear comfortable clothingand shoes you can easily drive in.
Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep itserviced and maintained, it is ready to go. If it needsservice, have it done before starting out. Of course, youwill find experienced and able service experts in GMdealerships all across North America. They will be readyand willing to help if you need it.
4-34
Here are some things you can check before a trip:
• Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoir full? Areall windows clean inside and outside?
• Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?
• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have you checkedall levels?
• Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lenses clean?
• Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enough forlong-distance driving? Are the tires all inflated to therecommended pressure?
• Weather Forecasts: What is the weather outlookalong your route? Should you delay your trip ashort time to avoid a major storm system?
• Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?
Highway HypnosisIs there actually such a condition as “highwayhypnosis”? Or is it just plain falling asleep at the wheel?Call it highway hypnosis, lack of awareness, orwhatever.
There is something about an easy stretch of road withthe same scenery, along with the hum of the tires on theroad, the drone of the engine, and the rush of thewind against the vehicle that can make you sleepy. Donot let it happen to you! If it does, your vehicle canleave the road in less than a second, and you couldcrash and be injured.
What can you do about highway hypnosis? First, beaware that it can happen.
Then here are some tips:
• Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, with acomfortably cool interior.
• Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead andto the sides. Check your mirrors and yourinstruments frequently.
• If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest,service or parking area and take a nap, get someexercise, or both. For safety, treat drowsinesson the highway as an emergency.
4-35
Hill and Mountain Roads
Driving on steep hills or mountains is different fromdriving in flat or rolling terrain.
If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you areplanning to visit there, here are some tips that can makeyour trips safer and more enjoyable.
See Off-Road Driving with Your Four-Wheel-DriveVehicle on page 4-15 for information about drivingoff-road.
• Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check all fluidlevels and also the brakes, tires, cooling systemand transmission. These parts can work hardon mountain roads.
• Know how to go down hills. The most importantthing to know is this: let your engine do some ofthe slowing down. Shift to a lower gear when you godown a steep or long hill.
{CAUTION:
If you do not shift down, your brakes could getso hot that they would not work well. Youwould then have poor braking or even nonegoing down a hill. You could crash. Shift downto let your engine assist your brakes on asteep downhill slope.
4-36
{CAUTION:
Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with theignition off is dangerous. Your brakes will haveto do all the work of slowing down. They couldget so hot that they would not work well. Youwould then have poor braking or even nonegoing down a hill. You could crash. Alwayshave your engine running and your vehicle ingear when you go downhill.
• Know how to go uphill. You may want to shift down toa lower gear. The lower gears help cool your engineand transmission, and you can climb the hill better.
• Stay in your own lane when driving on two-laneroads in hills or mountains. Do not swing wideor cut across the center of the road. Drive at speedsthat let you stay in your own lane.
• As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. Therecould be something in your lane, like a stalled car oran accident.
• You may see highway signs on mountains thatwarn of special problems. Examples are longgrades, passing or no-passing zones, a falling rocksarea or winding roads. Be alert to these and takeappropriate action.
Winter Driving
Here are some tips for winter driving:
• Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.
• You may want to put winter emergency supplies inyour vehicle.
4-37
Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, asupply of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some winterouter clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a redcloth and reflective warning triangles. And, if you will bedriving under severe conditions, include a small bagof sand, a piece of old carpet or a couple of burlap bagsto help provide traction. Be sure you properly securethese items in your vehicle.
Driving on Snow or IceMost of the time, those places where your tires meetthe road probably have good traction.
However, if there is snow or ice between your tires andthe road, you can have a very slippery situation. Youwill have a lot less traction or “grip” and will need to bevery careful.
What is the worst time for this? “Wet ice.” Very coldsnow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on. But wetice can be even more trouble because it may offerthe least traction of all. You can get wet ice when it isabout freezing (32°F; 0°C) and freezing rain beginsto fall. Try to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sandcrews can get there.
4-38
Whatever the condition — smooth ice, packed, blowingor loose snow — drive with caution.
If you have traction assist, keep the system on. It willimprove your ability to accelerate when driving ona slippery road. But you can turn the traction system offif your vehicle ever gets stuck in sand, mud, ice orsnow. See If You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snowon page 4-42. Even though your vehicle has a tractionsystem, you will want to slow down and adjust yourdriving to the road conditions. See Traction AssistSystem (TAS) on page 4-9.
If you do not have a traction system, accelerate gently.Try not to break the fragile traction. If you acceleratetoo fast, the drive wheels will spin and polish the surfaceunder the tires even more.
Your anti-lock brakes improve your vehicle’s stabilitywhen you make a hard stop on a slippery road.Even though you have an anti-lock braking system, youwill want to begin stopping sooner than you would ondry pavement. See Braking on page 4-6.
• Allow greater following distance on anyslippery road.
• Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fineuntil you hit a spot that is covered with ice. Onan otherwise clear road, ice patches may appear inshaded areas where the sun can not reach:around clumps of trees, behind buildings or underbridges. Sometimes the surface of a curve oran overpass may remain icy when the surroundingroads are clear. If you see a patch of ice aheadof you, brake before you are on it. Try not to brakewhile you are actually on the ice, and avoidsudden steering maneuvers.
4-39
If You Are Caught in a Blizzard
If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in aserious situation. You should probably stay withyour vehicle unless you know for sure that you are nearhelp and you can hike through the snow. Here aresome things to do to summon help and keep yourselfand your passengers safe:
• Turn on your hazard flashers.
• Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police thatyou have been stopped by the snow.
• Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you.If you have no blankets or extra clothing, makebody insulators from newspapers, burlap bags, rags,floor mats — anything you can wrap aroundyourself or tuck under your clothing to keep warm.
You can run the engine to keep warm, but be careful.
4-40
{CAUTION:
Snow can trap exhaust gases under yourvehicle. This can cause deadly CO (carbonmonoxide) gas to get inside. CO couldovercome you and kill you. You can not see itor smell it, so you might not know it is in yourvehicle. Clear away snow from around thebase of your vehicle, especially any that isblocking your exhaust pipe. And check aroundagain from time to time to be sure snow doesnot collect there.
Open a window just a little on the side of thevehicle that is away from the wind. This willhelp keep CO out.
Run your engine only as long as you must. This savesfuel. When you run the engine, make it go a littlefaster than just idle. That is, push the acceleratorslightly. This uses less fuel for the heat that you get andit keeps the battery charged. You will need awell-charged battery to restart the vehicle, and possiblyfor signaling later on with your headlamps. Let theheater run for a while.
Then, shut the engine off and close the window almostall the way to preserve the heat. Start the engineagain and repeat this only when you feel reallyuncomfortable from the cold. But do it as little aspossible. Preserve the fuel as long as you can. To helpkeep warm, you can get out of the vehicle and dosome fairly vigorous exercises every half hour or so untilhelp comes.
4-41
If You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud,Ice or SnowIn order to free your vehicle when it is stuck, you willneed to spin the wheels, but you do not want tospin your wheels too fast. The method known as“rocking” can help you get out when you are stuck, butyou must use caution.
{CAUTION:
If you let your tires spin at high speed, theycan explode, and you or others could beinjured. And, the transmission or other parts ofthe vehicle can overheat. That could cause anengine compartment fire or other damage.When you are stuck, spin the wheels as littleas possible. Do not spin the wheels above35 mph (55 km/h) as shown on thespeedometer.
Notice: Spinning your wheels can destroy parts ofyour vehicle as well as the tires. If you spin thewheels too fast while shifting your transmissionback and forth, you can destroy your transmission.
For information about using tire chains on yourvehicle, see Tire Chains on page 5-67.
Rocking Your Vehicle To Get It OutFirst, turn your steering wheel left and right. That willclear the area around your front wheels. If you have afour-wheel-drive vehicle, shift into 4HI. Then shiftback and forth between REVERSE (R) and a forwardgear, spinning the wheels as little as possible. Releasethe accelerator pedal while you shift, and press lightlyon the accelerator pedal when the transmission isin gear. By slowly spinning your wheels in the forwardand reverse directions, you will cause a rockingmotion that may free your vehicle. If that does not getyou out after a few tries, you may need to be towed out.Or, you can use your recovery hooks if your vehiclehas them. If you do need to be towed out, see TowingYour Vehicle on page 4-44.
4-42
Using the Recovery Hooks
Your vehicle may be equipped with recovery hooks. Therecovery hooks are provided at the front of yourvehicle. You may need to use them if you’re stuckoff-road and need to be pulled to some place where youcan continue driving.
{CAUTION:
These hooks, when used, are under a lot offorce. Always pull the vehicle straight out.Never pull on the hooks at a sideways angle.The hooks could break off and you or otherscould be injured from the chain or cablesnapping back.
Notice: Never use recovery hooks to tow thevehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged and it wouldnot be covered by warranty.
4-43
Towing
Towing Your VehicleConsult your dealer or a professional towing service ifyou need to have your disabled vehicle towed. SeeRoadside Assistance Program on page 7-6.
If you want to tow your vehicle behind another vehiclefor recreational purposes (such as behind a motorhome),see “Recreational Vehicle Towing” following.
Recreational Vehicle TowingRecreational vehicle towing means towing your vehiclebehind another vehicle – such as behind a motorhome.The two most common types of recreational vehicletowing are known as “dinghy towing” (towing yourvehicle with all four wheels on the ground) and “dollytowing” (towing your vehicle with two wheels onthe ground and two wheels up on a device known asa “dolly”).
With the proper preparation and equipment, manyvehicles can be towed in these ways. See “DinghyTowing” and “Dolly Towing,” following. You mayalso need brakes for the vehicle being towed. See yourdealer for additional trailering information.
Here are some important things to consider before youdo recreational vehicle towing:
• What’s the trailering capacity of the towing vehicle?Be sure you read the tow vehicle manufacturer’srecommendations.
• How far will you tow? Some vehicles haverestrictions on how far and how long they can betowed.
• Do you have the proper towing equipment? Seeyour dealer or trailering professional for additionaladvice and equipment recommendations.
• Is your vehicle ready to be towed? Just as youwould prepare your vehicle for a long trip, you’llwant to make sure your vehicle is prepared to betowed. See Before Leaving on a Long Trip onpage 4-34.
4-44
Dinghy Towing
When towing your vehicle, turn the ignition to LOCK. Toprevent your battery from draining while towing,remove the Ignition A and the Ignition B fuses from theengine compartment fuse block. Be sure to reinstallthe fuse when you reach your destination.
Two-Wheel-Drive Vehicles
Notice: If you tow your vehicle with all four wheelson the ground, the drivetrain components couldbe damaged. The repairs would not be covered byyour warranty. Do not tow your vehicle with allfour wheels on the ground.
Two-wheel-drive vehicles should not be towed with allfour wheels on the ground. Two-wheel-drivetransmissions have no provisions for internal lubricationwhile being towed. To properly tow these vehicles,they should be placed on a platform trailer, or dollytowed. See “Dolly Towing” following for moreinformation.
4-45
Four-Wheel-Drive VehiclesFour-wheel-drive vehicles can be dinghy towed if youfollow the proper procedures. The transmission hasno provisions for internal lubrication while being towed,so it is important that you follow all the steps listedin this manual to dinghy tow your four-wheel-drivevehicle.
Use the following procedure to tow your vehicle:
1. Shift the transmission to PARK (P).
2. Turn the engine off, but leave the ignition on.
3. Firmly set the parking brake.
4. Securely attach the vehicle being towed to the towvehicle.
{CAUTION:
Shifting a four-wheel-drive vehicle’s transfercase into NEUTRAL can cause your vehicle toroll even if the transmission is in Park (P). Youor others could be injured. Make sure theparking brake is firmly set before you shift thetransfer case to NEUTRAL.
5. Shift the transfer case to NEUTRAL (N). SeeFour-Wheel Drive on page 2-24 for the properprocedure to select the NEUTRAL position for yourvehicle.
6. Release the parking brake only after the vehiclebeing towed is firmly attached to the towingvehicle.
7. Turn the ignition to off and leave the steeringcolumn unlocked.
Dolly TowingTwo-Wheel-Drive VehiclesTwo-wheel-drive vehicles should not be dolly towed.Two-wheel-drive transmissions have no provisionsfor internal lubrication while being towed. To properlytow these vehicles, they should be placed on a platformtrailer with all four wheels off the ground.
4-46
Four-Wheel-Drive VehiclesFour-wheel-drive vehicles can be dolly towed with therear wheels on the ground.
Use the following procedure to tow your vehicle:
1. Drive the vehicle onto the tow dolly.
2. Shift the transmission to PARK (P) .
3. Turn the engine off, but leave the ignition on.
4. Firmly set the parking brake.
5. Securely attach the vehicle being towed to the dolly.
{CAUTION:
Shifting a four-wheel-drive vehicle’s transfercase into NEUTRAL can cause your vehicle toroll even if the transmission is in Park (P). Youor others could be injured. Make sure theparking brake is firmly set before you shift thetransfer case to NEUTRAL.
6. Shift the transfer case to NEUTRAL. SeeFour-Wheel Drive on page 2-24 for the properprocedure to select the NEUTRAL position for yourvehicle.
7. Release the parking brake only after the vehiclebeing towed is firmly attached to the towing vehicle.
8. Turn the ignition off and lock the steering column.
Loading Your VehicleIt is very important to know how much weight yourvehicle can carry. This weight is called the vehiclecapacity weight and includes the weight of all occupants,cargo and all nonfactory-installed options. Two labelson your vehicle show how much weight it may properlycarry, the Tire and Loading Information label and theCertification/Tire label.
{CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than theGVWR, or either the maximum front or rearGAWR. If you do, parts on your vehicle canbreak, and it can change the way your vehiclehandles. These could cause you to losecontrol and crash. Also, overloading canshorten the life of your vehicle.
4-47
Tire and Loading Information Label
A. Vehicle Capacity Weight
The Tire and Loading Information label is attached tothe center pillar, near the driver’s door latch. Vehicleswithout a center pillar will have the Tire and LoadingInformation label attached to the driver’s door edge. Thislabel lists the number of people that can be in yourvehicle and the total weight it can carry. This weight iscalled the vehicle capacity weight.
The Tire and Loading Information label also tells youthe size and recommended inflation pressure forthe original equipment tires on your vehicle. For moreinformation on tires and inflation see Tires on page 5-52and Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-60.
If your vehicle does not have the Tire and LoadingInformation label, the Certification/Tire label shows thetire size and recommended inflation pressuresneeded to obtain the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating(GVWR) and the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) forthe front and rear axles. See “Certification/Tire Label”later in this section.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXXpounds” on your vehicle placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver andpassengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver andpassengers from XXX kilograms or XXX pounds.
4-48
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount ofcargo and luggage load capacity. For example, ifthe “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will befive 150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, theamount of available cargo and luggage loadcapacity is 650 lbs. (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) =650 lbs.).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage andcargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weightmay not safely exceed the available cargoand luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the load fromyour trailer will be transferred to your vehicle.Consult this manual to determine how this reducesthe available cargo and luggage load capacity ofyour vehicle.
See Towing a Trailer on page 4-53 for importantinformation on towing a trailer, towing safety rules andtrailering tips.
Loading Your VehicleItem Description Total
A Vehicle Capacity Weightfor Example 1=
1,000 lbs(453 kg)
BSubtract Occupant
Weight 150 lbs(68 kg) × 2 =
300 lbs (136 kg)
C Available Occupant andCargo Weight = 700 lbs. (317 kg)
Example 1
4-49
Loading Your VehicleItem Description Total
A Vehicle Capacity Weightfor Example 2 =
1,000 lbs(488 kg)
BSubtract Occupant
Weight 150 lbs(68 kg) × 5 =
750 lbs (340 kg)
C Available CargoWeight = 250 lbs. (113 kg)
Loading Your VehicleItem Description Total
A Vehicle Capacity Weightfor Example 3 =
1,000 lbs(453 kg)
BSubtract Occupant
Weight 200 lbs(91 kg) × 5 =
1,000 lbs(453 kg)
C Available CargoWeight = 0 lbs. (0 kg)
Refer to your vehicle’s tire and loading information labelfor specific information about your vehicle’s capacityweight and seating positions. The combined weight ofthe driver, passengers and cargo should neverexceed your vehicle’s capacity weight.
Example 2 Example 3
4-50
Certification/Tire Label
The Certification/Tire label is found on the driver’s dooredge, above the door latch. The label shows thesize of your original tires and the inflation pressuresneeded to obtain the gross weight capacity of yourvehicle. This is called the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating(GVWR). The GVWR includes the weight of thevehicle, all occupants, fuel, cargo and trailer tongueweight, if pulling a trailer.
The Certification/Tire label also tells you the maximumweights for the front and rear axles, called GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR). To find out the actual loadson your front and rear axles, you need to go to a
weigh station and weigh your vehicle. Your dealer canhelp you with this. Be sure to spread out your loadequally on both sides of the centerline.
Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle, or the GAWRfor either the front or rear axle.
And, if you do have a heavy load, you should spreadit out.
Similar appearing vehicles may have different GVWRsand payloads. Please note the Certification/Tirelabel on your truck or consult your dealer for additionaldetails.
{CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than theGVWR, or either the maximum front or rearGAWR. If you do, parts on your vehicle canbreak, and it can change the way your vehiclehandles. These could cause you to losecontrol and crash. Also, overloading canshorten the life of your vehicle.
Using heavier suspension components to get addeddurability might not change your weight ratings. Ask yourdealer to help you load your vehicle the right way.
4-51
Notice: Overloading your vehicle may causedamage. Repairs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Do not overload your vehicle.
If you put things inside your vehicle — like suitcases,tools, packages, or anything else — they will go as fastas the vehicle goes. If you have to stop or turnquickly, or if there is a crash, they’ll keep going.
{CAUTION:
Things you put inside your vehicle can strikeand injure people in a sudden stop or turn, orin a crash.
• Put things in the cargo area of yourvehicle. Try to spread the weight evenly.
• Never stack heavier things, like suitcases,inside the vehicle so that some of themare above the tops of the seats.
• Do not leave an unsecured child restraintin your vehicle.
CAUTION: (Continued)
CAUTION: (Continued)
• When you carry something inside thevehicle, secure it whenever you can.
• Do not leave a seat folded down unlessyou need to.
There’s also important loading information for off-roaddriving in this manual.
Adding a Snow Plow or SimilarEquipmentYour vehicle was neither designed nor intended for asnow plow.
Notice: Adding a snow plow or similar equipmentto your vehicle can damage it, and the repairs wouldnot be covered by warranty. Do not install a snowplow or similar equipment on your vehicle.
4-52
Towing a Trailer
{CAUTION:
If you do not use the correct equipment anddrive properly, you can lose control when youpull a trailer. For example, if the trailer is tooheavy, the brakes may not work well — or evenat all. You and your passengers could beseriously injured. You may also damage yourvehicle; the resulting repairs would not becovered by your warranty. Pull a trailer only ifyou have followed all the steps in this section.Ask your dealer for advice and informationabout towing a trailer with your vehicle.
Notice: Pulling a trailer improperly can damageyour vehicle and result in costly repairs that wouldnot be covered by your warranty. Always followthe instructions in this section and check with yourdealer for more information about towing a trailerwith your vehicle.
To identify the trailering capacity of your vehicle, youshould read the information in “Weight of the Trailer” thatappears later in this section.
Trailering is different than just driving your vehicle byitself. Trailering means changes in acceleration, braking,handling, durability and fuel economy. Successful,safe trailering takes correct equipment, and it has to beused properly.
That’s the reason for this part. In it are many time-tested,important trailering tips and safety rules. Many ofthese are important for your safety and that of yourpassengers. So please read this section carefully beforeyou pull a trailer.
4-53
If You Do Decide To Pull A TrailerIf you do, here are some important points:
• There are many different laws, including speed limitrestrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sureyour rig will be legal, not only where you livebut also where you’ll be driving. A good source forthis information can be state or provincial police.
• Consider using a sway control. See “Hitches” laterin this section.
• Don’t tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles(800 km) your new vehicle is driven. Your engine,axle or other parts could be damaged.
• Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) that youtow a trailer, don’t drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)and don’t make starts at full throttle. This helps yourengine and other parts of your vehicle wear in atthe heavier loads.
• You can tow in DRIVE (D). You may want to shiftthe transmission to THIRD (3) or, if necessary, alower gear selection if the transmission shiftstoo often (e.g., under heavy loads and/or hillyconditions).
Three important considerations have to do with weight:
• the weight of the trailer,
• the weight of the trailer tongue
• and the weight on your vehicle’s tires.
Weight of the TrailerHow heavy can a trailer safely be?
It depends on how you plan to use your rig. Forexample, speed, altitude, road grades, outsidetemperature and how much your vehicle is used to pulla trailer are all important. And, it can also dependon any special equipment that you have on your vehicle.
4-54
Look in the following chart to find the maximum trailer weight for your vehicle.
Vehicle Axle Ratio Max.Trailer Wt. *GCWR
2WD TrailBlazer (L6 Engine)3.42 5,300 lbs (2 404 kg) 10,000 lbs. (4 536 kg)3.73 5,700 lbs. (2 585 kg) 10,500 lbs (4 763 kg)4.10 6,200 lbs. (2 812 kg) 11,000 lbs. (4 990 kg)
4WD TrailBlazer (L6 Engine)3.42 5,100 lbs. (2 313 kg) 10,000 lbs. (4 536 kg)3.73 5,500 lbs. (2 495 kg) 10,500 lbs. (4 763 kg)4.10 6,100 lbs. (2 767 kg) 11,000 lbs. (4 990 kg)
2WD TrailBlazer EXT (L6 Engine)3.42 5,000 lbs. (2 268 kg) 10,000 lbs. (4 536 kg)3.73 5,500 lbs. (2 495 kg) 10,500 lbs. (4 763 kg)4.10 6,000 lbs. (2 722 kg) 11,000 lbs. (4 990 kg)
4WD TrailBlazer EXT (L6 Engine)3.42 4,800 lbs. (2 177 kg) 10,000 lbs. (4 536 kg)3.73 5,300 lbs. (2 404 kg) 10,500 lbs. (4 763 kg)4.10 5,800 lbs. (2 631 kg) 11,000 lbs. (4 990 kg)
2WD TrailBlazer EXT (V8 Engine)3.42 5,900 lbs. (2 676 kg) 11,000 lbs. (4 990 kg)3.73 6,800 lbs. (3 084 kg) 12,500 lbs. (5 670 kg)
4WD TrailBlazer EXT (V8 Engine)3.42 5,700 lbs. (2 585 kg) 11,000 lbs. (4 990 kg)3.73 6,300 lbs. (2 858 kg) 12,500 lbs. (5 670 kg)
*The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle andtrailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment and conversion. The GCWR for your vehicle should not beexceeded.
4-55
You can ask your dealer for our trailering information oradvice, or you can write us at the address listed inyour Warranty and Owner Assistance InformationBooklet.
In Canada, write to:
General Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Communication Centre, 163- 0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Weight of the Trailer TongueThe tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important weightto measure because it affects the total or gross weightof your vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW)includes the curb weight of the vehicle, any cargo youmay carry in it, and the people who will be riding inthe vehicle. If you have a lot of options, equipment,passengers or cargo in your vehicle, it will reduce thetongue weight your vehicle can carry, which willalso reduce the trailer weight your vehicle can tow. Andif you will tow a trailer, you must add the tongue loadto the GVW because your vehicle will be carryingthat weight, too. See Loading Your Vehicle for moreinformation about your vehicle’s maximum load capacity.
The trailer tongue weight (A) should be 10 percent to15 percent of the total loaded trailer weight, up toa maximum or 400 lbs. (181 kg) with a weight carryinghitch. The trailer tongue weight (A) should be10 percent to 15 percent of the total loaded trailerweight, up to a maximum of 900 lbs. (408 kg) with aweight distributing hitch.
Do not exceed the maximum allowable tongue weightfor your vehicle. Choose the shortest hitch extensionthat will position the hitch ball closest to the vehicle. Thiswill help reduce the effect of trailer tongue weight onthe rear axle.
4-56
After you’ve loaded your trailer, weigh the trailer andthen the tongue, separately, to see if the weightsare proper. If they aren’t, you may be able to get themright simply by moving some items around in thetrailer.
Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s TiresBe sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upper limitfor cold tires. You’ll find these numbers on theCertification label at the rear edge of the driver’s door orsee Loading Your Vehicle for more information. Thenbe sure you don’t go over the GVW limit for your vehicle,or the GAWR, including the weight of the trailertongue. If you use a weight distributing hitch, make sureyou don’t go over the rear axle limit before you applythe weight distribution spring bars.
HitchesIt’s important to have the correct hitch equipment.Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads area few reasons why you’ll need the right hitch.
Weight Distributing Hitches and WeightCarrying Hitches
When using a weight-distributing hitch, the hitch mustbe adjusted so the distance (A) remains the same bothbefore and after coupling the trailer to the tow vehicle.
If you use a step-bumper hitch, the bumper couldbe damaged in sharp turns. Make sure there is ampleroom when turning to avoid contact between thetrailer and the bumper.
(A) Body to Ground Distance, (B) Front of Vehicle
4-57
If you will be pulling a trailer that, when loaded, willweigh more than 5,000 lbs (2 270 kg) be sure to use aproperly mounted weight-distributing hitch and swaycontrol of the proper size. This equipment is veryimportant for proper vehicle loading and good handlingwhen driving. Always use a sway control if the trailerwill weigh more than these limits. You can ask ahitch dealer about sway controls.
Safety ChainsYou should always attach chains between your vehicleand your trailer. Cross the safety chains under thetongue of the trailer to help prevent the tongue fromcontacting the road if it becomes separated fromthe hitch. Instructions about safety chains may beprovided by the hitch manufacturer or by the trailermanufacturer. Follow the manufacturer’srecommendation for attaching safety chains and do notattach them to the bumper. Always leave just enoughslack so you can turn with your rig. Never allowsafety chains to drag on the ground.
Trailer BrakesIf your trailer weighs more than 1,500 lbs. (680 kg)loaded, then it needs its own brakes — and they mustbe adequate. Be sure to read and follow the instructionsfor the trailer brakes so you’ll be able to install, adjustand maintain them properly.
Your trailer’s brake system can tap into the vehicle’shydraulic brake system only if:
• The trailer parts can withstand 3,000 psi(20 650 kPa) of pressure.
• The trailer’s brake system will use less than0.02 cubic inch (0.3 cc) of fluid from your vehicle’smaster cylinder. Otherwise, both braking systemswon’t work well. You could even lose your brakes.
If everything checks out this far, then make the brakefluid tap at the port on the master cylinder thatsends fluid to the rear brakes. But don’t use coppertubing for this. If you do, it will bend and finally break off.Use steel brake tubing.
4-58
Driving with a Trailer
{CAUTION:
If you have a rear-most window open and youpull a trailer with your vehicle, carbonmonoxide (CO) could come into your vehicle.You can not see or smell CO. It can causeunconsciousness or death. See EngineExhaust on page 2-32. To maximize your safetywhen towing a trailer:
• Have your exhaust system inspected forleaks, and make necessary repairs beforestarting on your trip.
• Keep the rear-most windows closed.• If exhaust does come into your vehicle
through a window in the rear or anotheropening, drive with your front, mainheating or cooling system on and with thefan on any speed. This will bring fresh,outside air into your vehicle. Do not usethe climate control setting for maximum airbecause it only recirculates the air insideyour vehicle. See Climate Control Systemin the Index.
Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience.Before setting out for the open road, you’ll want to getto know your rig. Acquaint yourself with the feel ofhandling and braking with the added weight of the trailer.And always keep in mind that the vehicle you aredriving is now a good deal longer and not nearly asresponsive as your vehicle is by itself.Before you start, check all trailer hitch parts and andattachments, safety chains, electrical connection, lamps,tires and mirror adjustment. If the trailer has electricbrakes, start your vehicle and trailer moving and thenapply the trailer brake controller by hand to be surethe brakes are working. This lets you check yourelectrical connection at the same time.During your trip, check occasionally to be sure that theload is secure, and that the lamps and any trailerbrakes are still working.
Following DistanceStay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead asyou would when driving your vehicle without a trailer.This can help you avoid situations that requireheavy braking and sudden turns.
PassingYou’ll need more passing distance up ahead whenyou’re towing a trailer. And, because you’re a good deallonger, you’ll need to go much farther beyond thepassed vehicle before you can return to your lane.
4-59
Backing UpHold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand.Then, to move the trailer to the left, just move that handto the left. To move the trailer to the right, move yourhand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if possible,have someone guide you.
Making Turns
Notice: Making very sharp turns while traileringcould cause the trailer to come in contact with thevehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged. Avoidmaking very sharp turns while trailering.
When you’re turning with a trailer, make wider turnsthan normal. Do this so your trailer won’t strikesoft shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees or other objects.Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal well inadvance.
Turn Signals When Towing a TrailerThe arrows on your instrument panel will flash wheneveryou signal a turn or lane change. Properly hooked up,the trailer lamps will also flash, telling other driversyou’re about to turn, change lanes or stop.
When towing a trailer, the arrows on your instrumentpanel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailerare burned out. Thus, you may think drivers behindyou are seeing your signal when they are not. It’simportant to check occasionally to be sure the trailerbulbs are still working.
Driving On GradesReduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you startdown a long or steep downgrade. If you don’t shiftdown, you might have to use your brakes so much thatthey would get hot and no longer work well.
You can tow in DRIVE (D). You may want to shift thetransmission to THIRD (3) or a lower gear, under heavyloads or hilly conditions.
When towing at high altitude on steep uphill grades,consider the following: Engine coolant will boil at a lowertemperature than at normal altitudes. If you turn yourengine off immediately after towing at high altitudeon steep uphill grades, your vehicle may show signssimilar to engine overheating. To avoid this, let theengine run while parked (preferably on level ground)with the automatic transmission in PARK (P) for afew minutes before turning the engine off. If you do getthe overheat warning, see Engine Overheating onpage 5-26.
4-60
Parking on Hills
{CAUTION:
You really should not park your vehicle, with atrailer attached, on a hill. If something goeswrong, your rig could start to move. Peoplecan be injured, and both your vehicle and thetrailer can be damaged.
But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill, here’show to do it:
1. Apply your regular brakes, but don’t shift intoPARK (P) yet. When parking uphill, turn your wheelsaway from the curb. When parking downhill, turnyour wheels into the curb.
2. Have someone place chocks behind the trailerwheels.
3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release theregular brakes until the chocks absorb the load.
4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply yourparking brake, and then shift into PARK (P).
5. Release the regular brakes.
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicleif the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) withthe parking brake firmly set. Your vehiclecan roll.
If you have left the engine running, the vehiclecan move suddenly. You or others could beinjured. To be sure your vehicle won’t move,even when you’re on fairly level ground, usethe steps that follow.
Always put the shift lever fully in PARK (P)with the parking brake firmly set.
If the transfer case on four-wheel drivevehicles is in NEUTRAL, your vehicle willbe free to roll, even if your shift lever is inPARK (P). So, be sure the transfer case is in adrive gear — not in NEUTRAL.
See “Four-Wheel Drive (Automatic TransferCase)” in the Index.
4-61
When You Are Ready to Leave AfterParking on a Hill
1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal downwhile you:
• start your engine,
• shift into a gear, and
• release the parking brake.
2. Let up on the brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.
4. Stop and have someone pick up and store thechocks.
Maintenance When Trailer TowingYour vehicle will need service more often when you’repulling a trailer. See the Maintenance Schedule for moreon this. Things that are especially important in traileroperation are automatic transmission fluid (don’t overfill),engine oil, axle lubricant, belt(s), cooling system andbrake system. Each of these is covered in this manual,and the Index will help you find them quickly. Ifyou’re trailering, it’s a good idea to review these sectionsbefore you start your trip.
Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and boltsare tight.
4-62
Trailer Wiring Harness
Your vehicle may be equipped with a seven-wire trailertowing harness. This harness has a seven-pinuniversal heavy-duty trailer connector that is attached toa bracket on the hitch platform.
The seven-wire harness contains the following trailercircuits:
• Yellow: Left Stop/Turn Signal
• Dark Green: Right Stop/Turn Signal
• Brown: Running Lamps
• White: Ground
• Light Green: Back-up Lamps
• Red: Battery Feed
• Dark Blue: Electric Brakes
If you need to tow a light-duty trailer with a standardfour-way round pin connector, an adapter connector isavailable from your dealer.
Your vehicle is also equipped with wiring for an electrictrailer brake controller. These wires are locatedinside the vehicle on the driver’s side under theinstrument panel. These wires should be connected toan electric trailer brake controller by your dealer ora qualified service center.
4-63
✍ NOTES
4-64
Service ............................................................5-3Doing Your Own Service Work .........................5-3Adding Equipment to the Outside of
Your Vehicle ..............................................5-4Fuel ................................................................5-4
Gasoline Octane ............................................5-4Gasoline Specifications ....................................5-5California Fuel ...............................................5-5Additives .......................................................5-6Fuels in Foreign Countries ...............................5-6Filling Your Tank ............................................5-7Filling a Portable Fuel Container .......................5-9
Checking Things Under the Hood ....................5-10Hood Release ..............................................5-10Engine Compartment Overview .......................5-12Engine Oil ...................................................5-15Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ................................5-20Automatic Transmission Fluid .........................5-21Engine Coolant .............................................5-23Radiator Pressure Cap ..................................5-25Engine Overheating .......................................5-26Cooling System ............................................5-28Engine Fan Noise .........................................5-34Power Steering Fluid .....................................5-35
Inflation - Tire Pressure .................................5-60Tire Inspection and Rotation ...........................5-61When It Is Time for New Tires .......................5-62Buying New Tires .........................................5-63Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..........................5-64Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ..................5-65Wheel Replacement ......................................5-65Tire Chains ..................................................5-67If a Tire Goes Flat ........................................5-67Changing a Flat Tire .....................................5-68Spare Tire ...................................................5-83
Section 5 Service and Appearance Care
5-1
Appearance Care ............................................5-83Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle .................5-84Care of Safety Belts ......................................5-86Weatherstrips ...............................................5-86Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle ..............5-86Sheet Metal Damage .....................................5-89Finish Damage .............................................5-89Underbody Maintenance ................................5-89Chemical Paint Spotting .................................5-89Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ..................5-90
Vehicle Identification ......................................5-91Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .................5-91Service Parts Identification Label .....................5-91
Electrical System ............................................5-92Add-On Electrical Equipment ..........................5-92Headlamps ..................................................5-92Windshield Wiper Fuses ................................5-92Power Windows and Other
Power Options ..........................................5-92Fuses and Circuit Breakers ............................5-93
Capacities and Specifications ........................5-104
Section 5 Service and Appearance Care
5-2
ServiceYour dealer knows your vehicle best and wants you tobe happy with it. We hope you will go to your dealerfor all your service needs. You will get genuine GM partsand GM-trained and supported service people.
We hope you will want to keep your GM vehicle all GM.Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:
Doing Your Own Service WorkIf you want to do some of your own service work, youwill want to use the proper service manual. It tellsyou much more about how to service your vehicle thanthis manual can. To order the proper service manual,see Service Publications Ordering Information onpage 7-11.
Your vehicle has an air bag system. Before attemptingto do your own service work, see Servicing Your AirBag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-58.
You should keep a record with all parts receipts and listthe mileage and the date of any service work youperform. See Maintenance Record on page 6-16.
{CAUTION:
You can be injured and your vehicle could bedamaged if you try to do service work on avehicle without knowing enough about it.
• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,experience, the proper replacement partsand tools before you attempt any vehiclemaintenance task.
CAUTION: (Continued)
5-3
CAUTION: (Continued)
• Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts andother fasteners. “English” and “metric”fasteners can be easily confused. If youuse the wrong fasteners, parts can laterbreak or fall off. You could be hurt.
Adding Equipment to the Outside ofYour VehicleThings you might add to the outside of your vehicle canaffect the airflow around it. This may cause windnoise and affect windshield washer performance. Checkwith your dealer before adding equipment to theoutside of your vehicle.
FuelUse of the recommended fuel is an important part of theproper maintenance of your vehicle.
Gasoline OctaneUse regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octaneof 87 or higher. If the octane is less than 87, you mayget a heavy knocking noise when you drive. If thisoccurs, use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher assoon as possible. Otherwise, you might damageyour engine. A little pinging noise when you accelerateor drive uphill is considered normal. This does notindicate a problem exists or that a higher-octane fuel isnecessary. If you are using 87 octane or higher-octanefuel and hear heavy knocking, your engine needsservice.
5-4
Gasoline SpecificationsIt is recommended that gasoline meet specificationswhich were developed by automobile manufacturersaround the world and contained in the World-Wide FuelCharter which is available from the Alliance ofAutomobile Manufacturers at www.autoalliance.org.Gasoline meeting these specifications could provideimproved driveability and emission control systemperformance compared to other gasoline.
In Canada, look for the“Auto Makers’ Choice”label on the pump.
California FuelIf your vehicle is certified to meet California EmissionStandards (see the underhood emission control label), itis designed to operate on fuels that meet Californiaspecifications. If this fuel is not available in statesadopting California emissions standards, your vehiclewill operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting federalspecifications, but emission control system performancemay be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp mayturn on (see Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 3-40 )and your vehicle may fail a smog-check test. If thisoccurs, return to your authorized GM dealer fordiagnosis. If it is determined that the condition is causedby the type of fuel used, repairs may not be coveredby your warranty.
Canada Only
5-5
AdditivesTo provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United Statesare now required to contain additives that will helpprevent engine and fuel system deposits from forming,allowing your emission control system to workproperly. You should not have to add anything to yourfuel. However, some gasolines contain only theminimum amount of additive required to meet U.S.Environmental Protection Agency regulations. GeneralMotors recommends that you buy gasolines thatare advertised to help keep fuel injectors and intakevalves clean. If your vehicle experiences problems dueto dirty injectors or valves, try a different brand ofgasoline.
Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers andethanol, and reformulated gasolines may be available inyour area to contribute to clean air. General Motorsrecommends that you use these gasolines, particularly ifthey comply with the specifications described earlier.
Notice: Your vehicle was not designed for fuel thatcontains methanol. Do not use fuel containingmethanol. It can corrode metal parts in your fuelsystem and also damage the plastic and rubberparts. That damage would not be covered underyour warranty.
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for lowemissions may contain an octane-enhancingadditive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendant where youbuy gasoline whether the fuel contains MMT. GeneralMotors does not recommend the use of such gasolines.Fuels containing MMT can reduce the life of sparkplugs and the performance of the emission controlsystem may be affected. The malfunction indicator lampmay turn on. If this occurs, return to your authorizedGM dealer for service.
Fuels in Foreign CountriesIf you plan on driving in another country outside theUnited States or Canada, the proper fuel may be hardto find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuelnot recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costlyrepairs caused by use of improper fuel would notbe covered by your warranty.
To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, orcontact a major oil company that does business in thecountry where you will be driving.
5-6
Filling Your Tank
{CAUTION:
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire cancause bad injuries. To help avoid injuries toyou and others, read and follow all theinstructions on the pump island. Turn off yourengine when you are refueling. Do not smokeif you are near fuel or refueling your vehicle.Keep sparks, flames and smoking materialsaway from fuel. Do not leave the fuel pumpunattended when refueling your vehicle — thisis against the law in some places. Keepchildren away from the fuel pump; never letchildren pump fuel.
The fuel cap is located behind a hinged door on thedriver’s side of your vehicle.
5-7
While refueling, hang the fuel cap by the tether usingthe hook located on the inside of the filler door.
To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly to the left(counterclockwise).
{CAUTION:
If you spill fuel and then something ignites it,you could be badly burned. Fuel can spray outon you if you open the fuel cap too quickly.This spray can happen if your tank is nearlyfull, and is more likely in hot weather. Openthe fuel cap slowly and wait for any “hiss”noise to stop. Then unscrew the cap allthe way.
Be careful not to spill fuel. Don’t top off or overfill yourtank, and wait a few seconds after you’ve finishedpumping before you remove the nozzle. Clean fuel frompainted surfaces as soon as possible. See Cleaningthe Outside of Your Vehicle on page 5-86.
5-8
When you put the fuel cap back on, turn it to the right(clockwise) until you hear a clicking sound. Makesure you fully install the cap. The diagnostic system candetermine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperlyinstalled. This would allow fuel to evaporate into theatmosphere. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp onpage 3-40
{CAUTION:
If a fire starts while you are refueling, do notremove the nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel byshutting off the pump or by notifying thestation attendant. Leave the area immediately.
Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to getthe right type. Your dealer can get one for you.If you get the wrong type, it may not fit properly.This may cause your malfunction indicator lamp tolight and may damage your fuel tank and emissionssystem. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp onpage 3-40.
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
{CAUTION:
Never fill a portable fuel container while it is inyour vehicle. Static electricity discharge fromthe container can ignite the gasoline vapor.You can be badly burned and your vehicledamaged if this occurs. To help avoid injury toyou and others:
• Dispense gasoline only into approvedcontainers.
• Do not fill a container while it is inside avehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed oron any surface other than the ground.
• Bring the fill nozzle in contact with theinside of the fill opening before operatingthe nozzle. Contact should be maintaineduntil the filling is complete.
• Do not smoke while pumping gasoline.
5-9
Checking Things Underthe Hood
{CAUTION:
Things that burn can get on hot engine partsand start a fire. These include liquids like fuel,oil, coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer andother fluids, and plastic or rubber. You orothers could be burned. Be careful not to dropor spill things that will burn onto a hot engine.
Hood Release1. To open the hood, first
pull the handle locatedinside the vehicleon the lower driver’sside of the instrumentpanel.
5-10
2. Then go to the front of the vehicle and release thesecondary hood release.
3. Lift the hood; release the hood prop from itsretainer and put the hood prop into the slot inthe hood.
Before closing the hood, be sure all filler caps are onproperly. Then lift the hood to relieve pressure onthe hood prop. Remove the hood prop from its slot inthe hood and return the prop to its retainer. Then pull thehood down firmly to close. It will latch when droppedfrom 6 to 8 inches (15 to 20 cm) without pressing onthe hood.
5-11
Engine Compartment OverviewWhen you open the hood on the L6 engine, you’ll see the following:
5-12
A. Coolant Recovery Tank. See Engine Coolant onpage 5-23.
B. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine AirCleaner/Filter on page 5-20.
C. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See WindshieldWasher Fluid on page 5-36.
D. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. See Power SteeringFluid on page 5-35.
E. Automatic Transmission Dipstick. See AutomaticTransmission Fluid on page 5-21.
F. Engine Oil Dipstick. See Engine Oil on page 5-15.
G. Radiator Pressure Cap. See Radiator Pressure Capon page 5-25.
H. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See Engine Oil on page 5-15.I. Remote Negative (-) Terminal Marked GND.
See Jump Starting on page 5-41.J. Brake Master Cylinder. See Brakes on page 5-37.K. Battery. See Battery on page 5-40.L. Engine Compartment Fuse Block. See “Engine
Compartment Fuse Block” under Fuses and CircuitBreakers on page 5-93.
5-13
When you open the hood on the V8 engine, you’ll see the following:
5-14
A. Coolant Recovery Tank. See Engine Coolant onpage 5-23.
B. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine AirCleaner/Filter on page 5-20.
C. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See WindshieldWasher Fluid on page 5-36.
D. Engine Oil Dipstick. See Engine Oil on page 5-15.E. Automatic Transmission Dipstick. See Automatic
Transmission Fluid on page 5-21.F. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See Engine Oil on page 5-15.G. Radiator Pressure Cap. See Radiator Pressure Cap
on page 5-25.H. Remote Negative (-) Terminal Marked GND. See
Jump Starting on page 5-41.I. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. See Power Steering
Fluid on page 5-35.J. Brake Master Cylinder. See Brakes on page 5-37.K. Engine Compartment Fuse Block. See “Engine
Compartment Fuse block” under Fuses and CircuitBreakers on page 5-93.
L. Battery. See Battery on page 5-40.
Engine Oil
Checking Engine OilIt is a good idea to check your engine oil every time youget fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the oilmust be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop. SeeEngine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 forthe location of the engine oil dipstick.Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes todrain back into the oil pan. If you don’t, the oildipstick might not show the actual level.Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel orcloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it again,keeping the tip down, and check the level.
L6 Engine
5-15
When to Add Engine OilIf the oil is at or below the L mark for the L6 engine orthe cross-hatched area at the tip of the dipstick forthe V8 engine, then you will need to add at least onequart of oil. But you must use the right kind. This sectionexplains what kind of oil to use. For engine oilcrankcase capacity, see Capacities and Specificationson page 5-104.
Notice: Do not add too much oil. If your engine hasso much oil that the oil level gets above the Fmark that shows the proper operating range for theL6 engine or above the cross-hatched area forthe V8 engine, your engine could be damaged.
See Engine CompartmentOverview on page 5-12 forthe location of theengine oil fill cap.
Be sure to add enough oil to put the level somewhere inthe proper operating range. Push the dipstick all theway back in when you are through.
What Kind of Engine Oil to UseLook for two things:
• GM6094M
Your vehicle’s engine requires oil meeting GMStandard GM6094M. You should look for and useonly an oil that meets GM Standard GM6094M.
V8 Engine
5-16
• SAE 5W-30
As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30 is bestfor your vehicle. However, if it is going to be 0°F(–18°C) or above and SAE 5W-30 is not available,you may use SAE 10W-30.These numbers on an oil container show itsviscosity, or thickness. Do not use other viscosityoils such as SAE 20W-50.
Oils meeting theserequirements should alsohave the starburstsymbol on the container.This symbol indicatesthat the oil has beencertified by the AmericanPetroleum Institute (API).
You should look for this information on the oil container,and use only those oils that are identified as meetingGM Standard GM6094M and have the starburst symbolon the front of the oil container.
5-17
Notice: Use only engine oil identified as meetingGM Standard GM6094M and showing the AmericanPetroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Enginesstarburst symbol. Failure to use the recommendedoil can result in engine damage not covered byyour warranty.
GM Goodwrench® oil meets all the requirements foryour vehicle.
If you are in an area of extreme cold, where thetemperature falls below −20°F (−29°C), it isrecommended that you use either an SAE 5W-30synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 oil. Both will provideeasier cold starting and better protection for your engineat extremely low temperatures.
Engine Oil AdditivesDo not add anything to your oil. The recommended oilswith the starburst symbol that meet GM StandardGM6094M are all you will need for good performanceand engine protection.
When to Change Engine Oil(GM Oil Life System)Your vehicle has a computer system that lets you knowwhen to change the engine oil and filter. This isbased on engine revolutions and engine temperature,and not on mileage. Based on driving conditions,the mileage at which an oil change will be indicated canvary considerably. For the oil life system to workproperly, you must reset the system every time the oil ischanged.
When the system has calculated that oil life has beendiminished, it will indicate that an oil change isnecessary. A CHANGE ENGINE OIL light will come on.Change your oil as soon as possible within the nexttwo times you stop for fuel. It is possible that, if you aredriving under the best conditions, the oil life systemmay not indicate that an oil change is necessary for overa year. However, your engine oil and filter must bechanged at least once a year and at this time the systemmust be reset. Your dealer has GM-trained peoplewho will perform this work using genuine GM parts andreset the system. It is also important to check youroil regularly and keep it at the proper level.
If the system is ever reset accidentally, you mustchange your oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since yourlast oil change. Remember to reset the oil life systemwhenever the oil is changed.
5-18
How to Reset the CHANGE ENGINE OILLightThe GM Oil Life System calculates when to changeyour engine oil and filter based on vehicle use. Anytimeyour oil is changed, reset the system so it cancalculate when the next oil change is required. If asituation occurs where you change your oil prior to aCHANGE ENGINE OIL light being turned on, reset thesystem.
To reset the CHANGE ENGINE OIL light, do thefollowing:
1. Turn the ignition key to RUN with the engine off.
2. Fully press and release the accelerator pedal slowlythree times within five seconds.
3. Turn the key to LOCK.
If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL light comes back on whenyou start your vehicle, the engine oil life system hasnot reset. Repeat the procedure.
For vehicles with the Driver Information Center, seeDriver Information Center (DIC) on page 3-48 to resetthe system.
What to Do with Used OilUsed engine oil contains certain elements that may beunhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer.Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Cleanyour skin and nails with soap and water, or a goodhand cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of clothing orrags containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer’swarnings about the use and disposal of oil products.
Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If youchange your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from thefilter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting itin the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or intostreams or bodies of water. Instead, recycle it bytaking it to a place that collects used oil. If you have aproblem properly disposing of your used oil, askyour dealer, a service station or a local recycling centerfor help.
5-19
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
See Engine CompartmentOverview on page 5-12 forlocation of engine aircleaner/filter.
When to InspectInspect the air cleaner/filter at every oil change andreplace at the first oil change after 25,000 miles(40,000 km).
How to InspectTo inspect the air cleaner/filter, remove the filter fromthe vehicle and lightly shake filter to release loose dustand dirt. If the filter remains “caked” with dirt, a newfilter is required.
To inspect or replace the filter, do the following:
1. Remove the screws on the engine cleaner/filter andlift off the cover.
2. Remove the air cleaner/filter from the housing. Careshould be taken to dislodge as little dirt as possible.
3. Install the new engine air cleaner/filter.
4. Reinstall the cover and tighten the screws.
{CAUTION:
Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filteroff can cause you or others to be burned. Theair cleaner not only cleans the air, it helps tostop flame if the engine backfires. If it is notthere and the engine backfires, you could beburned. Do not drive with it off, and be carefulworking on the engine with the air cleaner/filteroff.
Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire cancause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt caneasily get into your engine, which will damage it.Always have the air cleaner/filter in place when youare driving.
5-20
Automatic Transmission Fluid
When to Check and ChangeA good time to check your automatic transmission fluidlevel is when the engine oil is changed.
Change both the fluid and filter every 50,000 miles(83 000 km) if the vehicle is mainly driven under one ormore of these conditions:
• In heavy city traffic where the outside temperatureregularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.
• In hilly or mountainous terrain.
• When doing frequent trailer towing.
• Uses such as found in taxi, police or deliveryservice.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of theseconditions, change the fluid and filter every100,000 miles (166 000 km).
How to CheckBecause this operation can be a little difficult, you maychoose to have this done at the dealership servicedepartment.
If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the instructionshere, or you could get a false reading on the dipstick.
Notice: Too much or too little fluid can damageyour transmission. Too much can mean that someof the fluid could come out and fall on hot enginepart or exhaust system parts, starting a fire.Too little fluid could cause the transmission tooverheat. Be sure to get an accurate reading if youcheck your transmission fluid.
Wait at least 30 minutes before checking thetransmission fluid level if you have been driving:
• When outside temperatures are above 90°F (32°C).
• At high speed for quite a while.
• In heavy traffic-especially in hot weather.
• While pulling a trailer.
To get the right reading, the fluid should be at normaloperating temperature, which is 180°F to 200°F(82°C to 93°C).
5-21
Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about 15 miles(24 km) when outside temperatures are above 50°F(10°C). If it’s colder than 50°F (10°C), drive the vehiclein THIRD (3) until the engine temperature gagemoves and then remains steady for 10 minutes.
A cold fluid check can be made after the vehicle hasbeen sitting for eight hours or more with the engine off,but this is used only as a reference. Let the enginerun at idle for five minutes if outside temperatures are50°F (10°C) or more. If it’s colder than 50°F (10°C), youmay have to idle the engine longer. Should the fluidlevel be low during this cold check, you must check thefluid hot before adding fluid. Checking the fluid hotwill give you a more accurate reading of the fluid level.
Checking the Fluid LevelPrepare your vehicle as follows:
• Park your vehicle on a level place. Keep the enginerunning.
• With the parking brake applied, place the shift leverin PARK (P).
• With your foot on the brake pedal, move the shiftlever through each gear range, pausing for aboutthree seconds in each range. Then, position the shiftlever in PARK (P).
• Let the engine run at idle for three minutes or more.
Then, without shutting off the engine, follow these steps:
The automatictransmission dipstickhandle with thetransmission and locksymbol is located in theengine compartmenton the passenger’s side ofthe vehicle.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 formore information on location.
1. Flip the handle up and then pull out the dipstickand wipe it with a clean rag or paper towel.
2. Push it back in all the way, wait three seconds andthen pull it back out again. Check both sides of thedipstick, and read the lower level.
3. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, push thedipstick back in all the way; then flip the handledown to lock the dipstick in place.
5-22
How to Add FluidRefer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine whatkind of transmission fluid to use. See RecommendedFluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.
Add fluid only after checking the transmission fluid whileit is hot. (A cold check is used only as a reference.) Ifthe fluid level is low, add only enough of the proper fluidto bring the level up to the HOT area for a hot check.It doesn’t take much fluid, generally less than onepint (0.5 L). Don’t overfill.
Notice: We recommend you use only fluid labeledDEXRON® -III, because fluid with that label ismade especially for your automatic transmission.Damage caused by fluid other than DEXRON ® -III isnot covered by your new vehicle warranty.
• After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level asdescribed under “How to Check″.
• When the correct fluid level is obtained, push thedipstick back in all the way; then flip the handledown to lock the dipstick in place.
Engine CoolantThe cooling system in your vehicle is filled withDEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant is designedto remain in your vehicle for 5 years or 150,000 miles(240 000 km), whichever occurs first, if you addonly DEX-COOL® extended life coolant.
The following explains your cooling system and how toadd coolant when it is low. If you have a problemwith engine overheating, see Engine Overheating onpage 5-26.
A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water andDEX-COOL® coolant will:
• Give freezing protection down to −34°F (−37°C).
• Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).
• Protect against rust and corrosion.
• Help keep the proper engine temperature.
• Let the warning lights and gages work as theyshould.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL ® maycause premature engine, heater core or radiatorcorrosion. In addition, the engine coolant mayrequire changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50 000 km)or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairswould not be covered by your warranty. Always useDEX-COOL®(silicate-free) coolant in your vehicle.
5-23
What to UseUse a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable water andone-half DEX-COOL® coolant. If you use this coolantmixture, you don’t need to add anything else.
{CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your coolingsystem can be dangerous. Plain water, orsome other liquid such as alcohol, can boilbefore the proper coolant mixture will. Yourvehicle’s coolant warning system is set for theproper coolant mixture. With plain water or thewrong mixture, your engine could get too hotbut you would not get the overheat warning.Your engine could catch fire and you or otherscould be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOL ® coolant.
Notice: If you use an improper coolant mixture,your engine could overheat and be badly damaged.The repair cost would not be covered by yourwarranty. Too much water in the mixture can freezeand crack the engine, radiator, heater core andother parts.
If you have to add coolant more than four times a year,have your dealer check your cooling system.
Notice: If you use the proper coolant, you do nothave to add extra inhibitors or additives which claimto improve the system. These can be harmful.
Checking Coolant
The engine coolantrecovery tank is in theengine compartmenton the passenger’s side ofthe vehicle. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 5-12 for moreinformation on location.
The vehicle must be on a level surface. When yourengine is cold, the coolant level should be at FULLCOLD, or a little higher.
5-24
Adding CoolantIf you need more coolant, add the proper DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture at the coolant recovery tank.
{CAUTION:
Turning the radiator pressure cap when theengine and radiator are hot can allow steamand scalding liquids to blow out and burn youbadly. With the coolant recovery tank, you willalmost never have to add coolant at theradiator. Never turn the radiator pressurecap — even a little — when the engine andradiator are hot.
Add coolant mixture at the recovery tank, but be carefulnot to spill it.
{CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hotengine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol,and it will burn if the engine parts are hotenough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
Occasionally check the coolant level in the radiator. Forinformation on how to add coolant to the radiator,see Cooling System on page 5-28.
Radiator Pressure CapNotice: If the pressure cap is not tightly installed,coolant loss and possible engine damage mayoccur. Be sure the cap is properly and tightlysecured.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 forinformation on location.
5-25
Engine OverheatingYou will find a coolant temperature gage on yourvehicle’s instrument panel. If your vehicle has a DIC,the display will show an Engine Coolant Hot or EngineOverheated message.
If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine
{CAUTION:
Steam from an overheated engine can burnyou badly, even if you just open the hood. Stayaway from the engine if you see or hear steamcoming from it. Just turn it off and geteveryone away from the vehicle until it coolsdown. Wait until there is no sign of steam orcoolant before you open the hood.
If you keep driving when your engine isoverheated, the liquids in it can catch fire. Youor others could be badly burned. Stop yourengine if it overheats, and get out of thevehicle until the engine is cool.
Notice: If your engine catches fire because youkeep driving with no coolant, your vehicle canbe badly damaged. The costly repairs would not becovered by your warranty.
5-26
If No Steam Is Coming From YourEngineIf you get an engine overheat warning but see or hearno steam, the problem may not be too serious.Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot when you:
• Climb a long hill on a hot day.
• Stop after high-speed driving.
• Idle for long periods in traffic.
• Tow a trailer.
If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam,try this for a minute or so:
1. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle in neutralwhile stopped. If it is safe to do so, pull off the road,shift to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) and let theengine idle.
2. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fanspeed and open the window as necessary.
If you no longer have the overheat warning, you candrive. Just to be safe, drive slower for about 10 minutes.If the warning doesn’t come back on, you can drivenormally.
If the warning continues and you have not stopped, pullover, stop, and park your vehicle right away.
If there’s still no sign of steam, you can push down theaccelerator until the engine speed is about twice asfast as normal idle speed for at least three minutes whileyou’re parked. If you still have the warning, turn offthe engine and get everyone out of the vehicle until itcools down.
You may decide not to lift the hood but to get servicehelp right away.
5-27
Cooling SystemWhen you decide it’s safe to lift the hood, here’s whatyou’ll see:
A. Coolant Recovery TankB. Radiator Pressure CapC. Engine Fan
If the coolant inside the coolant recovery tank is boiling,don’t do anything else until it cools down. The vehicleshould be parked on a level surface.
L6 Engine
V8 Engine
5-28
The coolant level shouldbe at least up to the FULLCOLD mark. If it isn’t,you may have a leak at thepressure cap or in theradiator hoses, heaterhoses, radiator, waterpump or somewhere elsein the cooling system.
{CAUTION:
Heater and radiator hoses, and other engineparts, can be very hot. Do not touch them. Ifyou do, you can be burned.
Do not run the engine if there is a leak. If yourun the engine, it could lose all coolant. Thatcould cause an engine fire, and you could beburned. Get any leak fixed before you drive thevehicle.
If there seems to be no leak, start the engine again.The engine cooling fan speed should increase when idlespeed is doubled by pushing the accelerator pedaldown. If it doesn’t, your vehicle needs service. Turn offthe engine.
Notice: Engine damage from running your enginewithout coolant is not covered by your warranty.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL ® maycause premature engine, heater core or radiatorcorrosion. In addition, the engine coolant mayrequire changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50 000 km)or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairswould not be covered by your warranty. Always useDEX-COOL®(silicate-free) coolant in your vehicle.
5-29
How to Add Coolant to the CoolantRecovery TankIf you haven’t found a problem yet, but the coolant levelisn’t at the FULL COLD mark, add a 50/50 mixture ofclean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL® engine coolantat the coolant recovery tank. See Engine Coolant onpage 5-23 for more information.
{CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your coolingsystem can be dangerous. Plain water, orsome other liquid such as alcohol, can boilbefore the proper coolant mixture will. Yourvehicle’s coolant warning system is set for theproper coolant mixture. With plain water or thewrong mixture, your engine could get too hotbut you would not get the overheat warning.Your engine could catch fire and you or otherscould be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOL ® coolant.
Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze and crackthe engine, radiator, heater core and other parts.Use the recommended coolant and the propercoolant mixture.
{CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hotengine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycoland it will burn if the engine parts are hotenough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
5-30
When the coolant in the coolant recovery tank is at theFULL COLD mark, start your vehicle.
If the overheat warning continues, there’s one morething you can try. You can add the proper coolantmixture directly to the radiator, but be sure the coolingsystem is cool before you do it.
{CAUTION:
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot coolingsystem can blow out and burn you badly. Theyare under pressure, and if you turn the radiatorpressure cap — even a little — they can comeout at high speed. Never turn the cap when thecooling system, including the radiator pressurecap, is hot. Wait for the cooling system andradiator pressure cap to cool if you ever haveto turn the pressure cap.
5-31
How to Add Coolant to the Radiator
1. You can remove the radiator pressure cap whenthe cooling system, including the radiator pressurecap and upper radiator hose, is no longer hot.Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwiseabout one full turn.If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hissmeans there is still some pressure left.
2. Then keep turning the pressure cap. Remove thepressure cap.
5-32
3. Fill the radiator with the proper DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture, up to the base of the fillerneck. See Engine Coolant on page 5-23 for moreinformation about the proper coolant mixture.
4. Then fill the coolant recovery tank to the FULLCOLD mark.
5. Put the cap back on the coolant recovery tank, butleave the radiator pressure cap off.
5-33
6. Start the engine and let it run until you can feel theupper radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for theengine cooling fan.
7. By this time, the coolant level inside the radiatorfiller neck may be lower. If the level is lower, addmore of the proper DEX-COOL® coolant mixturethrough the filler neck until the level reachesthe base of the filler neck.
8. Then replace the pressure cap. At any time duringthis procedure if coolant begins to flow out of thefiller neck, reinstall the pressure cap. Be surethe pressure cap is hand-tight.
Engine Fan NoiseThis vehicle has a clutched engine cooling fan. Whenthe clutch is engaged, the fan spins faster to providemore air to cool the engine. In most everyday drivingconditions the clutch is not engaged. This improves fueleconomy and reduces fan noise. Under heavy vehicleloading, trailer towing, and/or high outside temperatures,the fan speed increases when the clutch engages. Soyou may hear an increase in fan noise. This isnormal and should not be mistaken as the transmissionslipping or making extra shifts. It is merely the coolingsystem functioning properly. The fan will slow downwhen additional cooling is not required and the clutchdisengages.
You may also hear this fan noise when you start theengine. It will go away as the fan clutch disengages.
5-34
Power Steering Fluid
The power steering fluidreservoir is located in theengine compartment. Itis on the passenger’s sideof vehicles with the L6engine and is on thedriver’s side of vehicleswith the V8 engine.See Engine CompartmentOverview on page 5-12for reservoir location.
When to Check Power Steering FluidIt is not necessary to regularly check power steering fluidunless you suspect there is a leak in the system oryou hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this systemcould indicate a problem. Have the system inspectedand repaired.
How to Check Power Steering FluidTurn the key off, let the engine compartment cool down,wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean, thenunscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a clean rag.Replace the cap and completely tighten it. Thenremove the cap again and look at the fluid level on thedipstick.
For vehicles with the L6 engine, the level should be atthe C (cold) mark. For vehicles with the V8 engine,the level should be at the FULL mark. If necessary, addonly enough fluid to bring the level up to the mark.
What to UseTo determine what kind of fluid to use, seeRecommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.Always use the proper fluid. Failure to use the properfluid can cause leaks and damage hoses and seals.
5-35
Windshield Washer Fluid
What to UseWhen you need windshield washer fluid, be sure to readthe manufacturer’s instructions before use. If you willbe operating your vehicle in an area where thetemperature may fall below freezing, use a fluid that hassufficient protection against freezing.
Adding Washer Fluid
Open the cap with thewasher symbol on it. Addwasher fluid until thetank is full. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 5-12 for reservoirlocation.
Notice:
• When using concentrated washer fluid, followthe manufacturer’s instructions for addingwater.
• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid.Water can cause the solution to freeze anddamage your washer fluid tank and other partsof the washer system. Also, water does notclean as well as washer fluid.
• Fill your washer fluid tank only three-quartersfull when it is very cold. This allows forexpansion if freezing occurs, which coulddamage the tank if it is completely full.
• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in yourwindshield washer. It can damage your washersystem and paint.
5-36
Brakes
Brake Fluid
Your brake master cylinder reservoir is filled with DOT-3brake fluid. See Engine Compartment Overview onpage 5-12 for the location of the reservoir.
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level inthe reservoir might go down. The first is that thebrake fluid goes down to an acceptable level duringnormal brake lining wear. When new linings are put in,the fluid level goes back up. The other reason isthat fluid is leaking out of the brake system. If it is, you
should have your brake system fixed, since a leakmeans that sooner or later your brakes will not workwell, or will not work at all.
So, it is not a good idea to “top off” your brake fluid.Adding brake fluid will not correct a leak. If you add fluidwhen your linings are worn, then you will have toomuch fluid when you get new brake linings. You shouldadd (or remove) brake fluid, as necessary, only whenwork is done on the brake hydraulic system.
{CAUTION:
If you have too much brake fluid, it can spill onthe engine. The fluid will burn if the engine ishot enough. You or others could be burned,and your vehicle could be damaged. Add brakefluid only when work is done on the brakehydraulic system. See “Checking Brake Fluid”in this section.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine whento check your brake fluid. See Scheduled Maintenanceon page 6-4.
5-37
Checking Brake FluidYou can check the brake fluid without taking off the cap.
Just look at the brake fluidreservoir. The fluid levelshould be above MIN. If itis not, have your brakesystem checked tosee if there is a leak.
After work is done on the brake hydraulic system,make sure the level is above the MIN but not over theMAX mark.
What to AddWhen you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3 brakefluid. Use new brake fluid from a sealed containeronly. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants onpage 6-12.
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the areaaround the cap before removing it. This will helpkeep dirt from entering the reservoir.
{CAUTION:
With the wrong kind of fluid in your brakesystem, your brakes may not work well, orthey may not even work at all. This couldcause a crash. Always use the proper brakefluid.
Notice:
• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brakesystem parts. For example, just a few drops ofmineral-based oil, such as engine oil, in yourbrake system can damage brake systemparts so badly that they will have to be replaced.Do not let someone put in the wrong kind offluid.
• If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s paintedsurfaces, the paint finish can be damaged. Becareful not to spill brake fluid on your vehicle. Ifyou do, wash it off immediately. See AppearanceCare on page 5-83.
5-38
Brake WearYour vehicle has four-wheel disc brakes.
Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that makea high-pitched warning sound when the brake padsare worn and new pads are needed. The soundmay come and go or be heard all the time your vehicleis moving (except when you are pushing on thebrake pedal firmly).
{CAUTION:
The brake wear warning sound means thatsoon your brakes will not work well. Thatcould lead to an accident. When you hear thebrake wear warning sound, have your vehicleserviced.
Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out brakepads could result in costly brake repair.
Some driving conditions or climates may cause a brakesqueal when the brakes are first applied or lightlyapplied. This does not mean something is wrong withyour brakes.
Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to helpprevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspectbrake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts inthe proper sequence to GM torque specifications.
Brake linings should always be replaced as completeaxle sets.
Brake Pedal TravelSee your dealer if the brake pedal does not return tonormal height, or if there is a rapid increase inpedal travel. This could be a sign of brake trouble.
Brake AdjustmentEvery time you make a brake stop, your disc brakesadjust for wear.
5-39
Replacing Brake System PartsThe braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its manyparts have to be of top quality and work well together ifthe vehicle is to have really good braking. Yourvehicle was designed and tested with top-quality GMbrake parts. When you replace parts of your brakingsystem — for example, when your brake liningswear down and you need new ones put in — be sureyou get new approved GM replacement parts. If you donot, your brakes may no longer work properly. Forexample, if someone puts in brake linings that are wrongfor your vehicle, the balance between your front andrear brakes can change — for the worse. The brakingperformance you have come to expect can changein many other ways if someone puts in the wrongreplacement brake parts.
BatteryYour new vehicle comes with a maintenance freeACDelco® battery. When it is time for a new battery, getone that has the replacement number shown on theoriginal battery’s label. We recommend an ACDelco®
battery. See Engine Compartment Overview onpage 5-12 for battery location.Warning: Battery posts, terminals and relatedaccessories contain lead and lead compounds,chemicals known to the State of California to causecancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands afterhandling.
Vehicle StorageIf you are not going to drive your vehicle for 25 daysor more, remove the black, negative (−) cable fromthe battery. This will help keep your battery fromrunning down.
{CAUTION:
Batteries have acid that can burn you and gasthat can explode. You can be badly hurt if youare not careful. See Jump Starting onpage 5-41 for tips on working around a batterywithout getting hurt.
Contact your dealer to learn how to prepare yourvehicle for longer storage periods.
Also, for your audio system, see Theft-DeterrentFeature (RDS Radios) on page 3-111.
5-40
Jump StartingIf your battery has run down, you may want to useanother vehicle and some jumper cables to start yourvehicle. But please use the following steps to do itsafely.
{CAUTION:
Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerousbecause:
• They contain acid that can burn you.• They contain gas that can explode or
ignite.• They contain enough electricity to
burn you.
If you do not follow these steps exactly, someor all of these things can hurt you.
Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in costlydamage to your vehicle that would not be coveredby your warranty.
Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or pulling itwill not work, and it could damage your vehicle.
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-voltbattery with a negative ground system.
Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a 12-voltsystem with a negative ground, both vehicles canbe damaged. Only use vehicles with 12-volt systemswith negative grounds to jump start your vehicle.
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cablescan reach, but be sure the vehicles aren’t touchingeach other. If they are, it could cause a groundconnection you don’t want. You wouldn’t be able tostart your vehicle, and the bad grounding coulddamage the electrical systems.To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, setthe parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved inthe jump start procedure. Put an automatictransmission in PARK (P) or a manual transmissionin NEUTRAL before setting the parking brake. Ifyou have a four-wheel-drive vehicle, be surethe transfer case is not in NEUTRAL.
5-41
Notice: If you leave your radio or other accessorieson during the jump starting procedure, they couldbe damaged. The repairs would not be coveredby your warranty. Always turn off your radio andother accessories when jump starting your vehicle.
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplugunnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarettelighter or accessory power outlets (if equipped).Turn off the radio and all lamps that aren’t needed.This will avoid sparks and help to save bothbatteries. And it could save your radio!
4. Open both hoods and locate the batteries. Find thepositive (+) and negative (−) terminals on eachbattery. Your vehicle has a remote negative (−) jumpstarting terminal. You should always use thisremote terminal instead of the terminal on thebattery. The remote negative (−) terminal is locatedon the front engine lift bracket on vehicles withthe L6 engine or the engine accessory drive bracketfor vehicles with the V8 engine, and is marked“GND.” See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 5-12 for more information on location.
{CAUTION:
Using a match near a battery can cause batterygas to explode. People have been hurt doingthis, and some have been blinded. Use aflashlight if you need more light.
Be sure the battery has enough water. You donot need to add water to the ACDelco ® batteryinstalled in your new vehicle. But if a batteryhas filler caps, be sure the right amount offluid is there. If it is low, add water to take careof that first. If you do not, explosive gas couldbe present.
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you.Do not get it on you. If you accidentally get itin your eyes or on your skin, flush the placewith water and get medical help immediately.
5-42
{CAUTION:
Fans or other moving engine parts can injureyou badly. Keep your hands away from movingparts once the engine is running.
5. Check that the jumper cables don’t have loose ormissing insulation. If they do, you could get ashock. The vehicles could be damaged too.Before you connect the cables, here are somebasic things you should know. Positive (+) will go topositive (+) or to a remote positive (+) terminal ifthe vehicle has one. Negative (−) will go to a heavy,unpainted metal engine part or to a remotenegative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one. Don’tconnect positive (+) to negative (−) or you’ll geta short that would damage the battery and maybeother parts too. And don’t connect the negative (−)cable to the negative (−) terminal on the deadbattery because this can cause sparks.
6. Connect the redpositive (+) cable to thepositive (+) terminalof the dead battery.Use a remotepositive (+) terminalif the vehiclehas one.
7. Don’t let the other endtouch metal. Connect itto the positive (+)terminal of the goodbattery. Use a remotepositive (+) terminalif the vehicle has one.
5-43
8. Now connect the blacknegative (−) cable tothe negative (−)terminal of the goodbattery. Use a remotenegative (−) terminalif the vehicle has one.
Don’t let the other end touch anything until the nextstep. The other end of the negative (−) cabledoesn’t go to the dead battery. It goes to a heavy,unpainted metal engine part or to the remotenegative (−) terminal on the vehicle with the deadbattery. In the L6 engine, the remote negative (−)terminal is located on the front engine lift bracketand is marked GND. In the V8 engine, theremote negative (–) terminal is located on theaccessory drive bracket and is marked GND.
9. Connect the other end of the negative (−) cable tothe remote negative (−)terminal on the vehicle with the dead battery.
10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and runthe engine for a while.
11. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery. Ifit won’t start after a few tries, it probably needsservice.
Notice: If the jumper cables are removed in thewrong order, electrical shorting may occur anddamage the vehicle. The repairs would not becovered by your warranty. Remove the jumpercables in the correct order, making sure that thecables do not touch each other or other metal.
L6 EngineV8 Engine
5-44
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part or RemoteNegative (−) Terminal
B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) and RemoteNegative (−) Terminals
C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal
To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles, dothe following:
1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from thevehicle that had the dead battery.
2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from thevehicle with the good battery.
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from thevehicle with the good battery.
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the othervehicle.
Jumper Cable Removal
5-45
Rear AxleWhen to Check LubricantIt is not necessary to regularly check rear axle fluidunless you suspect there is a leak or you hear anunusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate a problem.Have it inspected and repaired.
How to Check Lubricant
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on alevel surface.The proper level is from 0 to 3/8 inch (0 to 10 mm)below the bottom of the filler plug hole.
What to UseTo determine what kind of lubricant to use, seeRecommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.
Four-Wheel DriveTransfer CaseWhen to Check LubricantIt is not necessary to regularly check fluid unless yoususpect there is a leak or you hear an unusual noise. Afluid loss could indicate a problem. Have it inspectedand repaired.
5-46
How to Check Lubricant
To get an accuratereading, the vehicle shouldbe on a level surface.
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,you’ll need to add some lubricant. Add enough lubricantto raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole.Use care not to overtighten the plug.
What to UseTo determine what kind of lubricant to use, seeRecommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.
Front AxleFront AxleWhen to Check LubricantIt is not necessary to regularly check front axle fluidunless you suspect there is a leak or you hear anunusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate a problem.Have it inspected and repaired.
How to Check Lubricant
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on alevel surface.
5-47
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,you may need to add some lubricant.
When the differential is cold, add enough lubricant toraise the level to 1/2 inch (12 mm) below the fillerplug hole.
When the differential is at operating temperature(warm), add enough lubricant to raise the level to thebottom of the filler plug hole.
What to UseTo determine what kind of lubricant to use, seeRecommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.
Bulb ReplacementFor the type of bulbs, see Replacement Bulbs onpage 5-49.
For any bulb changing procedure not listed in thissection, contact your dealer.
Taillamps and Turn Signal Lamps1. Open the liftgate.
2. Remove the twoscrews from the lampassembly.
3. Pull the assembly away from the vehicle.
5-48
4. Unclip the wiring harness (A) and remove the threesocket retaining screws (B).
5. Remove the socket by releasing the retaining tabs.
6. Holding the socket, pull the bulb to release itfrom the socket.
7. Push the new bulb into the socket until it clicks.
8. Reinstall the socket and screws.
9. Reconnect the wiring harness.
10. Reinstall the lamp assembly and tighten the screws.
11. Close the liftgate.
Replacement BulbsExterior Lamp Bulb Number
Taillamps 3157Rear Turn Signal Lamps 3157
For any bulb not listed here, contact your dealer.
Windshield Wiper BladeReplacementWindshield wiper blades should be inspected at leasttwice a year for wear or cracking.
Notice: Allowing the wiper blade arm to touch thewindshield when no wiper blade is installedcould damage the windshield. Any damage thatoccurs would not be covered by your warranty. Donot allow the wiper blade arm to touch thewindshield.
1. To remove the old wiper blades, lift the wiper armuntil it locks into a vertical position.
5-49
A. Blade AssemblyB. Arm AssemblyC. Locking Tab
D. Blade PivotE. Hook SlotF. Arm Hook
2. Press down on the blade assembly pivot lockingtab. Pull down on the blade assembly to release itfrom the wiper arm hook.
3. Remove the insert from the blade assembly. Theinsert has two notches at one end that are lockedby the bottom claws of the blade assembly. Atthe notched end, pull the insert from the bladeassembly.
4. To install the new wiper insert, slide the insert (D),notched end last, into the end with two bladeclaws (A). Slide the insert all the way through theblade claws at the opposite end (B). The plasticcaps (C) will be forced off as the insert is fullyinserted.
5. Be sure that the notches are locked by the bottomclaws. Make sure that all other claws are properlylocked on both sides of the insert slots.
5-50
A. Claw in NotchB. Correct InstallationC. Incorrect Installation
6. Put the blade assembly pivot in the wiper armhook. Pull up until the pivot locking tab locks inthe hook slot.
7. Carefully lower the wiper arm and blade assemblyonto the windshield.
Backglass Wiper Blade ReplacementSee Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement on page 5-49for instructions on how to change the backglass wiperblade. The backglass wiper blade will not lock in avertical position like the windshield wiper blade, so careshould be used when pulling it away from the vehicle.
5-51
TiresYour new vehicle comes with high-quality tires made bya leading tire manufacturer. If you ever have questionsabout your tire warranty and where to obtain service,see your GM Warranty booklet for details. For additionalinformation refer to the tire manufacturer’s bookletincluded with your vehicle’s Owner’s Manual.
{CAUTION:
Poorly maintained and improperly used tiresare dangerous.
• Overloading your tires can causeoverheating as a result of too muchfriction. You could have an air-out and aserious accident. See “Loading YourVehicle” in the Index.
• Underinflated tires pose the same dangeras overloaded tires. The resulting accidentcould cause serious injury. Check all tiresfrequently to maintain the recommendedpressure. Tire pressure should be checkedwhen your tires are cold.
CAUTION: (Continued)
CAUTION: (Continued)
• Overinflated tires are more likely to becut, punctured or broken by a suddenimpact — such as when you hit a pothole.Keep tires at the recommended pressure.
• Worn, old tires can cause accidents. Ifyour tread is badly worn, or if your tireshave been damaged, replace them.
Tire Sidewall LabelingUseful information about a tire is molded into thesidewall. The following illustrations are examples of atypical P-Metric and a LT-Metric tire sidewall.
5-52
(A) Tire Size Code: The tire size code is a combinationof letters and numbers used to define a particulartire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction type andservice description. See the “Tire Size Code” illustrationlater in this section for more detail.
(B) Tire Performance Criteria Specification (TPCSpec): Original equipment tires designed to GM’sspecific tire performance criteria have a TPCspecification code molded onto the sidewall. GM’s TPCspecifications meet or exceed all federal safetyguidelines.
(C) Department of Transportation (DOT): TheDepartment of Transportation (DOT) code indicates thatthe tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department ofTransportation Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters andnumbers following DOT code are the Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturerand plant code, tire size, and date the tire wasmanufactured. The TIN is molded onto both sides of thetire, although only one side may have the date ofmanufacture.
P-Metric Tire
5-53
(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and number ofplies in the sidewall and under the tread.
(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG): Tiremanufacturers are required to grade tires based on threeperformance factors: treadwear, traction andtemperature resistance. For more information, seeUniform Tire Quality Grading on page 5-64.
(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit: Maximumload that can be carried and the maximum pressureneeded to support that load. For information onrecommended tire pressure see Inflation - Tire Pressureon page 5-60 and Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-47.
LT-Metric Tire
5-54
(A) Tire Size: The tire size code is a combination ofletters and numbers used to define a particulartire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction type andservice description. See the “Tire Size” illustrationlater in this section for more detail.
(B) Tire Performance Criteria Specification (TPCSpec): Original equipment tires designed to GM’sspecific tire performance criteria have a TPCspecification code molded onto the sidewall. GM’s TPCspecifications meet or exceed all federal safetyguidelines.
(C) Dual Tire Maximum Load: Maximum load that canbe carried and the maximum pressure needed tosupport that load when used in a dual configuration. Forinformation on recommended tire pressure seeInflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-60 and Loading YourVehicle on page 4-47.
(D) Department of Transportation (DOT): TheDepartment of Transportation (DOT) code indicates thatthe tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department ofTransportation Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
(E) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters andnumbers following DOT code are the Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturerand plant code, tire size, and date the tire wasmanufactured. The TIN is molded onto both sides of thetire, although only one side may have the date ofmanufacture.
(F) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and number ofplies in the sidewall and under the tread.
(G) Single Tire Maximum Load: Maximum load thatcan be carried and the maximum pressure neededto support that load when used as a single. Forinformation on recommended tire pressure see Inflation- Tire Pressure on page 5-60 and Loading YourVehicle on page 4-47.
5-55
Tire SizeThe following examples show the different parts of atire size.
(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The United Statesversion of a metric tire sizing system. The letter “P” asthe first character in the tire size means a passengervehicle tire engineered to standards set by the U.S. Tireand Rim Association.
(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicates thetire section width in millimeters from sidewall to sidewall.
(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number that indicatesthe tire height-to-width measurements. For example, ifthe tire size aspect ratio is “75,” as shown in item “C” ofthe illustration, it would mean that the tire’s sidewall is75% as high as it is wide.
(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used toindicate the type of ply construction in the tire. The letter“R” means radial ply construction; the letter “D” meansdiagonal or bias ply construction; and the letter “B”means belted-bias ply construction.
(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in inches.
(F) Service Description: The service descriptionindicates the load range and speed rating of a tire. Theload index can range from 1 to 279. Speed ratingsrange from “A” to “Z”.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire
5-56
(A) Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: The United Statesversion of a metric tire sizing system. The letter “LT” asthe first two characters in the tire size means a lighttruck tire engineered to standards set by the U. S. Tireand Rim Association.
(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicates thetire section width in millimeters from sidewall to sidewall.
(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number that indicatesthe tire height-to-width measurements. For example, ifthe tire size aspect ratio is “75,” as shown in item “C” ofthe illustration, it would mean that the tire’s sidewall is75% as high as it is wide.
(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used toindicate the type of ply construction in the tire. The letter“R” means radial ply construction; the letter “D” meansdiagonal or bias ply construction; and the letter “B”means belted-bias ply construction.
(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in inches.
(F) Service Description: The service descriptionindicates the load range and speed rating of a tire. Theload index can range from 1 to 279. Speed ratingsrange from “A” to “Z”. The light truck tire size exampleabove shows dual or single tire configurations.
Tire Terminology and Definitions
Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the tire pressingoutward on each square inch of the tire. Air pressureis expressed in pounds per square inch (psi) orkilopascal (kPa).
Accessory Weight: This means the combined weightof optional accessories. Some examples of optionalaccessories are, automatic transmission, power steering,power brakes, power windows, power seats, and airconditioning.
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s height to itswidth.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire
5-57
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is locatedbetween the plies and the tread. Cords may be madefrom steel or other reinforcing materials.
Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped bysteel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the plies arelaid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees to thecenterline of the tread.
Cold Inflation Pressure: The amount of air pressure ina tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi) orkilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up heatfrom driving. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-60.
Curb Weight: This means the weight of a motorvehicle with standard and optional equipment includingthe maximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant, butwithout passengers and cargo.
DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewall of atire signifying that the tire is in compliance with the U.S.Department of Transportation motor vehicle safetystandards. The DOT code includes the Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN), an alphanumeric designator which canalso identify the tire manufacturer, production plant,brand and date of production.
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating, see LoadingYour Vehicle on page 4-47.
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the frontaxle, see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-47.
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the rear axle,see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-47.
Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of anasymmetrical tire, that must always face outward whenmounted on a vehicle.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.There are 6.9 kPa’s to one psi.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used on light dutytrucks and some multipurpose passenger vehicles.
Load Index: An assigned number ranging from 1 to 279that corresponds to the load carrying capacity ofa tire.
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum airpressure to which a cold tire may be inflated. Themaximum air pressure is molded onto the sidewall.
Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tire at themaximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum of curbweight; accessory weight; vehicle capacity weight;and production options weight.
5-58
Normal Occupant Weight: The number of occupants avehicle is designed to seat multiplied by 150 pounds(68 kg). See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-47.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of a asymmetricaltire that has a particular side that faces outwardwhen mounted on a vehicle. The side of the tire thatcontains a whitewall, bears white lettering or bearsmanufacturer, brand and or model name molding that ishigher or deeper than the same moldings on theother sidewall of the tire.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on passengercars and some light duty trucks and multipurposevehicles.
Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehiclemanufacturer’s recommended tire inflation pressure andshown on the tire placard. See Inflation - Tire Pressureon page 5-60 and Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-47.
Radial Ply tire: A pneumatic tire in which the ply cordsthat extend to the beads are laid at 90 degrees to thecenterline of the tread.
Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon which the tirebeads are seated.
Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread andthe bead.
Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned to atire indicating the maximum speed at which a tirecan operate.
Traction: The friction between the tire and the roadsurface. The amount of grip provided.
Tread: The portion of a tire that comes into contactwith the road.
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimescalled “wear bars,” that show across the tread of a tirewhen only 2/32 inch of tread remains. See When ItIs Time for New Tires on page 5-62.
UTQGS: Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards, a tireinformation system that provides consumers withratings for a tire’s traction, temperature and treadwear.Ratings are determined by tire manufacturers usinggovernment testing procedures. The ratings are moldedinto the sidewall of the tire. See Uniform Tire QualityGrading on page 5-64.
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of designatedseating positions multiplied by 150 lbs. (68 kg) plusthe rated cargo load. See Loading Your Vehicleon page 4-47.
5-59
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on anindividual tire due to curb weight, accessory weight,occupant weight and cargo weight.
Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached to avehicle showing the original equipment tire sizeand recommended inflation pressure. See Loading YourVehicle on page 4-47.
Inflation - Tire PressureThe tire and loading information label, shows the correctinflation pressures for your tires when they’re cold.“Cold” means your vehicle has been sitting for at leastthree hours or driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km). SeeLoading Your Vehicle on page 4-47, for the locationof your vehicle’s tire and loading information label.
Notice: Don’t let anyone tell you that underinflationor overinflation is all right. It’s not. If your tiresdon’t have enough air (underinflation), you can getthe following:• Too much flexing• Too much heat• Tire overloading• Bad wear• Bad handling• Bad fuel economy
If your tires have too much air (overinflation), youcan get the following:
• Unusual wear
• Bad handling
• Rough ride
• Needless damage from road hazards
When to CheckCheck your tires once a month or more.
Also, check the tire pressure of the spare tire.
How to CheckUse a good quality pocket-type gage to check tirepressure. You can’t tell if your tires are properly inflatedsimply by looking at them. Radial tires may lookproperly inflated even when they’re underinflated. Checkthe tire’s inflation pressure when the tires are cold.cold means your vehicle has been sitting for at leastthree hours or driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem. Press thetire gage firmly onto the valve to get a pressuremeasurement. If the cold tire inflation pressure matchesthe recommended pressure on the tire and loadinginformation label, no further adjustment is necessary. Ifthe pressure is low, add air until you reach therecommended amount.
5-60
If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on themetal stem in the center of the tire valve. Recheck thetire pressure with the tire gage.
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems.They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt andmoisture.
Tire Inspection and RotationTires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles(8 000 to 13 000 km).
Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate your tires assoon as possible and check wheel alignment. Alsocheck for damaged tires or wheels. See When It Is Timefor New Tires on page 5-62 and Wheel Replacementon page 5-65 for more information.
Make sure the spare tire is stored securely. Push, pull,and then try to rotate or turn the tire. If it moves,use the wheel wrench to tighten the cable. Forinformation on storing or removing the spare tire, seeChanging a Flat Tire on page 5-68.
The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve moreuniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. The first rotationis the most important. See Scheduled Maintenanceon page 6-4.
When rotating your tires, always use the correct rotationpattern shown here.
5-61
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front andrear inflation pressures as shown on theCertification/Tire label or the Tire and LoadingInformation label. Make certain that all wheel nuts areproperly tightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” underCapacities and Specifications on page 5-104.
{CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts towhich it is fastened, can make wheel nutsbecome loose after a time. The wheel couldcome off and cause an accident. When youchange a wheel, remove any rust or dirt fromplaces where the wheel attaches to the vehicle.In an emergency, you can use a cloth or apaper towel to do this; but be sure to use ascraper or wire brush later, if you need to, toget all the rust or dirt off. See “Changing a FlatTire” in the Index.
When It Is Time for New Tires
One way to tell when it’stime for new tires is tocheck the treadwearindicators, which willappear when your tireshave only 1/16 inch(1.6 mm) or less of treadremaining. Somecommercial truck tires maynot have treadwearindicators.
You need a new tire if any of the following statementsare true:• You can see the indicators at three or more places
around the tire.• You can see cord or fabric showing through the
tire’s rubber.• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut or snagged
deep enough to show cord or fabric.• The tire has a bump, bulge or split.• The tire has a puncture, cut or other damage that
can’t be repaired well because of the size orlocation of the damage.
5-62
Buying New TiresTo find out what kind and size of tires you need, look atthe Certification/Tire label or the Tire and LoadingInformation label. For examples of these labels and theirlocation on your vehicle, see Loading Your Vehicle onpage 4-47.
The tires installed on your vehicle when it was new hada Tire Performance Criteria Specification (TPC Spec)number on each tire’s sidewall. When you get new tires,General Motors recommends that you get tires withthat same TPC Spec number. That way your vehicle willcontinue to have tires that are designed to give properendurance, handling, speed rating, load range, traction,ride and other things during normal service on yourvehicle. If your tires have an all-season tread design,the TPC number will be followed by an “MS” (for mudand snow).
If you ever replace your tires with those not having aTPC Spec number, make sure they are the same size,load range, speed rating and construction type (bias,bias-belted or radial) as your original tires.
{CAUTION:
Mixing tires could cause you to lose controlwhile driving. If you mix tires of different sizesor types (radial and bias-belted tires) thevehicle may not handle properly, and youcould have a crash. Using tires of differentsizes may also cause damage to your vehicle.Be sure to use the same size and type tires onall wheels.
{CAUTION:
If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle, thewheel rim flanges could develop cracks aftermany miles of driving. A tire and/or wheelcould fail suddenly, causing a crash. Use onlyradial-ply tires with the wheels on your vehicle.
5-63
Uniform Tire Quality GradingQuality grades can be found where applicable on thetire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximumsection width. For example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature AThe following information relates to the systemdeveloped by the United States National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration, which grades tires bytreadwear, traction and temperature performance. (Thisapplies only to vehicles sold in the United States.)The grades are molded on the sidewalls of mostpassenger car tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Gradingsystem does not apply to deep tread, winter-typesnow tires, space-saver or temporary use spare tires,tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches(25 to 30 cm), or to some limited-production tires.
While the tires available on General Motors passengercars and light trucks may vary with respect to thesegrades, they must also conform to federal safetyrequirements and additional General Motors TirePerformance Criteria (TPC) standards.
TreadwearThe treadwear grade is a comparative rating based onthe wear rate of the tire when tested under controlledconditions on a specified government test course.For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one anda half (1.5) times as well on the government course asa tire graded 100. The relative performance of tiresdepends upon the actual conditions of their use,however, and may depart significantly from the normdue to variations in driving habits, service practices anddifferences in road characteristics and climate.
Traction – AA, A, B, CThe traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A,B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s abilityto stop on wet pavement as measured under controlledconditions on specified government test surfaces ofasphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poortraction performance. Warning: The traction gradeassigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead brakingtraction tests, and does not include acceleration,cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
5-64
Temperature – A, B, CThe temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,representing the tire’s resistance to the generationof heat and its ability to dissipate heat when testedunder controlled conditions on a specified indoorlaboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature cancause the material of the tire to degenerate andreduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead tosudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to alevel of performance which all passenger car tires mustmeet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety StandardNo. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels ofperformance on the laboratory test wheel than theminimum required by law.
Warning: The temperature grade for this tire isestablished for a tire that is properly inflated and notoverloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, orexcessive loading, either separately or in combination,can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
Wheel Alignment and Tire BalanceThe wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balancedcarefully at the factory to give you the longest tire lifeand best overall performance.
Scheduled wheel alignment and wheel balancing arenot needed. However, if you notice unusual tire wear oryour vehicle pulling one way or the other, the alignmentmay need to be reset. If you notice your vehiclevibrating when driving on a smooth road, your wheelsmay need to be rebalanced.
Wheel ReplacementReplace any wheel that is bent, cracked or badly rustedor corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, thewheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be replaced.If the wheel leaks air, replace it (except somealuminum wheels, which can sometimes be repaired).See your dealer if any of these conditions exist.
Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need.
5-65
Each new wheel should have the same load-carryingcapacity, diameter, width, offset and be mountedthe same way as the one it replaces.
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel boltsor wheel nuts, replace them only with new GMoriginal equipment parts. This way, you will be sure tohave the right wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nutsfor your vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheelbolts or wheel nuts on your vehicle can bedangerous. It could affect the braking andhandling of your vehicle, make your tires loseair and make you lose control. You could havea collision in which you or others could beinjured. Always use the correct wheel, wheelbolts and wheel nuts for replacement.
Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause problemswith bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer orodometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height,vehicle ground clearance and tire or tire chainclearance to the body and chassis.
See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-68 for moreinformation.
Used Replacement Wheels
{CAUTION:
Putting a used wheel on your vehicle isdangerous. You can’t know how it’s been usedor how far it’s been driven. It could failsuddenly and cause a crash. If you have toreplace a wheel, use a new GM originalequipment wheel.
5-66
Tire Chains
{CAUTION:
Don’t use tire chains. There’s not enoughclearance. Tire chains used on a vehicle withoutthe proper amount of clearance can causedamage to the brakes, suspension or othervehicle parts. The area damaged by the tirechains could cause you to lose control of yourvehicle and you or others may be injured in acrash. Use another type of traction device onlyif its manufacturer recommends it for use onyour vehicle and tire size combination and roadconditions. Follow that manufacturer’sinstructions. To help avoid damage to yourvehicle, drive slowly, readjust or remove thedevice if it’s contacting your vehicle, and don’tspin your wheels. If you do find traction devicesthat will fit, install them on the rear tires.
If a Tire Goes FlatIt’s unusual for a tire to “blowout” while you’re driving,especially if you maintain your tires properly. If air goesout of a tire, it’s much more likely to leak out slowly.But if you should ever have a “blowout,” here are a fewtips about what to expect and what to do:
If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag thatpulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off theaccelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake toa stop well out of the traffic lane.
5-67
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like askid and may require the same correction you’d usein a skid. In any rear blowout, remove your foot from theaccelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control bysteering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may bevery bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gentlybrake to a stop, well off the road if possible.
{CAUTION:
Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to domaintenance or repairs is dangerous withoutthe appropriate safety equipment and training.The jack provided with your vehicle isdesigned only for changing a flat tire. If it isused for anything else, you or others could bebadly injured or killed if the vehicle slips offthe jack. Use the jack provided with yourvehicle only for changing a flat tire.
If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use yourjacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.
Changing a Flat TireIf a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damageby driving slowly to a level place. Turn on yourhazard warning flashers.
{CAUTION:
Changing a tire can cause an injury. Thevehicle can slip off the jack and roll over youor other people. You and they could be badlyinjured. Find a level place to change your tire.To help prevent the vehicle from moving:
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
2. Put the shift lever in PARK (P).
3. If you have a four-wheel-drive vehicle,be sure the transfer case is in a drivegear – not in NEUTRAL.
4. Turn off the engine.
5. Put the wheel blocks at the front and rearof the tire farthest away from the onebeing changed. That would be the tire onthe other side of the vehicle, at theopposite end.
5-68
The following steps will tell you how to use the jack andchange a tire.
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools
TrailBlazer
5-69
The jacking equipment you will need is stored under therear seat in the TrailBlazer or in the left rear quarterpanel storage compartment in the TrailBlazer EXT. Torelease the jack from its holder, turn the knob onthe jack counterclockwise to lower the jack head. SeeRear Seat Operation on page 1-6 for more informationon accessing the jacking equipment.
The tools you’ll be using include the wheel wrench (A),wheel blocks (B), extension(s) (socket end) (C),handle (jack end) (D), and jack (E). The Trailblazer EXTwill include an additional extension
The following instructions explain how to remove thespare tire mounted underneath your vehicle.
Notice: If you remove or restow a tire from/to thestorage position under the vehicle when it issupported by a jack, you could damage the tireand/or your vehicle. Always remove or restow a tirewhen the vehicle is on the ground.
TrailBlazer EXT
5-70
1. To remove the underbody-mounted spare, insertthe socket end of the extension on a 45 degreeangle downward into the hoist drive shaft hole. It isexposed when the rear gate is open and is justabove the rear bumper. Be sure the socket end ofthe extension connects to the hoist shaft.
2. Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to lowerthe spare tire. Keep turning the wheel wrench untilthe spare tire can be pulled out from under thevehicle.If the spare tire does not lower to the ground, thesecondary latch is engaged causing the tirenot to lower. See “Secondary Latch System” later inthis section.When the tire has been completely lowered, tilt theretainer at the end of the cable and pull it throughthe wheel opening. Pull the tire out from underthe vehicle.
Notice: If you drive away before the spare tire orsecondary latch system cable has been reinstalled,you could damage your vehicle. Always reinstallthis cable before driving your vehicle.
3. Put the spare tire near the flat tire.
5-71
4. Position the chisel end of the wheel wrench in thenotch of the center cap and pry off the center cap.See “Removing the Flat Tire and Installing theSpare Tire” later in this section to continue changingthe flat tire.
Secondary Latch SystemYour vehicle has an underbody mounted tire hoistassembly equipped with a secondary latch system. It’sdesigned to stop the spare or flat road tire fromsuddenly falling off your vehicle if the cable holding thespare tire is damaged. For the secondary latch towork, the tire must be stored with the valve stempointing up. See “Storing a Flat Tire and Tools” forinstructions on storing the spare or flat tire correctly.
{CAUTION:
Before beginning this procedure read all theinstructions. Failure to read and follow theinstructions could damage the hoist assemblyand you and others could get hurt. Read andfollow the instructions listed below.
5-72
{CAUTION:
Someone standing too close during theprocedure could be injured by the jack. If thespare tire does not slide off the jackcompletely, make sure no one is behind you oron either side of you as you pull the jack outfrom the spare.
To release the spare tirefrom the secondary latchdo the following:
1. Check under the vehicle to see if the cable isvisible.
2. If it is not visible, proceed to Step 6.If visible, first try to tighten the cable by turning thewheel wrench clockwise until you hear two clicksor feel it skip twice. You cannot overtightenthe cable.
3. Loosen the cable by turning the wheel wrenchcounterclockwise three or four turns.
4. Repeat this procedure at least two times.If the spare tire lowers to the ground, continue withStep 2 of “Removing the Spare Tire and Tools”earlier in this section.
5. Turn the wrench counterclockwise untilapproximately 6 inches (15 cm) of cable is exposed.
5-73
6. Attach the jack handle, extension(s) and the wheelwrench to the jack and place it under the vehicletowards the front of the rear bumper. Positionthe center lift point of the jack under the center ofthe spare tire.
7. Turn the wrench clockwise to raise the jack until itlifts the end fitting.
8. Continue raising the jack until the spare tire stopsmoving upward and is held firmly in place. Thesecondary latch has released and the spare tire isbalancing on the jack.
9. Lower the jack by turning the wheel wrenchcounterclockwise. Keep lowering the jack until thespare tire slides off the jack or is hanging bythe cable.
10. Disconnect the jack handle from the jack andcarefully remove the jack. Use one hand to pushagainst the spare while firmly pulling the jack outfrom under the spare tire with the other hand.
5-74
If the spare tire is hanging from the cable, insert thesocket end of the extension connected to the wheelwrench into the hoist shaft hole in the bumper on anangle. Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise tolower the spare the rest of the way.
11. Tilt the retainer at the end of the cable and pull itthrough the wheel opening. Pull the tire out fromunder the vehicle.
12. If the cable is hanging under the vehicle, turnthe wheel wrench clockwise to raise the cableback up.
Have the hoist assembly inspected as soon as you can.You will not be able to store a spare or flat tire usingthe hoist assembly until it has been repaired or replaced.
5-75
Removing the Flat Tire and Installingthe Spare Tire
1. Using the wheel wrench, loosen all the wheel nuts.Don’t remove them yet.
2. Turn the jack adjusting knob clockwise by hand toraise the jack lift head.
3. Place the handle, extension and wheel wrench ontothe jack.
A. Front Frame/Rear Axle
B. Jack
C. HandleD. Extension(s)E. Wheel Wrench
FrontRear
5-76
4. Place the jack in the appropriate position nearestthe flat tire.
{CAUTION:
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up isdangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack youcould be badly injured or killed. Never getunder a vehicle when it is supported only bya jack.
{CAUTION:
Raising your vehicle with the jack improperlypositioned can damage the vehicle and evenmake the vehicle fall. To help avoid personalinjury and vehicle damage, be sure to fit thejack lift head into the proper location beforeraising the vehicle.
5. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack handleclockwise. Raise the vehicle far enough off theground so there is enough room for the spare tireto fit.
6. Remove all the wheel nuts and take off the flat tire.
5-77
7. Remove any rust or dirtfrom the wheel bolts,mounting surfacesand spare wheel.
{CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on the wheel, or on the parts towhich it is fastened, can make the wheel nutsbecome loose after a time. The wheel couldcome off and cause an accident. When youchange a wheel, remove any rust or dirt fromthe places where the wheel attaches to thevehicle. In an emergency, you can use a clothor a paper towel to do this; but be sure to usea scraper or wire brush later, if you need to, toget all the rust or dirt off.
{CAUTION:
Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts. Ifyou do, the nuts might come loose. Your wheelcould fall off, causing a serious accident.
8. Place the spare on the wheel mounting surface.9. Put the nuts on by
hand. Make sure therounded end istoward the wheel.
10. Tighten each nut by hand until the wheel is heldagainst the hub. If a nut can’t be turned by hand,use the wheel wrench and see your dealer as soonas possible.
5-78
11. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack handlecounterclockwise. Lower the jack completely.
12. Use the wrench totighten the wheel nutsfirmly in a crisscrosssequence as shown.
{CAUTION:
Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightenedwheel nuts can cause the wheel to becomeloose and even come off. This could lead to anaccident. Be sure to use the correct wheelnuts. If you have to replace them, be sure toget new GM original equipment wheel nuts.Stop somewhere as soon as you can andhave the nuts tightened with a torque wrenchto 100 lb-ft (140 Y).
Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can leadto brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoidexpensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheelnuts in the proper sequence and to the propertorque specification. See “Capacities andSpecifications” in the index for the wheel nut torquespecification.
5-79
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools
{CAUTION:
Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment in thepassenger compartment of the vehicle couldcause injury. In a sudden stop or collision,loose equipment could strike someone. Storeall these in the proper place.
{CAUTION:
The underbody-mounted spare tire needs to bestored with the valve stem pointing up. If thespare tire is stored with the valve stempointing downward, its secondary latch won’t
CAUTION: (Continued)
CAUTION: (Continued)
work properly and the spare tire could loosenand suddenly fall from your vehicle. If thishappened when your vehicle was being driven,the tire might contact a person or anothervehicle, causing injury and, of course, damageto itself as well. Be sure theunderbody-mounted spare tire is stored withits valve stem pointing up.
Notice: An aluminum wheel with a flat tire shouldalways be stored under the vehicle with thehoist. However, storing it that way for an extendedperiod could damage the wheel. To avoid this,always stow the wheel properly with the valve stempointing up and have the wheel repaired as soonas possible.
5-80
Follow this diagram to store the underbody-mountedspare.
A. Wheel WrenchB. Hoist ShaftC. Extension(s)D. RetainerE. Spare or Flat Tire
(Valve StemPointed Up)
1. Put the tire on the ground at the rear of the vehicle,with the valve stem pointed up and to the rear.
2. Pull the retainer through the wheel.
3. Put the socket end of the extension, on an angle,through the hole in the rear bumper and into thehoist shaft.
4. Raise the tire fully against the underside of thevehicle. Continue turning the wheel wrenchclockwise until you hear two clicks or feel it skiptwice. This indicates that the tire is secure and thecable is tight. The spare tire hoist cannot beovertightened.
5. Make sure the tire is stored securely. Push, pulland then try to turn the tire. If the tire moves, usethe wheel wrench and socket end of the extensionto tighten the cable.
(A) Push and Pull, (B) Rotate or Turn
5-81
Return the jack, wheel wrench and wheel blocksto the proper location in the vehicle. Roll upthe instruction label and return it to the slot in thetool kit.
A. HandleB. Wheel WrenchC. Instruction Label
D. Extension(s)E. Wheel Blocks
and Jack
A. Instruction LabelB. HandleC. Extension(s)
D. Wheel WrenchE. Wheel Blocks
and JackTrailBlazer
TrailBlazer EXT
5-82
Spare TireYour vehicle, when new, had a fully inflated spare tire.A spare tire may lose air over time, so check itsinflation pressure regularly. See Inflation - Tire Pressureon page 5-60 and “Loading Your Vehicle” for informationregarding proper tire inflation and loading your vehicle.For instruction on how to remove, install or store a sparetire, see Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-68.
After installing the spare tire on your vehicle, you shouldstop as soon as possible and make sure the spare iscorrectly inflated. Have the damaged or flat roadtire repaired or replaced as soon as you can andinstalled back onto your vehicle. This way, a spare tirewill be available in case you need it again.
Appearance CareRemember, cleaning products can be hazardous. Someare toxic. Others can burst into flames if you strike amatch or get them on a hot part of the vehicle. Some aredangerous if you breathe their fumes in a closedspace. When you use anything from a container to cleanyour vehicle, be sure to follow the manufacturer’swarnings and instructions. And always open your doorsor windows when you are cleaning the inside.
Never use these to clean your vehicle:
• Gasoline
• Benzene
• Naphtha
• Carbon Tetrachloride
• Acetone
• Paint Thinner
• Turpentine
• Lacquer Thinner
• Nail Polish Remover
They can all be hazardous — some more thanothers — and they can all damage your vehicle, too.
Do not use any of these unless this manual saysyou can. In many uses, these will damage your vehicle:
• Alcohol
• Laundry Soap
• Bleach
• Reducing Agents
5-83
Cleaning the Inside of Your VehicleUse a vacuum cleaner often to get rid of dust andloose dirt. Wipe vinyl, leather, plastic and paintedsurfaces with a clean, damp cloth.
Cleaning Fabric/CarpetYour dealer has cleaners for the cleaning of fabricand carpet. They will clean normal spots and stainsvery well.
You can get GM-approved cleaning products from yourdealer. See Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials onpage 5-90.
Here are some cleaning tips:
• Always read the instructions on the cleaner label.
• Clean up stains as soon as you can — beforethey set.
• Carefully scrape off any excess stain.
• Use a clean cloth or sponge, and change to a cleanarea often. A soft brush may be used if stains arestubborn.
• If a ring forms on fabric after spot cleaning, cleanthe entire area immediately or it will set.
Using Cleaner on Fabric1. Vacuum and brush the area to remove any
loose dirt.
2. Always clean a whole trim panel or section. Masksurrounding trim along stitch or welt lines.
3. Follow the directions on the container label.
4. Apply cleaner with a clean sponge. Do not saturatethe material and do not rub it roughly.
5. As soon as you have cleaned the section, use asponge to remove any excess cleaner.
6. Wipe cleaned area with a clean, water-dampenedtowel or cloth.
7. Wipe with a clean cloth and let dry.
Special Fabric Cleaning ProblemsStains caused by such things as catsup, coffee (black),egg, fruit, fruit juice, milk, soft drinks, vomit, urineand blood can be removed as follows:
1. Carefully scrape off excess stain, then sponge thesoiled area with cool water.
2. If a stain remains, follow the cleaning instructionsdescribed earlier.
5-84
3. If an odor lingers after cleaning vomit or urine, treatthe area with a water and baking soda solution:1 teaspoon (5 ml) of baking soda to 1 cup (250 ml)of lukewarm water.
4. Let dry.
Stains caused by candy, ice cream, mayonnaise, chilisauce and unknown stains can be removed as follows:
1. Carefully scrape off excess stain.
2. Clean with cool water and allow to dry completely.
3. If a stain remains, follow the cleaner instructionsdescribed earlier.
Cleaning VinylUse warm water and a clean cloth.
• Rub with a clean, damp cloth to remove dirt. Youmay have to do this more than once.
• Things like tar, asphalt and shoe polish will stain ifyou do not get them off quickly. Use a clean clothand vinyl cleaner. See your dealer for this product.
Cleaning LeatherUse a soft cloth with lukewarm water and a mild soap orsaddle soap and wipe dry with a soft cloth. Then, letthe leather dry naturally. Do not use heat to dry.
• For stubborn stains, use a leather cleaner.
• Never use oils, varnishes, solvent-based or abrasivecleaners, furniture polish or shoe polish on leather.
• Soiled or stained leather should be cleanedimmediately. If dirt is allowed to work into the finish,it can harm the leather.
Cleaning the Top of the InstrumentPanelUse only mild soap and water to clean the top surfacesof the instrument panel. Sprays containing siliconesor waxes may cause annoying reflections in thewindshield and even make it difficult to see through thewindshield under certain conditions.
Cleaning Interior Plastic ComponentsUse only a mild soap and water solution on a soft clothor sponge. Commercial cleaners may affect thesurface finish.
5-85
Cleaning Glass SurfacesGlass should be cleaned often. GM Glass Cleaner or aliquid household glass cleaner will remove normaltobacco smoke and dust films on interior glass. SeeVehicle Care/Appearance Materials on page 5-90.
Notice: If you use abrasive cleaners when cleaningglass surfaces on your vehicle, you could scratchthe glass and/or cause damage to the rear windowdefogger and the integrated radio antenna. Whencleaning the glass on your vehicle, use only a softcloth and glass cleaner.
Care of Safety BeltsKeep belts clean and dry.
{CAUTION:
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If you do, itmay severely weaken them. In a crash, theymight not be able to provide adequateprotection. Clean safety belts only with mildsoap and lukewarm water.
WeatherstripsSilicone grease on weatherstrips will make them lastlonger, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Applysilicone grease with a clean cloth at least every sixmonths. During very cold, damp weather more frequentapplication may be required. See RecommendedFluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.
Cleaning the Outside of YourVehicleThe paint finish on your vehicle provides beauty, depthof color, gloss retention and durability.
Washing Your VehicleThe best way to preserve your vehicle’s finish is to keepit clean by washing it often with lukewarm or coldwater.
Don’t wash your vehicle in the direct rays of the sun.Use a car washing soap. Don’t use strong soapsor chemical detergents. Be sure to rinse the vehiclewell, removing all soap residue completely. You can getGM-approved cleaning products from your dealer.See Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials on page 5-90.
5-86
Don’t use cleaning agents that are petroleum based, orthat contain acid or abrasives. All cleaning agentsshould be flushed promptly and not allowed to dry onthe surface, or they could stain. Dry the finish with a soft,clean chamois or an all-cotton towel to avoid surfacescratches and water spotting.
High pressure car washes may cause water to enteryour vehicle.
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/LensesUse only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a carwashing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses.Follow instructions under “Washing Your Vehicle.”
Finish CareOccasional waxing or mild polishing of your vehicle byhand may be necessary to remove residue from thepaint finish. You can get GM-approved cleaning productsfrom your dealer. See Vehicle Care/AppearanceMaterials on page 5-90.
If your vehicle has a “basecoat/clearcoat” paint finish.The clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the coloredbasecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that arenon-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat paintfinish.
Notice: Machine compounding or aggressivepolishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish maydamage it. Use only non-abrasive waxes andpolishes that are made for a basecoat/clearcoatpaint finish on your vehicle.
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and othersalts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, birddroppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc.,can damage your vehicle’s finish if they remainon painted surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon aspossible. If necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners thatare marked safe for painted surfaces to removeforeign matter.
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weatherand chemical fallout that can take their toll over aperiod of years. You can help to keep the paint finishlooking new by keeping your vehicle garaged or coveredwhenever possible.
Protecting Exterior Bright Metal PartsBright metal parts should be cleaned regularly to keeptheir luster. Washing with water is all that is usuallyneeded. However, you may use chrome polish onchrome or stainless steel trim, if necessary.
5-87
Use special care with aluminum trim. To avoid damagingprotective trim, never use auto or chrome polish,steam or caustic soap to clean aluminum. A coating ofwax, rubbed to high polish, is recommended for allbright metal parts.
Cleaning the Windshield, Backglassand Wiper BladesIf the windshield is not clear after using the windshieldwasher, or if the wiper blade chatters when running,wax, sap or other material may be on the blade orwindshield.
Clean the outside of the windshield with a full-strengthglass cleaning liquid. The windshield is clean if beads donot form when you rinse it with water.
Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiper bladesand affect their performance. Clean the blade bywiping vigorously with a cloth soaked in full-strengthwindshield washer solvent. Then rinse the bladewith water.
Check the wiper blades and clean them as necessary;replace blades that look worn.
Cleaning Aluminum WheelsKeep your wheels clean using a soft clean cloth withmild soap and water. Rinse with clean water. Afterrinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A waxmay then be applied.
The surface of these wheels is similar to the paintedsurface of your vehicle. Don’t use strong soaps,chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners,cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes onthem because you could damage the surface. Do notuse chrome polish on aluminum wheels.
Don’t take your vehicle through an automatic car washthat has silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes. Thesebrushes can also damage the surface of these wheels.
Cleaning TiresTo clean your tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner.
Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressingproducts on your vehicle may damage the paintfinish and/or tires. When applying a tire dressing,always wipe off any overspray from all paintedsurfaces on your vehicle.
5-88
Sheet Metal DamageIf your vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metalrepair or replacement, make sure the body repair shopapplies anti-corrosion material to parts repaired orreplaced to restore corrosion protection.
Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide thecorrosion protection while maintaining the warranty.
Finish DamageAny stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in thefinish should be repaired right away. Bare metalwill corrode quickly and may develop into major repairexpense.
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-upmaterials avaliable from your dealer. Larger areas offinish damage can be corrected in your dealer’sbody and paint shop.
Underbody MaintenanceChemicals used for ice and snow removal and dustcontrol can collect on the underbody. If these are notremoved, corrosion and rust can develop on theunderbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan andexhaust system even though they have corrosionprotection.
At least every spring, flush these materials from theunderbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mudand debris can collect. Dirt packed in close areas ofthe frame should be loosened before being flushed.Your dealer or an underbody car washing system cando this for you.
Chemical Paint SpottingSome weather and atmospheric conditions can create achemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon andattack painted surfaces on your vehicle. This damagecan take two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped discolorations,and small, irregular dark spots etched into the paintsurface.
Although no defect in the paint job causes this, GM willrepair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces ofnew vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,whichever occurs first.
5-89
Vehicle Care/Appearance MaterialsSee your GM dealer for more information on purchasingthe following products.
Cleans, shines and protectsin one easy step, no wipingnecessary.
Wash WaxConcentrate
Medium foaming shampoo.Cleans and lightly waxes.Biodegradable andphosphate free.
Spot Lifter
Quickly and easily removesspots and stains fromcarpets, vinyl and clothupholstery.
Odor EliminatorOdorless spray odoreliminator used on fabrics,vinyl, leather and carpet.
See your General Motors parts department for theseproducts. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricantson page 6-12.
5-90
Vehicle Identification
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It appears ona plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, onthe driver’s side. You can see it if you look through thewindshield from outside your vehicle. The VIN alsoappears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Partslabels and the certificates of title and registration.
Engine IdentificationThe 8th character in your VIN is the engine code. Thiscode will help you identify your engine, specificationsand replacement parts.
Service Parts Identification LabelYou’ll find this label on the inside of the glove box. It’svery helpful if you ever need to order parts. On thislabel is:
• your VIN,
• the model designation,
• paint information and
• a list of all production options and specialequipment.
Be sure that this label is not removed from the vehicle.
5-91
Electrical System
Add-On Electrical EquipmentNotice: Don’t add anything electrical to yourvehicle unless you check with your dealer first.Some electrical equipment can damage your vehicleand the damage wouldn’t be covered by yourwarranty. Some add-on electrical equipment cankeep other components from working as theyshould.
Your vehicle has an air bag system. Before attemptingto add anything electrical to your vehicle, seeServicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-58.
HeadlampsThe headlamp wiring is protected by four fuses. Anelectrical overload will cause a lamp to go on and off. Ifthis happens, have your headlamp wiring checkedright away.
Windshield Wiper FusesThe windshield wiper motor is protected by a circuitbreaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats due to heavysnow or ice, the wiper will stop until the motor cools.If the overload is caused by some electrical problem, besure to get it fixed.
Power Windows and OtherPower OptionsCircuit breakers protect the power windows and otherpower accessories. When the current load is too heavy,the circuit breaker opens and closes, protecting thecircuit until the problem is fixed or goes away.
5-92
Fuses and Circuit BreakersThe wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected fromshort circuits by a combination of fuses and circuitbreakers. This greatly reduces the chance of firescaused by electrical problems.
Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If theband is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure youreplace a bad fuse with a new one of the identicalsize and rating.
If you ever have a problem on the road and don’t havea spare fuse, you can borrow one that has the sameamperage. Just pick some feature of your vehiclethat you can get along without — like the radio orcigarette lighter— and use its fuse, if it is the correctamperage. Replace it as soon as you can.
Engine Compartment Fuse Block
The fuse block is located under the hood in the enginecompartment on the driver’s side of the vehicle. SeeEngine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for moreinformation on location.
Remove the primary cover by pressing the two lockingtabs. Remove the secondary cover by snapping offwhile lifting. To reinstall the fuse panel cover, reversethe sequence.
5-93
L6 Engine
5-94
Fuses Usage
1 Electrically-Controlled AirSuspension
2 Passenger’s Side High-BeamHeadlamp
3 Passenger’s Side Low-BeamHeadlamp
4 Back-Up-Trailer Lamps5 Driver’s Side High-Beam Headlamp6 Driver’s Side Low-Beam Headlamp
7 Rear Window Washer, HeadlampWasher
8 Automatic Transfer Case9 Windshield Washer
10 Powertrain Control Module B11 Fog Lamps12 Stop Lamp13 Cigarette Lighter14 Ignition Coils15 Blank16 TBC-Ignition 1
Fuses Usage17 Crank18 Air Bag19 Trailer Electric Brake20 Cooling Fan21 Horn22 Ignition E23 Electronic Throttle Control
24 Instrument Panel Cluster, DriverInformation Center
25 Automatic Shift Lock ControlSystem
26 Backup27 Engine 128 Powertrain Control Module 129 Oxygen Sensor30 Air Conditioning31 Truck Body Controller32 Trailer33 Anti-Lock Brakes (ABS)34 Ignition A
5-95
Fuses Usage35 Blower Motor36 Ignition B50 Passenger’s Side Trailer Turn51 Driver’s Side Trailer Turn52 Hazard Flashers53 Electric Adjustable Pedal54 A.I.R. Solenoid56 A.I.R. Pump
Relays Usage37 Headlamp Washer38 Rear Window Washer39 Fog Lamps40 Horn
4 Back-Up-Trailer Lamps5 Driver’s Side High-Beam Headlamp6 Driver’s Side Low-Beam Headlamp
7 Rear Window Washer, HeadlampWasher
8 Automatic Transfer Case9 Windshield Washer
10 Powertrain Control Module B11 Fog Lamps12 Stop Lamp13 Cigarette Lighter14 Ignition Coils15 Canister Vent16 TBC-Ignition 117 Crank18 Air Bag19 Trailer Electric Brake20 Cooling Fan
Fuses Usage21 Horn22 Ignition E23 Electronic Throttle Control
24 Instrument Panel Cluster, DriverInformation Center
25 Automatic Shift Lock ControlSystem
26 Backup27 Engine 128 Powertrain Control Module 130 Air Conditioning31 Truck Body Controller32 Trailer33 Anti-Lock Brakes (ABS)34 Ignition A35 Blower Motor36 Ignition B50 Passenger’s Side Trailer Turn51 Driver’s Side Trailer Turn52 Hazard Flashers53 Oxygen Sensor Bank B54 Oxygen Sensor Bank A55 Injector Bank A
5-98
Fuses Usage56 Injector Bank B57 Electric Adjustable Pedal
Relays Usage37 Headlamp Washer38 Rear Window Washer39 Fog Lamps40 Horn41 Fuel Pump42 Windshield Washer43 High-Beam Headlamp44 Air Conditioning45 Cooling Fan46 Headlamp Driver Module47 Starter49 Electric Adjustable Pedal58 Ignition 1
Miscellaneous Usage48 Instrument Panel Battery
Rear Underseat Fuse Block
TrailBlazer
5-99
Fuses Usage01 Right Door Control Module02 Left Door Control Module03 Liftgate Module 204 Truck Body Controller 305 Rear Fog Lamps06 Blank07 Truck Body Controller 208 Power Seats09 Rear Wiper10 Driver Door Module11 Amplifier12 Passenger Door Module13 Rear Climate Controls14 Left Rear Parking Lamps15 Blank
Fuses Usage25 Blank26 Blank27 OH Battery/OnStar® System29 Rainsense™ Wipers30 Parking Lamps31 Truck Body Controller Accessory32 Truck Body Controller 533 Front Wipers34 Vehicle Stop35 Blank36 Heat Ventilation Air Conditioning B37 Front Parking Lamps38 Left Turn Signal39 Heat Ventilation Air Conditioning 140 Truck Body Controller 441 Radio42 Trailer Park43 Right Turn Signal44 Heat Ventilation Air Conditioning45 Rear Fog Lamps
Fuses Usage46 Auxiliary Power 147 Ignition 048 Four-Wheel Drive49 Blank50 Truck Body Controller Ignition51 Brakes52 Truck Body Controller Run
TrailBlazer EXT
5-101
Fuses Usage01 Right Door Control Module02 Left Door Control Module03 Liftgate Module 204 Truck Body Controller 305 Rear Fog Lamps06 Blank07 Truck Body Controller 208 Power Seats09 Rear Wiper10 Driver Door Module11 Amplifier12 Passenger Door Module13 Rear Climate Controls14 Left Rear Parking Lamps15 Blank
Fuses Usage24 Unlock25 Blank26 Blank27 OH Battery/OnStar® System28 Sunroof29 Rainsense™ Wipers30 Parking Lamps31 Truck Body Controller Accessory32 Truck Body Controller 533 Front Wipers34 Vehicle Stop35 Blank36 Heat Ventilation Air Conditioning B37 Front Parking Lamps38 Left Turn Signal
Fuses Usage39 Heat Ventilation Air Conditioning 140 Truck Body Controller 441 Radio42 Trailer Park43 Right Turn Signal44 Heat Ventilation Air Conditioning45 Rear Fog Lamps46 Auxiliary Power 147 Ignition 048 Four-Wheel Drive49 Blank50 Truck Body Controller Ignition51 Brakes52 Truck Body Controller Run
5-103
Capacities and Specifications
Engine VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap
“VORTEC™ ” 4200 L6 S M30 0.042 inches (1.07 mm)
“VORTEC™ ” 5300 V8 P M30 0.040 inches (1.01 mm)
ApplicationL6 Engine V8 Engine
English Metric English MetricWheel Nut Torque 100 lb ft 140Y 100 lb ft 140YCooling System
TrailBlazer 13.9 quarts 13.1 L 15.3 quarts 14.5 LTrailBlazer EXT 15.2 quarts 14.4 L 17.9 quarts 17.0 L
Air Conditioning Refrigerant R/134aTrailBlazer 1.9 lbs. 0.85 kg 1.9 lbs. 0.85 kg
TrailBlazer EXT 2.8 lbs. 1.27 kg 2.8 lbs. 1.27 kgEngine Oil with Filter 7.0 quarts 6.6 L 6.0 quarts 5.7 LTransmission(Drain and Refill) 5.0 quarts 4.7 L 5.0 quarts 4.7 L
5-104
ApplicationL6 Engine V8 Engine
English Metric English MetricDifferential FluidRear 3.6 pints 1.7 L 4.3 pints 2.0 LFront 1.7 pints 0.8 L 1.7 pints 0.8 LFuel Tank
TrailBlazer 22.0 gallons 83.3 L 22.0 gallons 83.3 LTrailBlazer EXT 25.3 gallons 95.8 L 25.3 gallons 95.8 L
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the appropriate level, as recommended in thismanual. Recheck the fluid level after filling.
5-105
✍ NOTES
5-106
Maintenance Schedule ......................................6-2Introduction ...................................................6-2Maintenance Requirements ..............................6-2Your Vehicle and the Environment ....................6-2Using Your Maintenance Schedule ....................6-3Scheduled Maintenance ...................................6-4Additional Required Services ............................6-6Maintenance Footnotes ...................................6-7
Owner Checks and Services ............................6-9At Each Fuel Fill ............................................6-9At Least Once a Month ...................................6-9At Least Once a Year ...................................6-10Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ...............6-12Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ..........6-14Engine Drive Belt Routing ..............................6-15Maintenance Record .....................................6-16
Section 6 Maintenance Schedule
6-1
Maintenance Schedule
IntroductionImportant: Keep engine oil at the proper level andchange as recommended.
Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plansupplements your new vehicle warranties. See yourWarranty and Owner Assistance booklet or your dealerfor details.
Maintenance RequirementsNotice: Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections,replacement parts and recommended fluids andlubricants as prescribed in this manual arenecessary to keep your vehicle in good workingcondition. Any damage caused by failure to followscheduled maintenance may not be covered bywarranty.
Your Vehicle and the EnvironmentProper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep yourvehicle in good working condition, but also helps theenvironment. All recommended maintenance isimportant. Improper vehicle maintenance can evenaffect the quality of the air we breathe. Improper fluidlevels or the wrong tire inflation can increase the level ofemissions from your vehicle. To help protect ourenvironment, and to keep your vehicle in good condition,be sure to maintain your vehicle properly.
6-2
Using Your Maintenance ScheduleWe at General Motors want to help you keep yourvehicle in good working condition. But we do not knowexactly how you will drive it. You may drive very shortdistances only a few times a week. Or you may drive longdistances all the time in very hot, dusty weather. You mayuse your vehicle in making deliveries. Or you may drive itto work, to do errands or in many other ways.Because of all the different ways people use theirvehicles, maintenance needs vary. You may need morefrequent checks and replacements. So please readthe following and note how you drive. If you have anyquestions on how to keep your vehicle in good condition,see your GM Goodwrench dealer.This schedule is for vehicles that:• carry passengers and cargo within recommended
limits. You will find these limits on the tire andloading information label. See Loading Your Vehicleon page 4-47.
• are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legaldriving limits.
• are driven off-road in the recommended manner.See Off-Road Driving with Your Four-Wheel-DriveVehicle on page 4-15.
• use the recommended fuel. See Gasoline Octaneon page 5-4.
The services in Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4should be performed when indicated. See AdditionalRequired Services on page 6-6 and MaintenanceFootnotes on page 6-7 for further information.
{CAUTION:
Performing maintenance work on a vehicle canbe dangerous. In trying to do some jobs, youcan be seriously injured. Do your ownmaintenance work only if you have therequired know-how and the proper tools andequipment for the job. If you have any doubt,see your GM Goodwrench dealer to have aqualified technician do the work.
Some maintenance services can be complex. So,unless you are technically qualified and have thenecessary equipment, you should have your GMGoodwrench dealer do these jobs.
When you go to your GM Goodwrench dealer for yourservice needs, you will know that GM-trained andsupported service technicians will perform the workusing genuine GM parts.
If you want to get service information, see ServicePublications Ordering Information on page 7-11.
6-3
Owner Checks and Services on page 6-9 tells you whatshould be checked, when to check it and what youcan easily do to help keep your vehicle in goodcondition.
The proper replacement parts, fluids and lubricants touse are listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricantson page 6-12 and Normal Maintenance ReplacementParts on page 6-14. When your vehicle is serviced,make sure these are used. All parts should be replacedand all necessary repairs done before you or anyoneelse drives the vehicle. We recommend the use ofgenuine GM parts.
Scheduled MaintenanceWhen the CHANGE ENGINE OIL light comes on, itmeans that service is required for your vehicle. Haveyour vehicle serviced as soon as possible within the next600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible that, if you aredriving under the best conditions, the engine oillife system may not indicate that vehicle service isnecessary for over a year. However, your engine oil andfilter must be changed at least once a year and atthis time the system must be reset. Your GMGoodwrench dealer has GM-trained service technicianswho will perform this work using genuine GM partsand reset the system.
If the engine oil life system is ever reset accidentally,you must service your vehicle within 3,000 miles(5 000 km) since your last service. Remember to resetthe oil life system whenever the oil is changed. SeeEngine Oil on page 5-15 for information on the EngineOil Life System and resetting the system.
When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL light appears, certainservices, checks and inspections are required.Required services are described in the following for“Maintenance I” and “Maintenance II.” Generally,it is recommended that your first service beMaintenance I, your second service be Maintenance IIand that you alternate Maintenance I and Maintenance IIthereafter. However, in some cases, Maintenance IImay be required more often.
Maintenance I — Use Maintenance I if the CHANGEENGINE OIL light comes on within ten months sincevehicle was purchased or Maintenance II wasperformed.
Maintenance II — Use Maintenance II if the previousservice performed was Maintenance I. Always useMaintenance II whenever the light comes on ten monthsor more since the last service or if the light has notcome on at all for one year.
6-4
Scheduled MaintenanceService Maintenance I Maintenance II
Change engine oil and filter. Reset oil life system. See Engine Oil onpage 5-15. An Emission Control Service. • •Visually check for any leaks or damage. See footnote (j). • •Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace filter. See Engine AirCleaner/Filter on page 5-20. An Emission Control Service. See footnote †. • •
Rotate tires and check inflation pressures and wear. See Tires on page 5-52. • •Inspect brake system. See footnote (a). • •Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels and add fluid asneeded. • •
Perform any needed additional services. See “Additional Required Services” inthis section. • •
Inspect suspension and steering components. See footnote (b). •Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c). •Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d). •Inspect restraint system components. See footnote (e). •Lubricate body components. See footnote (f). •Check transmission fluid level and add fluid as needed. •
6-5
Additional Required ServicesThe following services should be performed at the first maintenance service (I or II) after the indicated miles(kilometers) shown for each item.
Additional Required Services
Service25,000
(41 500)50,000
(83 000)75,000
(125 000)100,000
(166 000)125,000
(207 500)150,000
(240 000)
Inspect fuel system for damage orleaks. • • • • • •
Inspect exhaust system for loose ordamaged components. • • • • • •
Replace fuel filter. An Emission ControlService. See footnote †. • • • • • •
Replace engine air cleaner filter. SeeEngine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 5-20.An Emission Control Service.
Automatic transfer case only: Changetransfer case fluid. See footnote (g). • • •
Replace spark plugs. An EmissionControl Service. •
V8 engine only: Inspect spark plugwires. An Emission Control Service. •
Engine cooling system service (orevery 5 years, whichever occurs first).An Emission Control Service. Seefootnote (i).
•
Inspect engine accessory drive belt. AnEmission Control Service. •
Maintenance Footnotes† The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or theCalifornia Air Resources Board has determined that thefailure to perform this maintenance item will not nullifythe emission warranty or limit recall liability prior tothe completion of the vehicle’s useful life. We, however,urge that all recommended maintenance services beperformed at the indicated intervals and themaintenance be recorded.
(a) Visually inspect brake lines and hoses for properhook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Inspectdisc brake pads for wear and rotors for surfacecondition. Inspect other brake parts, including calipers,parking brake, etc.
(b) Visually inspect front and rear suspension andsteering system for damaged, loose or missing parts orsigns of wear. Inspect power steering lines andhoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks,chafing, etc.
6-7
(c) Visually inspect hoses and have them replaced ifthey are cracked, swollen or deteriorated. Inspectall pipes, fittings and clamps; replace with genuine GMparts as needed. To help ensure proper operation, apressure test of the cooling system and pressurecap and cleaning the outside of the radiator and airconditioning condenser is recommended at least once ayear.
(d) Visually inspect wiper blades for wear or cracking.Replace blade inserts that appear worn or damagedor that streak or miss areas of the windshield.
(e) Make sure the safety belt reminder light and all yourbelts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and anchoragesare working properly. Look for any other loose ordamaged safety belt system parts. If you see anythingthat might keep a safety belt system from doing itsjob, have it repaired. Have any torn or frayed safety beltsreplaced. Also look for any opened or broken air bagcoverings, and have them repaired or replaced. (The airbag system does not need regular maintenance.)
(f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders, hood latch assembly,secondary latch, pivots, spring anchor, release pawl,rear compartment hinges, outer liftgate handle pivotpoints, rear door detent link, roller mechanism, liftgatehandle pivot points, latch bolt, fuel door hinge, cargodoor hinge, locks and folding seat hardware.
More frequent lubrication may be required whenexposed to a corrosive environment. Applying siliconegrease on weatherstrips with a clean cloth will makethem last longer, seal better and not stick or squeak.
(g) Add fluid as needed. A fluid loss could indicatea problem; repair as needed. Check vent hose attransfer case for kinks and proper installation.
(h) Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if thevehicle is mainly driven under one or more of theseconditions:
− In heavy city traffic where the outside temperatureregularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.
− In hilly or mountainous terrain.− When doing frequent trailer towing.− Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery
service.
(i) Drain, flush and refill cooling system. See EngineCoolant on page 5-23 for what to use. Inspect hoses.Clean radiator, condenser, pressure cap and filler neck.Pressure test the cooling system and pressure cap.
(j) A fluid loss in any vehicle system could indicate aproblem. Have the system inspected and repaired andthe fluid level checked. Add fluid if needed.
6-8
Owner Checks and ServicesThese owner checks and services should be performedat the intervals specified to help ensure the safety,dependability and emission control performance of yourvehicle. Your GM Goodwrench dealer can assist youwith these checks and services.
Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to yourvehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shownin Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.
At Each Fuel FillIt is important to perform these underhood checks ateach fuel fill.
Engine Oil Level CheckCheck the engine oil level and add the proper oil ifnecessary. See Engine Oil on page 5-15 for furtherdetails.
Notice: It is important to check your oil regularlyand keep it at the proper level. Failure to keep yourengine oil at the proper level can cause damageto your engine not covered by your warranty.
Engine Coolant Level CheckCheck the engine coolant level and addDEX-COOL® coolant mixture if necessary. See EngineCoolant on page 5-23 for further details.
Windshield Washer Fluid Level CheckCheck the windshield washer fluid level in the windshieldwasher tank and add the proper fluid if necessary.
At Least Once a Month
Tire Inflation CheckVisually inspect your tires and make sure tires areinflated to the correct pressures. Do not forget to checkyour spare tire. See Tires on page 5-52 for furtherdetails. Check to make sure the spare tire is storedsecurely. Push, pull and then try to rotate or turnthe spare tire. If it moves, tighten it. See Changing aFlat Tire on page 5-68.
6-9
At Least Once a Year
Starter Switch Check
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this inspection, thevehicle could move suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could be injured.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough roomaround the vehicle.
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regularbrake. See Parking Brake on page 2-28 ifnecessary.Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready toturn off the engine immediately if it starts.
3. Try to start the engine in each gear. The startershould work only in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).If the starter works in any other position, contactyour GM Goodwrench dealer for service.
Automatic Transmission Shift LockControl System Check
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this inspection, thevehicle could move suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could be injured.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough roomaround the vehicle. It should be parked on a levelsurface.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See Parking Brakeon page 2-28 if necessary.Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately ifthe vehicle begins to move.
3. With the engine off, turn the key to the RUNposition, but do not start the engine. Withoutapplying the regular brake, try to move the shiftlever out of PARK (P) with normal effort. If the shiftlever moves out of PARK (P), contact your GMGoodwrench dealer for service.
6-10
Ignition Transmission Lock CheckWhile parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turnthe ignition key to LOCK in each shift lever position.
• The key should turn to LOCK only when theshift lever is in PARK (P).
• The key should come out only in LOCK.
Contact your GM Goodwrench dealer if service isrequired.
Parking Brake and AutomaticTransmission Park (P) Mechanism Check
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this check, your vehiclecould begin to move. You or others could beinjured and property could be damaged. Makesure there is room in front of your vehicle incase it begins to roll. Be ready to apply theregular brake at once should the vehicle beginto move.
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facingdownhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake, set theparking brake.
• To check the parking brake’s holding ability: Withthe engine running and transmission inNEUTRAL (N), slowly remove foot pressure fromthe regular brake pedal. Do this until the vehicle isheld by the parking brake only.
• To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding ability:With the engine running, shift to PARK (P). Thenrelease the parking brake followed by the regularbrake.
Contact your GM Goodwrench dealer if service isrequired.
Underbody Flushing ServiceAt least every spring, use plain water to flush anycorrosive materials from the underbody. Take care toclean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debriscan collect.
6-11
Recommended Fluids andLubricantsFluids and lubricants identified below by name, partnumber or specification may be obtained from yourdealer.
Usage Fluid/Lubricant
Engine Oil
Engine oil which meets GMStandard GM6094M and displaysthe American Petroleum InstituteCertified for Gasoline Enginesstarburst symbol. To determine theproper viscosity for your vehicle’sengine, see Engine Oil onpage 5-15.
Engine Coolant
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and use onlyDEX-COOL® Coolant. See EngineCoolant on page 5-23.
Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No.U.S. 12377985, in Canada88901242) or lubricant meetingrequirements of NLGI #2, CategoryLB or GC-LB.
Power SteeringSystem
GM Power Steering Fluid (GM PartNo. U.S. 89021184, in Canada89021186).
AutomaticTransmission
DEXRON®-III AutomaticTransmission Fluid.
Key LockCylinders
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, inCanada 10953474).
ChassisLubrication
Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No.U.S. 12377985, in Canada88901242) or lubricant meetingrequirements of NLGI #2, CategoryLB or GC-LB.
Front and RearAxle
SAE 75W-90 Synthetic AxleLubricant (GM Part No. U.S.12378261, in Canada 10953455)meeting GM Specification 9986115.
Transfer CaseAUTO-TRAK II Fluid (GM Part No.U.S. 12378508, in Canada10953626).
6-12
Usage Fluid/Lubricant
Rear DrivelineCenter Splineand Universal
Joints
Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No.U.S. 12377985, in Canada88901242) or lubricant meetingrequirements of NLGI #2, CategoryLB or GC-LB.
ConstantVelocity
Universal Joint
Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No.U.S. 12377985, in Canada88901242) or lubricant meetingrequirements of NLGI #2, CategoryLB or GC-LB.
Hood LatchAssembly,Secondary
Latch, Pivots,Spring Anchorand Release
Pawl
Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol (GMPart No. U.S. 12346293, in Canada992723) or lubricant meetingrequirements of NLGI #2, CategoryLB or GC-LB.
Usage Fluid/LubricantHood and DoorHinges, BodyDoor Hinge
Pins, LiftgateHinge andLinkage,
Folding Seatsand Fuel Door
Hinge
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, inCanada 10953474).
Outer TailgateHandle PivotPoints and
Hinges
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, inCanada 10953474).
WeatherstripConditioning
Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM PartNo. U.S. 12345579, in Canada992887).
WeatherstripSqueaks
Synthetic Grease with Teflon,Superlube (GM Part No. U.S.12371287, in Canada 10953437).
6-13
Normal Maintenance Replacement PartsReplacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.
Part GM Part Number ACDelco ® Part NumberEngine Oil FilterL6 89017342 PF61V8 25010633 PF44Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 15036141 A2014CAutomatic Transmission Filter Kit 24200796 —Spark PlugsL6 25337472 41-981V8 12571164 41–985Fuel Filter 88983068 GF831Windshield Wiper Blade (Performance Blade 22”) — 8–2221Backglass Wiper Blade (Performance Blade 16”) — 8–2161
6-14
Engine Drive Belt Routing
L6 Engine V8 Engine
6-15
Maintenance RecordAfter the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service and thetype of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements on page 6-2 in this section.Any additional information from Owner Checks and Services on page 6-9 can be added on the following record pages.Also, you should retain all maintenance receipts.
Maintenance Record
Date OdometerReading Serviced By Maintenance I or
Maintenance II Services Performed
6-16
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Date OdometerReading Serviced By Maintenance I or
Maintenance II Services Performed
6-17
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Date OdometerReading Serviced By Maintenance I or
Maintenance II Services Performed
6-18
Customer Assistance and Information ...............7-2Customer Satisfaction Procedure ......................7-2Online Owner Center ......................................7-3Customer Assistance for Text Telephone
(TTY) Users ...............................................7-4Customer Assistance Offices ............................7-4GM Mobility Program for Persons with
Disabilities ..................................................7-5Roadside Assistance Program ..........................7-6Courtesy Transportation ...................................7-7Vehicle Data Collection and Event Data
Records .....................................................7-9
Reporting Safety Defects ................................7-10Reporting Safety Defects to the United States
Government ..............................................7-10Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian
Government ..............................................7-11Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors .....7-11Service Publications Ordering Information .........7-11
Section 7 Customer Assistance and Information
7-1
Customer Assistance andInformation
Customer Satisfaction ProcedureYour satisfaction and goodwill are important toyour dealer and to Chevrolet. Normally, any concernswith the sales transaction or the operation of yourvehicle will be resolved by your dealer’s sales or servicedepartments. Sometimes, however, despite the bestintentions of all concerned, misunderstandings canoccur. If your concern has not been resolved to yoursatisfaction, the following steps should be taken:
STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a member ofdealership management. Normally, concerns canbe quickly resolved at that level. If the matter hasalready been reviewed with the sales, service or partsmanager, contact the owner of the dealership orthe general manager.
STEP TWO: If after contacting a member of dealershipmanagement, it appears your concern cannot beresolved by the dealership without further help, contactthe Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center by calling1-800-222-1020. In Canada, contact GM of CanadaCustomer Communication Centre in Oshawa by calling1-800-263-3777 (English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French).
We encourage you to call the toll-free number in orderto give your inquiry prompt attention. Please havethe following information available to give the CustomerAssistance Representative:
• Vehicle Identification Number (This is available fromthe vehicle registration or title, or the plate at thetop left of the instrument panel and visible throughthe windshield.)
• Dealership name and location
• Vehicle delivery date and present mileage
When contacting Chevrolet, please remember that yourconcern will likely be resolved at a dealer’s facility.That is why we suggest you follow Step One first if youhave a concern.
STEP THREE: Both General Motors and your dealerare committed to making sure you are completelysatisfied with your new vehicle. However, if you continueto remain unsatisfied after following the procedureoutlined in Steps One and Two, you should file with theBBB Auto Line Program to enforce any additionalrights you may have. Canadian owners refer to yourWarranty and Owner Assistance Information booklet forinformation on the Canadian Motor Vehicle ArbitrationPlan (CAMVAP).
7-2
The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court programadministered by the Council of Better BusinessBureaus to settle automotive disputes regarding vehiclerepairs or the interpretation of the New VehicleLimited Warranty. Although you may be required toresort to this informal dispute resolution program prior tofiling a court action, use of the program is free ofcharge and your case will generally be heard within40 days. If you do not agree with the decision given inyour case, you may reject it and proceed with any othervenue for relief available to you.
You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program using thetoll-free telephone number or write them at thefollowing address:
BBB Auto Line ProgramCouncil of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.4200 Wilson BoulevardSuite 800Arlington, VA 22203-1804
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
This program is available in all 50 states and the Districtof Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age,mileage and other factors. General Motors reserves theright to change eligibility limitations and/or discontinueits participation in this program.
Online Owner CenterThe Owner Center is a resource for your GM ownershipneeds. You can find your specific vehicle informationall in one place.
The Owner Center allows you to:
• Get e-mail service reminders.
• Access information about your specific vehicle,including tips and videos and an electronicversion of this owner’s manual. (United States only)
• Keep track of your vehicle’s service history andmaintenance schedule.
• Find GM dealers for service nationwide.
• Receive special promotions and privileges onlyavailable to members. (United States only)
Refer to the web for updated information.
To register your vehicle, visit www.MyGMLink.com.(United States) or My GM Canada withinwww.gmcanada.com (Canada).
7-3
Customer Assistance for TextTelephone (TTY) UsersTo assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, orspeech-impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs),Chevrolet has TTY equipment available at its CustomerAssistance Center. Any TTY user can communicatewith Chevrolet by dialing: 1-800-833-CHEV (2438).(TTY users in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)
Customer Assistance OfficesChevrolet encourages customers to call the toll-freenumber for assistance. If a U.S. customer wishesto write to Chevrolet, the letter should be addressed toChevrolet’s Customer Assistance Center.
United States – Customer AssistanceChevrolet Motor DivisionChevrolet Customer Assistance CenterP.O. Box 33170Detroit, MI 48232-5170
From Puerto Rico:1-800-496-9992 (English)1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)Fax Number: 313-381-0022
From U.S. Virgin Islands:1-800-496-9994Fax Number: 313-381-0022
Canada – Customer AssistanceGeneral Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Communication Centre, 163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
1-800-263-3777 (English)1-800-263-7854 (French)1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800
Overseas – Customer AssistancePlease contact the local General Motors Business Unit.
7-4
Mexico, Central America and CaribbeanIslands/Countries (Except PuertoRico and U.S. Virgin Islands) –Customer Assistance
General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.Customer Assistance CenterPaseo de la Reforma # 2740Col. Lomas de BezaresC.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.01-800-508-0000Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800
GM Mobility Program for Personswith Disabilities
This program, available toqualified applicants, canreimburse you up to$1,000 toward eligibleaftermarket driver orpassenger adaptiveequipment you may requirefor your vehicle (handcontrols, wheelchair/scooter lifts, etc.).
This program can also provide you with free resourceinformation, such as area driver assessment centers andmobility equipment installers. The offer is available fora limited period of time from the date of vehiclepurchase/lease. For more details, or to determine yourvehicle’s eligibility, see your GM dealer or call theGM Mobility Assistance Center at 1-800-323-9935. Texttelephone (TTY) users, call 1-800-833-9935.
GM of Canada also has a Mobility Program. Call1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details. All TTY userscall 1-800-263-3830.
7-5
Roadside Assistance Program
Security While You Travel1-800-CHEV-USA (243-8872)As the proud owner of a new Chevrolet vehicle, you areautomatically enrolled in the Chevrolet RoadsideAssistance program. This value-added service isintended to provide you with peace of mind as you drivein the city or travel the open road. Chevrolet’s RoadsideAssistance toll-free number is staffed by courteousand capable Roadside Assistance Representatives whoare available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.We will provide the following services during theBumper-to-Bumper warranty period, at no expenseto you:
• Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel($5 maximum) for the customer to get to the nearestservice station.
• Lock-out Service (identification required):Replacement keys or locksmith service will becovered at no charge if you are unable to gain entryinto your vehicle. Delivery of the replacement key willbe covered within 10 miles.
• Emergency Tow: Tow to the nearest dealership forwarranty service or in the event of a vehicle-disablingaccident. Assistance when the vehicle is mired insand, mud or snow.
• Flat Tire Change: Installation of a spare tire will becovered at no charge. (The customer is responsiblefor the repair or replacement of the tire if not coveredby a warrantable failure.)
• Jump Start: No-start occurrences which require abattery jump start will be covered at no charge.
• Dealer Locator Service
In many instances, mechanical failures are coveredunder Chevrolet’s Bumper-to-Bumper warranty.However, when other services are utilized, our RoadsideAssistance Representatives will explain any paymentobligations you might incur.
For prompt and efficient assistance when calling, pleaseprovide the following to the Roadside AssistanceRepresentative:
• Your name, home address, and home telephonenumber
• Telephone number of your location
• Location of the vehicle
• Model, year, color, and license plate number
• Mileage, Vehicle Identification Number and deliverydate of the vehicle
• Description of the problem
7-6
While we hope you never have the occasion to use ourservice, it is added security while traveling for youand your family. Remember, we are only a phone callaway. Chevrolet Roadside Assistance:1-800-CHEV-USA (1-800-234-8872), text telephone(TTY) users, call 1-888-889-2438.
Chevrolet reserves the right to limit services orreimbursement to an owner or driver when, inChevrolet’s judgement, the claims become excessive infrequency or type of occurrence.
Roadside Assistance is not part of or included in thecoverage provided by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.Buick reserves the right to make any changes ordiscontinue the Roadside Assistance program at anytime without notification.
Canadian Roadside AssistanceVehicles purchased in Canada have an extensiveroadside assistance program accessible from anywherein Canada or the United States. Please refer to theWarranty and Owner Assistance Information book.
Courtesy TransportationChevrolet has always exemplified quality and value inits offering of motor vehicles. To enhance yourownership experience, we and our participating dealersare proud to offer Courtesy Transportation, a customersupport program for new vehicles.
The Courtesy Transportation program is offered to retailpurchase/lease customers in conjunction with theBumper-to-Bumper coverage provided by the NewVehicle Limited Warranty. Several transportation optionsare available when warranty repairs are required.This will reduce your inconvenience during warrantyrepairs.
Plan Ahead When PossibleWhen your vehicle requires warranty service, youshould contact your dealer and request an appointment.By scheduling a service appointment and advisingyour service consultant of your transportation needs,your dealer can help minimize your inconvenience.
7-7
If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the servicedepartment immediately, keep driving it until it can bescheduled for service, unless, of course, the problem issafety-related. If it is, please call your dealership, letthem know this, and ask for instructions.
If the dealer requests that you simply drop the vehicleoff for service, you are urged to do so as early inthe work day as possible to allow for same day repair.
Transportation OptionsWarranty service can generally be completed while youwait. However, if you are unable to wait Chevrolethelps minimize your inconvenience by providing severaltransportation options. Depending on the circumstances,your dealer can offer you one of the following:
Shuttle ServiceParticipating dealers can provide you with shuttleservice to get you to your destination with minimalinterruption of your daily schedule. This includes a oneway or round trip shuttle service to a destination upto 10 miles from the dealership.
Public Transportation or FuelReimbursementIf your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs,reimbursement (five day maximum) may be available forthe use of public transportation such as taxi or bus. Inaddition, should you arrange transportation througha friend or relative, reimbursement for reasonable fuelexpenses (five day maximum) may be available.Claim amounts should reflect actual costs and besupported by original receipts.
Courtesy Rental VehicleYour dealer may arrange to provide you with a courtesyrental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental vehicleyou obtained if your vehicle is kept for a warranty repair.Reimbursement will be limited to a maximum of$30.00 a day and must be supported by receipts. Thisrequires that you sign and complete a rental agreementand meet state, local and rental vehicle providerrequirements. Requirements vary and may includeminimum age requirements, insurance coverage, creditcard, etc. You are responsible for fuel usage chargesand may also be responsible for taxes, levies,usage fees, excessive mileage or rental usage beyondthe completion of the repair.
Generally it is not possible to provide a like-vehicle as acourtesy rental.
7-8
Additional Program InformationCourtesy Transportation is available during theBumper-to-Bumper warranty coverage period, but it isnot part of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Aseparate booklet entitled “Warranty and OwnerAssistance Information” furnished with each new vehicleprovides detailed warranty coverage information.
Courtesy Transportation is available only at participatingdealers and all program options, such as shuttleservice, may not be available at every dealer. Pleasecontact you dealer for specific information aboutavailability. All Courtesy Transportation arrangementswill be administered by appropriate dealer personnel.
Canadian Vehicles: For warranty repairs duringthe Complete Vehicle Coverage period of the GeneralMotors of Canada New Vehicle Limited Warranty,alternative transportation may be available under theCourtesy Transportation Program. Please consultyour dealer for details.
General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify,change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation atany time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibilitypursuant to the terms and conditions describedherein at its sole discretion.
Vehicle Data Collection and EventData RecordsYour vehicle, like other modern motor vehicles, has anumber of sophisticated computer systems that monitorand control several aspects of the vehicle’sperformance. Your vehicle uses on-board vehiclecomputers to monitor emission control components tooptimize fuel economy, to monitor conditions forairbag deployment and, if so equipped, to provideanti-lock braking and to help the driver control thevehicle in difficult driving situations. Some informationmay be stored during regular operations to facilitaterepair of detected malfunctions; other informationis stored only in a crash or near crash event bycomputer systems commonly called event datarecorders (EDR).
In a crash or near crash event, computer systems, suchas the Airbag Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM)in your vehicle may record information about thecondition of the vehicle and how it was operated, suchas engine speed, brake applications, throttle position,vehicle speed, seat belt usage, airbag readiness, airbagperformance data, and the severity of a collision. Thisinformation has been used to improve vehicle crashperformance and may be used to improve crashperformance of future vehicles and driving safety.
7-9
Unlike the data recorders on many airplanes, theseon-board systems do not record sounds, such asconversation of vehicle occupants.
To read this information, special equipment is neededand access to the vehicle or the SDM is required.GM will not access information about a crash event orshare it with others other than
• with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if thevehicle is leased, with the consent of the lessee,
• in response to an official request of police or similargovernment office,
• as part of GM’s defense of litigation through thediscovery process, or
• as required by law.
In addition, once GM collects or receives data, GM may
• use the data for GM research needs,
• make it available for research where appropriateconfidentiality is to be maintained and need isshown, or
• share summary data which is not tied to a specificvehicle with non-GM organizations for researchpurposes.
Others, such as law enforcement, may have access tothe special equipment that can read the informationif they have access to the vehicle or SDM.
If your vehicle is equipped with OnStar, please checkthe OnStar subscription service agreement or manual forinformation on its operations and data collection.
Reporting Safety Defects
Reporting Safety Defects to theUnited States GovernmentIf you believe that your vehicle has a defect which couldcause a crash or could cause injury or death, youshould immediately inform the National Highway TrafficSafety Administration (NHTSA), in addition to notifyingGeneral Motors.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open aninvestigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists ina group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedycampaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved inindividual problems between you, your dealer orGeneral Motors.
7-10
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto SafetyHotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 inthe Washington, D.C. area) or write to:
NHTSA, U.S. Department of TransportationWashington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motorvehicle safety from the hotline.
Reporting Safety Defects to theCanadian GovernmentIf you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehiclehas a safety defect, you should immediately notifyTransport Canada, in addition to notifying GeneralMotors of Canada Limited. You may write to:
Transport Canada330 Sparks StreetTower COttawa, Ontario K1A 0N5
Reporting Safety Defects to GeneralMotorsIn addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) ina situation like this, we certainly hope you’ll notify us.Please call us at 1-800-222-1020, or write:
Chevrolet Motor DivisionChevrolet Customer Assistance CenterP.O. Box 33170Detroit, MI 48232-5170
In Canada, please call us at 1-800-263-3777 (English)or 1-800-263-7854 (French). Or, write:
General Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Communication Centre, 163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Service Publications OrderingInformation
Service ManualsService Manuals have the diagnosis and repairinformation on engines, transmission, axle, suspension,brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $120.00
7-11
Transmission, Transaxle, TransferCase Unit Repair ManualThis manual provides information on unit repair serviceprocedures, adjustments, and specifications for GMtransmissions, transaxles, and transfer cases.RETAIL SELL PRICE: $50.00
Service BulletinsService Bulletins give technical service informationneeded to knowledgeably service General Motors carsand trucks. Each bulletin contains instructions toassist in the diagnosis and service of your vehicle.In Canada, information pertaining to Product ServiceBulletins can be obtained by contacting your GeneralMotors dealer or by calling 1-800-GM-DRIVE(1-800-463-7483).
Owner’s InformationOwner publications are written specifically for ownersand intended to provide basic operational informationabout the vehicle. The owner’s manual will includethe Maintenance Schedule for all models.In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner’s Manual, andWarranty Booklet.
Current and Past Model Order FormsService Publications are available for current andpast model GM vehicles. To request an order form,please specify year and model name of the vehicle.
ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PM EasternTimeFor Credit Card Orders Only(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc. on theWorld Wide Web at: www.helminc.com
Or you can write to:
Helm, IncorporatedP. O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207
Prices are subject to change without notice and withoutincurring obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.
Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices arequoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents are to makechecks payable in U.S. funds.
7-12
AAccessory Power Outlets ................................. 3-19Adding a Snow Plow or Similar Equipment ......... 4-52Adding Washer Fluid ....................................... 5-36Additional Program Information ........................... 7-9Additives, Fuel ................................................. 5-6Add-On Electrical Equipment ............................ 5-92Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal .................. 2-21Adjusting the Speakers
(Balance/Fade) ............................ 3-65, 3-76, 3-89After Off-Road Driving ..................................... 4-27Air Bag
Readiness Light .......................................... 3-35Air Bag Systems ............................................. 1-49
How Does an Air Bag Restrain? .................... 1-56Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle ......... 1-58What Makes an Air Bag Inflate? .................... 1-55What Will You See After an
Air Bag Inflates? ...................................... 1-56When Should an Air Bag Inflate? ................... 1-54Where Are the Air Bags? .............................. 1-52
Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine ................................. 5-20Airbag Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) ...... 7-9AM ............................................................. 3-112Antenna, Fixed Mast ...................................... 3-114Antenna, XM™ Satellite Radio
Antenna System ........................................ 3-115Anti-lock Brake System ..................................... 4-7Anti-Lock Brake, System Warning Light .............. 3-39
Appearance Care ............................................ 5-83Care of Safety Belts .................................... 5-86Chemical Paint Spotting ............................... 5-89Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle ................ 5-84Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle .............. 5-86Finish Damage ............................................ 5-89Sheet Metal Damage ................................... 5-89Underbody Maintenance ............................... 5-89Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ................ 5-90Weatherstrips .............................................. 5-86
Approaching a Hill .......................................... 4-20Ashtrays ........................................................ 3-19Audio Output ................................................ 3-107Audio System(s) ............................................. 3-61
Audio Steering Wheel Controls .................... 3-111Care of Your Cassette Tape Player ............... 3-113Care of Your CD and DVD Player ................ 3-114Care of Your CDs and DVDs ....................... 3-114Chime Level Adjustment ............................. 3-115Fixed Mast Antenna ................................... 3-114Navigation/Radio System .............................. 3-99
Audio System(s)Radio with Cassette and CD ......................... 3-72Radio with CD ............................................ 3-62Radio with Six-Disc CD ................................ 3-86Rear Seat Audio (RSA) ............................... 3-110Setting the Time .......................................... 3-61Theft-Deterrent Feature ............................... 3-111
1
Audio System(s) (cont.)Understanding Radio Reception ................... 3-112XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ........... 3-115
Automatic Headlamp System ............................ 3-15Automatic Transfer Case .................................. 2-25Automatic Transmission
BBackglass Wiper Blade Replacement ................. 5-51Backing Up .................................................... 4-60Battery .......................................................... 5-40BATTERY NOT CHARGING ............................. 3-58Battery Replacement ......................................... 2-7Battery Run-Down Protection ............................ 3-18Before Leaving on a Long Trip ......................... 4-34Before You Drive ........................................... 3-100Before You Go Off-Roading .............................. 4-16Brake
Safety Belts ................................................ 5-86Your Cassette Tape Player .......................... 3-113Your CD and DVD Player ........................... 3-114Your CDs and DVDs .................................. 3-114
CHECK WASHER FLUID ................................. 3-59Checking Brake Fluid ...................................... 5-38Checking Coolant ............................................ 5-24Checking Engine Oil ........................................ 5-15Checking Things Under the Hood ...................... 5-10Checking Your Restraint Systems ...................... 1-58Chemical Paint Spotting ................................... 5-89Child Restraints
Child Restraint Systems ............................... 1-34Infants and Young Children ........................... 1-31Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) .......................... 1-40Older Children ............................................. 1-28Securing a Child Restraint Designed for
the LATCH System ................................... 1-42Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear
Outside Seat Position ............................... 1-43Securing a Child Restraint in the Center
Seat Position ........................................... 1-46Securing a Child Restraint in the Right
Front Seat Position ................................... 1-46Top Strap ................................................... 1-38Top Strap Anchor Location ............................ 1-39Where to Put the Restraint ........................... 1-37
CleaningInside of Your Vehicle .................................. 5-84Outside of Your Vehicle ................................ 5-86Underbody Maintenance ............................... 5-89Video Screen ............................................ 3-114Weatherstrips .............................................. 5-86
Cleaning Aluminum Wheels .............................. 5-88Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses ....................... 5-87Cleaning Fabric/Carpet .................................... 5-84Cleaning Glass Surfaces .................................. 5-86Cleaning Interior Plastic Components ................. 5-85Cleaning Leather ............................................ 5-85Cleaning the Top of the Instrument Panel ........... 5-85Cleaning the Windshield, Backglass and
Wiper Blades .............................................. 5-88Cleaning Tires ................................................ 5-88Cleaning Vinyl ................................................ 5-85Climate Control System
Compass Calibration ....................................... 2-35Compass Operation ......................................... 2-34Compass Variance .......................................... 2-35Content Theft-Deferrent .................................... 2-16Control of a Vehicle .......................................... 4-5Convenience Net ............................................ 2-48
3
CoolantEngine Temperature Gage ............................ 3-39Heater, Engine ............................................ 2-21
Cooling System .............................................. 5-28Cruise Control ................................................ 3-11Cruise Control Light ........................................ 3-45CURB VIEW ACTIVATED ................................. 3-60Current and Past Model Order Forms ................ 7-12Customer Assistance Information
Courtesy Transportation .................................. 7-7Customer Assistance for Text Telephone
(TTY) Users .............................................. 7-4Customer Assistance Offices ........................... 7-4Customer Satisfaction Procedure ..................... 7-2GM Mobility Program for Persons with
Disabilities ................................................ 7-5Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors .... 7-11Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian
Government ............................................ 7-11Reporting Safety Defects to the United States
Government ............................................ 7-10Roadside Assistance Program ......................... 7-6Service Publications Ordering Information ........ 7-11
Delayed Locking ............................................... 2-9Dinghy Towing ................................................ 4-45Doing Your Own Service Work ........................... 5-3Dolly Towing .................................................. 4-46Dome Lamp Override ...................................... 3-17Dome Lamps ................................................. 3-18Door
Delayed Locking ........................................... 2-9Locks .......................................................... 2-8Power Door Locks ......................................... 2-9Programmable Automatic Door Locks ............. 2-10Rear Door Security Locks ............................. 2-12
DriverPosition, Safety Belt ..................................... 1-14
DRIVER DOOR AJAR ..................................... 3-59Driver Information Center (DIC) ......................... 3-48
DIC Operation and Displays .......................... 3-49DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-57
DrivingAt Night ..................................................... 4-28City ........................................................... 4-32Defensive ..................................................... 4-2Drunken ....................................................... 4-2Freeway ..................................................... 4-33Hill and Mountain Roads .............................. 4-36In Rain and on Wet Roads ........................... 4-29Winter ........................................................ 4-37
Driving Across an Incline .................................. 4-24
4
Driving Downhill .............................................. 4-23Driving in Mud, Sand, Snow or Ice .................... 4-26Driving in Water .............................................. 4-26Driving On Grades .......................................... 4-60Driving on Off-Road Hills ................................. 4-19Driving on Snow or Ice .................................... 4-38Driving Through Deep Standing Water ............... 4-31Driving Through Flowing Water ......................... 4-31Driving Uphill .................................................. 4-20Driving with a Trailer ....................................... 4-59Dual Automatic Climate Control System ............. 3-23Dual Climate Control System ............................ 3-20DVD
Cleaning the Video Screen .......................... 3-114Distortion .................................................. 3-112Rear Seat Entertainment System .................. 3-100
DVD Player .................................................. 3-100
EElectrical System
Add-On Equipment ...................................... 5-92Fuses and Circuit Breakers ........................... 5-93Headlamps ................................................. 5-92Power Windows and Other Power Options ...... 5-92Windshield Wiper Fuses ............................... 5-92
Emergency Release for Opening Liftgate ............ 2-13Emissions Inspection and Maintenance
Gate Ajar Light ............................................... 3-47Gate Operator and Canadian Programming ........ 2-41Getting Familiar with Off-Road Driving ................ 4-17Glove Box ..................................................... 2-42GM Mobility Program for Persons with
Horn ............................................................... 3-6How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Recovery Tank ............................................ 5-30How to Add Coolant to the Radiator .................. 5-32How to Add Fluid ............................................ 5-23How to Check ........................................ 5-21, 5-60How to Check Lubricant ................................... 5-46How to Check Power Steering Fluid .................. 5-35How to Inspect ............................................... 5-20How to Use This Manual ...................................... iiHow to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................... 1-14Hydroplaning .................................................. 4-31
IICE POSSIBLE .............................................. 3-59If No Steam Is Coming From Your Engine .......... 5-27If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine ............... 5-26If the Light Is Flashing ..................................... 3-41If the Light Is On Steady ................................. 3-41If You Are Caught in a Blizzard ......................... 4-40If You Are Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow ....... 4-42If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer ..................... 4-54Ignition Positions ............................................. 2-18Infants and Young Children, Restraints ............... 1-31Inflation - Tire Pressure ................................... 5-60
Air Bag Readiness ....................................... 3-35Anti-Lock Brake System Warning ................... 3-39Brake System Warning ................................. 3-38Change Engine Oil ...................................... 3-44Charging System ......................................... 3-36Check Gages Warning ................................. 3-46Cruise Control ............................................. 3-45Gate Ajar ................................................... 3-47Low Fuel Warning ....................................... 3-48Malfunction Indicator .................................... 3-40Reduced Engine Power ................................ 3-45Safety Belt Reminder ................................... 3-35Security ..................................................... 3-44Service Four-Wheel-Drive Warning Light ......... 3-46
Lighted Visor Vanity Mirror ............................... 2-15Listening to a DVD ................................. 3-85, 3-99Loading Your Vehicle ....................................... 4-47Loading Your Vehicle for Off-Road Driving .......... 4-16Locking Rear Axle ........................................... 4-10Lockout Protection .......................................... 2-12
8
LocksDelayed Locking ........................................... 2-9Door ........................................................... 2-8Leaving Your Vehicle .................................... 2-12Lockout Protection ....................................... 2-12Power Door .................................................. 2-9Programmable Automatic Door Locks ............. 2-10Rear Door Security Locks ............................. 2-12
Loss of Control ............................................... 4-14Low Fuel Warning Light ................................... 3-48Luggage Carrier .............................................. 2-44Lumbar
Additional Required Services ........................... 6-6At Each Fuel Fill ........................................... 6-9At Least Once a Month .................................. 6-9At Least Once a Year .................................. 6-10Introduction .................................................. 6-2Maintenance Footnotes .................................. 6-7Maintenance Record .................................... 6-16Maintenance Requirements ............................. 6-2Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ......... 6-14Owner Checks and Services ........................... 6-9
Maintenance Schedule (cont.)Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ............. 6-12Scheduled Maintenance ................................. 6-4Using Your ................................................... 6-3Your Vehicle and the Environment ................... 6-2
Maintenance When Trailer Towing ..................... 4-62Making Turns ................................................. 4-60Malfunction Indicator Light ................................ 3-40Manual Lumbar Controls .................................... 1-3Manual Seats ................................................... 1-2Matching Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle ............... 2-6Memory Seat ................................................. 2-50Message
DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-57Mexico, Central America and Caribbean Islands/
Countries (Except Puerto Rico and U.S. VirginIslands) – Customer Assistance ....................... 7-5
Overhead Console .......................................... 2-43Overseas – Customer Assistance ........................ 7-4Owner Checks and Services .............................. 6-9Owners, Canadian ............................................... iiOwner’s Information ........................................ 7-12
PPark (P)
Shifting Into ................................................ 2-29Shifting Out of ............................................ 2-31
ParkingBrake ........................................................ 2-28Over Things That Burn ................................. 2-31
Parking on Hills .............................................. 4-61PASSENGER DOOR AJAR .............................. 3-59Passing ................................................. 4-13, 4-59Passlock® ...................................................... 2-17Personalization ............................................... 3-51Personalization, Climate Controls ...................... 3-31Plan Ahead When Possible ................................ 7-7Playing a Cassette Tape .................................. 3-81Playing a CD ................................. 3-70, 3-83, 3-94Playing a Specific Loaded CD .......................... 3-95Playing the Radio ........................... 3-63, 3-73, 3-87
Power Steering ............................................... 4-10Programmable Automatic Door Locks ................. 2-10Programmable Locking Feature ......................... 2-10Programmable Unlocking Feature ...................... 2-11Programming the HomeLink® Transmitter ........... 2-39
QQuestions and Answers About Safety Belts ......... 1-13
RRadiator Pressure Cap .................................... 5-25Radio Data System (RDS) ............... 3-62, 3-72, 3-86Radio Messages ..................................... 3-67, 3-78Radios .......................................................... 3-61
Care of Your Cassette Tape Player ............... 3-113Care of Your CD and DVD Player ................ 3-114Care of Your CDs and DVDs ....................... 3-114Navigation/Radio System .............................. 3-99
Radios (cont.)Radio Personalization ................................. 3-111Radio with Cassette and CD ......................... 3-72Radio with CD ............................................ 3-62Radio with Six-Disc CD ................................ 3-86Rear Seat Audio ........................................ 3-110Setting the Time .......................................... 3-61Theft-Deterrent .......................................... 3-111Understanding Reception ............................ 3-112
Locking ...................................................... 4-10Rear Climate Control System ............................ 3-28Rear Compartment Storage Panel/Cover ............ 2-45Rear Door Security Locks ................................ 2-12Rear Floor Storage Lid .................................... 2-47Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides ...................... 1-24Rear Seat Audio (RSA) .................................. 3-110Rear Seat Entertainment System ..................... 3-100Rear Seat Operation ......................................... 1-6Rear Seat Passenger Positions ......................... 1-21Rear Seat Passengers, Safety Belts .................. 1-21Rear Seats (TrailBlazer EXT) ............................. 1-7Rear Storage Area .......................................... 2-45Rear Underseat Fuse Block .............................. 5-99Rear Window Defogger ............................ 3-22, 3-27
11
Rearview Mirror, Automatic Dimming withOnStar® and Compass ................................. 2-34
Reclining Seatbacks .......................................... 1-4Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ................. 6-12Recreational Vehicle Towing ............................. 4-44Reduced Engine Power Light ............................ 3-45Remote Control ............................................. 3-103Remote Keyless Entry System ............................ 2-5Remote Keyless Entry System, Operation ............ 2-6Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the
Spare Tire .................................................. 5-76Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ................... 5-69Replacement Bulbs ......................................... 5-49Replacing Brake System Parts .......................... 5-40Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash .............................................. 1-59Reporting Safety Defects
Canadian Government .................................. 7-11General Motors ........................................... 7-11United States Government ............................ 7-10
Reprogramming a Single HomeLink® Button ....... 2-42Resetting Defaults ........................................... 2-42Restraint System Check
Checking Your Restraint Systems ................... 1-58Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash .......................................... 1-59Restraint Systems
Checking .................................................... 1-58Replacing Parts ........................................... 1-59
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ...................... 2-19
RFA # BATTERY LOW .................................... 3-60Right Front Passenger Position, Safety Belts ...... 1-21RIGHT REAR DOOR AJAR .............................. 3-60Roadside
Assistance Program ....................................... 7-6Rocking Your Vehicle To Get It Out ................... 4-42Routing, Engine Drive Belt ............................... 6-15Running Your Engine While You Are Parked ....... 2-32
Care of ...................................................... 5-86Driver Position ............................................ 1-14How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................ 1-14Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ..... 1-13Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for Children
and Small Adults ...................................... 1-24Rear Seat Passengers ................................. 1-21Right Front Passenger Position ...................... 1-21Safety Belt Extender .................................... 1-28Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ................. 1-20Safety Belts Are for Everyone ......................... 1-8
Safety Chains ................................................. 4-58Safety Warnings and Symbols .............................. iiiScanning the Terrain ....................................... 4-18Scheduled Maintenance ..................................... 6-4
Securing a Child RestraintCenter Seat Position .................................... 1-46Designed for the LATCH System ................... 1-42Rear Outside Seat Position ........................... 1-43Right Front Seat Position .............................. 1-46
Security Light ................................................. 3-44Security While You Travel .................................. 7-6Select ........................................................... 3-57Service ........................................................... 5-3
Adding Equipment to the Outside of YourVehicle ..................................................... 5-4
Doing Your Own Work ................................... 5-3Engine Soon Light ....................................... 3-40Four-Wheel-Drive Warning Light ..................... 3-46Publications Ordering Information ................... 7-11
SERVICE AIR BAG ......................................... 3-58SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM ............................. 3-58Service Bulletins ............................................. 7-12
Service Engine Soon Light in the United Statesor Check Engine Light in Canada .................. 3-40
Service Manuals ............................................. 7-11Setting Preset PTYs (RDS Only) ....... 3-66, 3-77, 3-90Setting Preset Stations .................... 3-64, 3-75, 3-88Setting the Time ............................................. 3-61Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble) .......... 3-64, 3-75, 3-88Sheet Metal Damage ....................................... 5-89Shifting Into Park (P) ....................................... 2-29Shifting Out of Park (P) ................................... 2-31Skidding ........................................................ 4-14Snow Plow .................................................... 4-52Some Other Rainy Weather Tips ....................... 4-31Spare Tire ..................................................... 5-83Special Fabric Cleaning Problems ..................... 5-84Specifications, Capacities ............................... 5-104Speedometer .................................................. 3-34Stalling on an Incline ....................................... 4-25Starting Your Engine ....................................... 2-20Steering ........................................................ 4-10Steering in Emergencies .................................. 4-11Steering Tips .................................................. 4-10Steering Wheel Controls, Audio ....................... 3-111Stereo RCA Jacks ......................................... 3-106Storage Areas
Convenience Net ......................................... 2-48Front Storage Area ...................................... 2-44Glove Box .................................................. 2-42
13
Storage Areas (cont.)Luggage Carrier .......................................... 2-44Overhead Console ....................................... 2-43Rear Floor Storage Lid ................................. 2-47Rear Storage Area ....................................... 2-45
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ............... 5-80Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow ...................... 4-42Sun Visors ..................................................... 2-15Sunglasses Storage Compartment ..................... 2-43Sunroof ......................................................... 2-50
Turn Signal Lamps ...................................... 5-48Testing the Alarm ............................................ 2-17Theft-Deterrent, Radio .................................... 3-111Theft-Deterrent Systems ................................... 2-16
Transmission Operation, Automatic .................... 2-22Transmission, Transaxle, Transfer Case Unit
Repair Manual ............................................ 7-12Transportation Options ...................................... 7-8Travel Note Recorder ...................................... 2-43Traveling to Remote Areas ............................... 4-17Trip Information .............................................. 3-49Trip Odometer ................................................ 3-34Turn and Lane Change Signals .......................... 3-7TURN SIGNAL ON ......................................... 3-58Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever ........................... 3-7Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer .................. 4-60Two-Wheel-Drive Vehicles ................................ 4-45
UUnderstanding Radio Reception ....................... 3-112Uniform Tire Quality Grading ............................ 5-64United States – Customer Assistance .................. 7-4Used Replacement Wheels .............................. 5-66Using Cleaner on Fabric .................................. 5-84Using HomeLink® ........................................... 2-41Using Song List Mode ..................................... 3-97Using the Recovery Hooks ............................... 4-43
VVehicle
Control ........................................................ 4-5Damage Warnings ........................................... ivLoading ...................................................... 4-47Symbols ......................................................... iv
Vehicle Data Collection and EventData Records ............................................... 7-9
Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN) ............................................. 5-91Service Parts Identification Label ................... 5-91
WWarning Lights, Gages and Indicators ................ 3-32Warnings
DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-57Hazard Warning Flashers ............................... 3-5
15
Warnings (cont.)Other Warning Devices .................................. 3-6Safety and Symbols ......................................... iiiVehicle Damage .............................................. iv
Washing Your Vehicle ...................................... 5-86Weight Distributing Hitches and Weight
Carrying Hitches .......................................... 4-57Weight of the Trailer ........................................ 4-54Weight of the Trailer Tongue ............................. 4-56What Kind of Engine Oil to Use ........................ 5-16What to Add .................................................. 5-38What to Do with Used Oil ................................ 5-19What to Use .......................... 5-24, 5-35, 5-36, 5-46Wheels
Alignment and Tire Balance .......................... 5-65Replacement ............................................... 5-65
When to Add Engine Oil .................................. 5-16When to Change Engine Oil
(GM Oil Life System) ................................... 5-18When to Check .............................................. 5-60When to Check and Change ............................ 5-21When to Check Lubricant ................................. 5-46When to Check Power Steering Fluid ................ 5-35When to Inspect ............................................. 5-20
When You Are Ready to Leave After Parkingon a Hill ..................................................... 4-62
Where to Put the Restraint ............................... 1-37Why Safety Belts Work .................................... 1-10Window Lockout ............................................. 2-15Windows ....................................................... 2-14
Power ........................................................ 2-15Windshield Washer ......................................... 3-10
